Home

AOC L22W861 Flat Panel Television User Manual

1. 81 Children in the vehicle 83 Panic alarm 86 Activating 86 Deactivating 86 Driving safety systems 87 ABS 87 BAS 89 ESP 89 Electro hydraulic brake system 92 Anti theft systems 96 Immobilizer 96 Anti theft alarm system 96 Tow away alarm 98 Controls in detail 101 Locking and unlocking 102 SmartKey 102 SmartKey with KEYLESS GO 105 Opening the doors from the inside 111 Opening the trunk 111 Closing the trunk 113 Valet locking 117 Trunk lid emergency release 117 Power closing assist for trunk lid 118 Automatic central locking 119 Locking and unlocking from the inside 119 Seats 121 Moving the seats forward and backward
2. 281 Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system 282 Tires and wheels 283 Important guidelines 283 Tire care and maintenance 284 Direction of rotation 286 Loading the vehicle 286 Recommended tire inflation pressure 291 Checking tire inflation pressure 292 MOExtended system 301 Tire labeling 302 Load identification 306 DOT Tire Identification Number TIN 307 Maximum tire load 308 Maximum tire inflation pressure 309 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards U S vehicles 309 Tire ply material 311 Tire and loading terminology 312 Rotating tires 315 Winter driving 316 Winter tires 316 Block heater Canada only 317 Snow chains 318 Maintenance 319 Maintenance service indicator message 319 Calling up the maintenance service indicator display 320 Resetting the maintenance service indicator 321 Vehicl
3. 151 Contents Vehicle status message memory menu 152 Settings menu 153 Trip computer menu 163 TEL menu 165 Automatic transmission 168 Gear selector lever position 170 Driving tips 171 Gear ranges 172 Automatic shift program 173 Gear selector lever one touch gearshifting 174 Steering wheel gearshift control one touch gearshifting 175 Manual shift program SL 55 AMG and SL 65 AMG only 177 Emergency operation Limp Home Mode 179 Good visibility 180 Headlamp cleaning system 180 Rear view mirrors 180 Sun visors 182 Rear window defroster 183 Automatic climate control 184 Deactivating the automatic climate control system 187 Operating the automatic climate control system in automatic mode 187 Setting the temperature 188 Adjusting air distribution 189 Adjusting air volume 190 Maximum cooling MAXCOOL 190 Front defroster 190 Air recirculation mode
4. 414 Disconnecting the batteries 416 Removing the batteries 417 Charging and reinstalling batteries 417 Reconnecting the batteries 418 Jump starting 419 Towing the vehicle 421 Installing towing eye bolt 423 Fuses 424 Fuse boxes in engine compartment 425 Fuse box in passenger compartment 426 Fuse in trunk 426 Emergency engine shut down 426 Technical data 427 Parts service 428 Warranty coverage 429 Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet 429 Identification labels 430 Layout of poly V belt drive 432 SL 550 432 SL 55 AMG 432 SL 600 SL 65 AMG 432 Engine 433 Rims and tires 435 Same size tires 436 Mixed size tires 437 MOExtended tires 439 Spare wheel
5. 10 Service and warranty information 10 Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes Benz automobiles 11 Maintenance 12 Roadside Assistance 12 Change of address or ownership 12 Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada 13 Where to find it 14 Symbols 15 Operating safety 16 Proper use of the vehicle 16 Problems with your vehicle 17 Reporting safety defects 18 Reporting safety defects 18 Vehicle data recording 19 Information regarding electronic recording devices 19 At a glance 21 Exterior view 22 Cockpit 24 Instrument cluster 26 Multifunction steering wheel 30 Center console 31 Upper part 31 Lower part 32 Overhead control panel 33 Storage compartments 34 Door control panel 36 Getting start
6. 121 Lumbar support 121 Multicontour backrest 122 Seat heating 123 Seat ventilation 125 Memory function 126 Storing positions into memory 127 Recalling positions from memory 127 Lighting 128 Exterior lamp switch 128 Corner illuminating front fog lamps 132 Combination switch 133 Hazard warning flasher 133 Interior lighting 134 Courtesy lighting 135 Trunk lamp 135 Instrument cluster 136 Adjusting instrument cluster illumination 136 Coolant temperature gauge 137 Trip odometer 137 Tachometer 138 Outside temperature indicator 138 Control system 139 Multifunction display 139 Multifunction steering wheel 140 Menus 142 Standard display menu 145 AMG menu 146 AUDIO menu 149 NAV menu 151 Distronic menu
7. 191 Air conditioning 193 Residual heat and ventilation 194 Ventilated glove box 195 Power windows 196 Opening and closing the windows 196 Synchronizing power windows 198 Retractable hardtop 199 Opening and closing the retractable hardtop 199 Driving systems 209 Cruise control 209 Distronic 213 Distance warning function 224 Active Body Control ABC 225 Parktronic system Parking assist 228 Useful features 233 Storage compartments 233 Cup holders 238 Ashtray 239 Cigarette lighter 239 Heated steering wheel 240 Load assist in the trunk 241 Power outlet 242 Telephone 243 Tele Aid 244 Garage door opener 251 Contents Operation 257 The first 1000 miles 1500 km 258 Driving instructions 259 Drive s
8. Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them in a safe place i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat belt the warning chime stops sounding and the seat belt telltale illuminates continuously The seat belt telltale will only go out if both the driver and front passenger s seat belt are fastened or the vehicle is standing still and a front door is opened 342 Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution 1 The red SRS indicator lamp comes on while driving There is a malfunction in the restraint sys tems The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices ETDs could deploy unexpectedly or fail to activate in an accident Drive with added caution to the near est authorized Mercedes Benz Center Warning G In the event that a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above the SRS may not be operational For your safety we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immedi ately to have the system checked otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident which could result in serious or fatal injury or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in an accident and or injury to you or to others 343 Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution H USA only Combination low tire pressure TPMS malfunction telltale
9. Warning G Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort wear unevenly increase stopping distance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris potholes etc 302 Operation Tires and wheels Tire labeling Besides tire name sales designation and manufacturer name a number of markings can be found on a tire Following are some explanations for the markings on your vehicle s tires 1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards page 309 2 DOT Tire Identification Number TIN page 307 3 Maximum tire load page 308 4 Maximum tire inflation pressure page 309 5 Manufacturer 6 Tire ply material page 311 7 Tire size designation load and speed rating page 302 8 Load identification page 306 9 Tire name Tire size designation load and speed rating 1 Tire width 2 Aspect ratio in 3 Radial tire code 4 Rim diameter 5 Tire load rating 6 Tire speed rating i For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration For more information see Rims and tires page 435 i For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration 303 Operation Tires and wheels General D
10. page 92 The gear selector lever is set to posi tion P R or N Move the gear selector lever or position D The vehicle is secured with the parking brake Release the parking brake page 54 353 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution mph Distronic You have attempted to set a speed be low 20 mph 30 km h Accelerate to a speed exceeding 20 mph 30 km h and set the speed page 210 The ESP is switched off Switch on the ESP page 92 The gear selector lever is set to posi tion P R or N Move the gear selector lever or position D The vehicle is secured with the parking brake Release the parking brake page 54 DISTRONIC Inoperative Distronic is malfunctioning or the dis play is malfunctioning Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Currently unavailable See Oper Manual Distronic is deactivated because the functionality is impaired by external in terferences e g high frequency sourc es such as too stations speed measuring systems etc Leave the area of the external interfer ence Activate Distronic again page 218 when the message DISTRONIC available again appears Distronic is deactivated because the Distronic sensor has not sensed any other vehicles or objects e g road sign or such for a long time Try to activate Distronic again pa
11. 2 Speedometer with L Left turn signal indi cator lamp 56 K Right turn signal indi cator lamp 56 Brake warning lamp USA only 335 3 Brake warning lamp Canada only 335 v ABS ESP warning lamp 332 Item Page E Distronic indicator lamp1 white or distance warning lamp red 213 339 3 Left multifunction display with Trip odometer 137 Main odometer Stored speed for Cruise control Distronic 209 151 213 1 Vehicles without Distronic Warning indicator lamp without function It illuminates when the igni tion is on It should go out when the engine is run ning Item Page 4 Reset button for Resetting trip odometer 137 Resetting individual set tings 153 Adjusting instrument cluster illumination 136 28 At a glance Instrument cluster 29 At a glance Instrument cluster Item Page 5 Tachometer with 138 A High beam head lamp indicator 133 Engine malfunction indicator lamp USA only Engine malfunction indicator lamp Canada only 336 C Roll bar warning lamp 340 Antilock Brake Sys tem ABS indicator lamp 334 1 Supplemental Restraint System SRS indicator lamp 342 Item Page lt Seat belt telltale 341 X Combination low tire pressure TPMS mal function telltale USA only Low tire pressure telltale Canada only 343 6 Right multifunction display with Gear selector l
12. 332 Brakes 335 CHECK ENGINE 336 337 Coolant 337 DTR 216 Electro hydraulic brake system 92 Engine diagnostics 336 337 Engine malfunction 29 ESP 89 Front passenger front air bag off 72 76 345 Fuel reserve 339 Seat belts 341 SRS 67 342 Turn signals 27 Language Multifunction display 156 Leather upholstery Cleaning 329 License plate lamps 159 398 402 Light alloy wheels cleaning 328 461 Index Light sensor 380 Lighter see Cigarette lighter Lighting Instruments 136 Interior 134 Settings control system 159 Trunk 135 Limiting the gear range 172 Limp Home Mode 179 Load assist 241 Lowering manually 394 Loading terminology 312 Loading the vehicle 286 Lock buttons 38 Door handle KEYLESS GO 64 Trunk KEYLESS GO 110 Locking the vehicle 60 In an emergency 393 Low beam headlamps 55 128 398 Replacing bulbs 400 Lowering Load assist manually 394 Roll bar 82 Luggage compartment rear 237 Luggage cover 205 Messages in display 387 Lumbar support adjustment 121 M Main fuse box 425 426 Maintenance Calling up maintenance service indicator display 320 Clearing maintenance service indicator message 319 Maintenance service indicator message 319 Maintenance service term exceeded 320 Resetting maintenance service indicator 321 Maintenance service When due 319 Maintenance service indicator 319 Maintenance System U S vehicles 319 Malfunction memory 152 Cal
13. In case of an accident liquid electrolyte may escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks Electrolyte has an irritating effect Do not al low the liquid to come into contact with eyes skin clothing or respiratory system In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can only be completely removed while in their liquid state and by apply ing plenty of water 48 Getting started Adjusting Interior rear view mirror Manually adjust the interior rear view mirror For more information see Rear view mir rors page 180 Exterior rear view mirrors The buttons are located on the lower part of the center console 1 Driver s side exterior rear view mirror button 2 Passenger side exterior rear view mir ror button 3 Adjustment button Switch on the ignition page 39 Press button 1 or button 2 to select the desired exterior rear view mirror Push adjustment button 3 up down left or right according to the desired setting For more information see Good visibility page 180 Warning G Exercise care when using the passenger side exterior rear view mirror The mirror surface is convex outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view Objects in mirror are closer than they appear Check your in terior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder be
14. Safety and Security Occupant safety Air bags Warning G Air bags are designed to reduce the poten tial of injury and fatality in certain frontal im pacts front air bags driver side knee bag or side impacts head thorax air bags How ever no system available today can totally eliminate injuries and fatalities The deployment of the air bags temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the air bags This dust however is neither injurious to your health nor does it indicate a fire in the vehicle The dust might cause some tem porary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this you may wish to get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or door Warning G To reduce the risk of injury when the front air bags inflate it is very important for the driver and passenger to always be in a prop erly seated position and to wear their seat belts For maximum protection in the event of a collision always be in normal seated position with your back against the backrest Fasten your seat belt and make sure that it is prop erly positioned on your body page 49 Since the air bag inflates with considerable speed and force a proper seating and hands on steering wheel position will help to keep you at a safe distance from the a
15. Turn off the engine If the engine is at operating tempera ture wait 5 minutes before checking oil If the engine is at operating tempera ture yet you must wait 30 minutes be fore checking oil If there is excess engine oil with the engine at normal operating temperature the following message will appear Engine oil level Reduce oil level Have excess oil siphoned or drained off Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center For more information on messages in the display concerning engine oil see the Practical hints section page 375 Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off It could cause damage to the engine and catalyt ic converter not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty 278 Operation Engine compartment Checking engine oil level with the oil dipstick SL 550 only When checking the oil level the vehicle must be parked on level ground the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 5 minutes with the engine turned off 1 Oil dipstick 2 Upper mark 3 Lower mark Open the hood page 274 Pull out oil dipstick 1 Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the dip stick guide tube Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after ap proximately 3 seconds to obtain accu rate reading The oil level is correct when it is be tween lower mark 3 min and upper mark 2 max of the oil dipstick If necessary add engine oil page 278 For more
16. Moreover tires and rims not approved by Mercedes Benz may under load exhibit dimen sional variations and different tire deformation characteristics that could cause them to come into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts Damage to the tires or the vehicle may be the re sult i Further information on tires and rims is available at any authorized Mercedes Benz Center A placard with the recommended tire in flation pressures is located on the driver s door B pillar Some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation pressure information for driving at high speeds page 292 or for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition page 292 If such information is provided it can be found on the placard located on the in side of the fuel filler flap The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires Follow tire manufacturer s maintenance recommendation included with vehicle i The following pages also list the approved wheel rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehi cles with winter tires Winter tires are not avail able as standard or optional factory equipment but can be purchased from an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Depending on vehicle model and the standard or optional factory equipped wheel rim tire config uration on your vehicle Performance Package Sport Package etc equipping your vehicle with winter tires approved for your vehicle mode
17. Press button or repeatedly to select the Distronic menu in the multifunction display 152 Controls in detail Control system Vehicle status message memory menu Use the vehicle status message memory menu to scan malfunction and warning messages that may be stored in the sys tem Such messages appear in the multi function display and are based on conditions or system status the vehicle s system has recorded The vehicle status message memory menu only appears if messages have been stored Press button or repeatedly until the vehicle status message mem ory menu appears in the multifunction display If the vehicle status message memory menu does not appear no messages have been stored If conditions have occurred causing status messages to be recorded the number of messages appears in the right multifunc tion display 1 Number of recorded status messages Press button k or j The stored messages will now be dis played in the order in which they have occurred For malfunction and warning messages see Vehicle status messag es in the multifunction display page 347 Warning G Malfunction and warning messages are only indicated for certain systems and are inten tionally not very detailed The malfunction and warning messages are simply a remind er with respect to the operation of certain systems and do not replace the owner s and or driver s responsibility to maintain the
18. Press upper switch position 2 again Level 2 Two red indicator lamps on rapid seat heating The seat heating automatically switches to level 1 after approxi mately 5 minutes 1 One red indicator lamp on normal seat heating The seat heating automatically switches off after approximately 30 minutes off No red indicator lamp on i If one lamp or both lamps on the seat heat ing switch are flashing there is insufficient volt age available since too many electrical consumers are turned on The seat heating switches off automatically The seat heating will switch back on again auto matically as soon as sufficient voltage is avail able 124 Controls in detail Seats Vehicles with seat ventilation The red indicator lamps on the switch indi cate the selected heating level The switch is located on the door control panel 1 Seat heating switch Switch on the ignition page 39 Switching on seat heating Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set One or two red indicator lamps on the button show the selected heating level Switching off seat heating Press button 1 repeatedly until all in dicator lamps go out Level 2 Two red indicator lamps on rapid seat heating The seat heating automatically switches to level 1 after approxi mately 5 minutes 1 One red indicator lamp on normal seat heating The seat heating automatically switches off after appro
19. Warning G This vehicle is a two occupant vehicle The rear storage area is not intended for use by occupants and is not equipped for properly seating or restraining occupants Thus this area should never be used by any persons Before operating the roll bar switch make sure that the roll bar s path is clear and no persons are injured by the moving roll bar due to inattention Raising or lowering of the roll bar could injure someone in it s proximi ty For your own safety we recommend to drive with the roll bar raised if the outside temper ature is below 5 F 15 C If the outside temperature falls below 5 F 15 C the roll bar must be raised manually us ing the buttons provided to avoid damaging the hydraulics 82 Safety and Security Occupant safety The roll bar raises automatically in an acci dent or in a critical driving situation You can also raise and lower the roll bar manu ally using the buttons provided The buttons for the roll bar are on the cen ter console under the retractable hardtop switch 1 Raise roll bar 2 Lower roll bar The roll bar can be moved manually when the ignition is switched on page 39 Raising the roll bar Lift the switch for the retractable hard top Press and hold button 1 until the roll bar is raised Lowering the roll bar Lift the switch for the retractable hard top If the roll bar was raised manually Press and hold button 2 until the
20. ing closing the retractable hard top Warning G Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so and lock the hardtop be fore continuing to drive You could other wise endanger yourself and others 204 Controls in detail Retractable hardtop The hardtop drive system has shut it self down For safety reasons no more than five consecutive attempts may be made to raise or lower the hardtop After about 10 minutes you may again attempt to open or close the retractable hardtop If the retractable hardtop still does open close or lock properly have the retractable hardtop system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center There is a malfunction in the retract able hardtop system Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Wind screen The wind screen deflects drafts away from the driver and passenger when the retract able hardtop is lowered It is stored in the trunk Installing Leave the wind screen folded and place it on the roll bar 1 Guide tabs Slide the wind screen into the roll bar until guide taps 1 on each side latch underneath the roll bar Make sure the fastening straps do not get caught Adjust the roll bar to a height page 81 that allows you to reach easily underneath it Warning G The wind screen can restrict the driver s vi sion to the rear of the vehicle To prevent a possible accident when visibility is limited e g in darkness the
21. one or more of your tires is significantly un der inflated You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper tire inflation pressure as indicated on the vehicle s tire information placard Driving on a significantly under in flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Each tire including the spare should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended tire infla tion pressure as specified on the Tire And Loading Information placard page 287 or on the tire inflation pressure label page 291 Warning G The Run Flat Indicator does not provide a warning for wrongly selected tire inflation pressures Always adjust tire inflation pres sure according to the placard on the driver s door B pillar or fuel filler flap The Run Flat Indicator does not replace reg ular checks of the tire inflation pressures since a gradual pressure loss in all four tires cannot be detected by the Run Flat Indicator The Run Flat Indicator is not able to issue a warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of tire inflation pressure e g tire blowout caused by a foreign object In this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully apply ing the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers Warning G The Run Flat Indicator can only warn you i
22. 334 Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution The yellow ABS indicator lamp comes on while driving The ABS has detected a malfunction and has switched off The BAS and the ESP are also switched off see messages in display The electro hydraulic brake system is still functioning normally but without ABS avail able If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning oth er systems such as Parktronic Distronic or the automatic transmission may also be malfunctioning Continue driving with added caution Wheels may lock during hard braking reducing steering capability Have the system checked at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions in creases the risk of an accident Read and observe messages in the display page 347 The charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts and the ABS was switched off The battery may not be sufficiently charged Switch off electrical consumers that are currently not needed e g seat heating If necessary have the generator and battery checked When the voltage is above this value again the ABS is operational again 335 Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution USA only 3 Canada only The red brake warning lamp comes on while driving and you hear a warning sound You are driving with the parki
23. 440 Electrical system 441 Main dimensions 442 Weights 443 Contents Fuels coolants lubricants etc 444 Capacities 444 Engine oils 446 Engine oil additives 446 Air conditioning refrigerant 446 Brake fluid 447 Premium unleaded gasoline 447 Fuel requirements 448 Gasoline additives 448 Coolants 449 Windshield and headlamp washer system 452 Index 453 9 Product information Introduction Product information Please observe the following in your own best interest We recommend using Genuine Mercedes Benz parts as well as conversion parts and accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle model We have tested these parts to determine their reliability safety and special suitabili ty for Mercedes Benz vehicles We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held responsible for them even if in indi vidual cases an official approval or authori zation by governmental or other agencies should exist Use of such parts and acces sories could adversel
24. All forward gears are available Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with gear selector lever in N can result in transmission damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty 171 Controls in detail Automatic transmission Driving tips Accelerator position Your driving style influences the transmission s shifting behavior Less throttle Earlier upshifting More throttle Later upshifting Kickdown Use kickdown when you want maximum acceleration Press the accelerator past the point of resistance The transmission shifts into the lowest possible gear Ease on the accelerator when you have reached the desired speed The transmission shifts up again Warning G Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in position P is dangerous Also position P alone is not intended to or capable of preventing your vehicle from moving possibly hitting people or objects Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P page 61 When parked on an incline turn the front wheels towards the road curb Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire Warning G When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch
25. Do not depress the brake pedal Position 0 Before you press the KEYLESS GO start stop button the vehicle s on board electronics have the status 0 as with SmartKey removed Position 1 Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button once This supplies power for some electrical consumers such as seat adjustment Ignition or Position 2 Press the KEYLESS GO start stop but ton twice This supplies power for all electrical consumers All lamps except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless acti vated in the instrument cluster come on For more information see SmartKey with KEYLESS GO page 105 For information on starting the engine us ing the KEYLESS GO start stop button see Starting with KEYLESS GO page 53 i If you now press the KEYLESS GO start stop button once again the ignition position 2 is switched on twice the power supply is again switched off i If you now press the KEYLESS GO start stop button once the power supply is again switched off i When you switch on the ignition the indica tor and warning lamps except high beam head lamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated in the instrument cluster come on The indicator and warning lamps except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated should go out when the engine is running This indicates that the respective systems are
26. If you are ever in an accident your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled Without your seat belt buckled you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt The air bags can only provide the protection they were designed to afford if the occupants are using their seat belts page 66 Warning G Children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropri ate infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child For additional information see Children in the vehicle page 83 A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint 50 Getting started Driving 1 Seat belt housing 2 Latch plate 3 Buckle 4 Release button With a smooth motion pull the belt from seat belt housing 1 Place the shoulder portion of the belt across the top of your shoulder and the lap portion across your hips Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3 until it clicks If necessary tighten the lap portion to a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up To release the seat belt press release button 4 and guide latc
27. Practical hints Replacing wiper blades Vehicles with KEYLESS GO Turn off the engine page 62 With the driver s door closed the start er switch is now in position 1 Turn combination switch to wiper setting II page 57 With wiper arms in the vertical position open the driver s door The starter switch is set to position 0 same as SmartKey removed from start er switch Turn combination switch to wiper setting 0 page 57 Removing wiper blades Fold the wiper arm forward until it snaps into place Turn wiper blade at a right angle to the wiper arm Slide the wiper blade sideways out of the retainer Installing wiper blades Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm in opposite direction of arrow Rotate the wiper blade into a position parallel to the wiper arm Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the windshield Make sure you hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts They could tear 405 Practical hints Flat tire Flat tire Preparing the vehicle Park the vehicle in a safe distance from moving traffic on a hard flat surface when possible Turn on the hazard warning flashers Turn the steering wheel so that the front wheels are in a straight ahead po sition Set the parking brake Move the gear selector lever to P Vehicles with SmartKey Turn off the engine page 62 Remove the SmartKey from the s
28. Safety and Security Driving safety systems For more information see the Practical hints section page 332 and page 355 Warning G Never switch off the ESP when you see the ABS ESP warning lamp v flashing in the instrument cluster In this case proceed as follows While driving off apply as little throttle as possible While driving ease up on the accelera tor Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid The ESP cannot prevent accidents result ing from excessive speed Warning G The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded The ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The ca pabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or danger ous manner which could jeopardize the us er s safety or the safety of others Because the ESP operates automatically the engine must be shut off SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1or KEYLESS GO start stop button in position 0 or 1 when the parking brake is being tested on a brake test dynamometer the vehicle is being towed with the front rear axle raised Active braking action through the ESP may oth e
29. The corner illuminating front fog lamps will operate with the engine running and with the exterior lamp switch in position B page 128 or the exterior lamp switch in position U page 128 or the daytime running lamp mode activated page 130 Driving forward Switching on corner illuminating front fog lamps Depending on whether you are turning left or right switch on the left or right turn signal page 56 The respective front fog lamp comes on and illuminates the road onto which you are turning Switching off corner illuminating front fog lamps The combination switch for the turn signal resets automatically after major steering wheel movements This will switch off the corner illuminating front fog lamps if they were activated by switching on the left or right turn signal If the turn signal should stay on after mak ing the turn the turn signal and corner illu minating front fog lamp can be switched off by returning the combination switch to its original position Driving rearward Switching on corner illuminating front fog lamps Place the gear selector lever in position R The inverse front fog lamp comes on automatically depending on the steer ing direction and steering angle Switching off corner illuminating front fog lamps Place the gear selector lever out of position R The respective front fog lamp goes out i Corner illuminating front fog lamps will only come on in low a
30. The transmission operates in first gear only For maximum use of engine s braking effect on very steep or lengthy downgrades 174 Controls in detail Automatic transmission Press program mode selector switch 1 repeatedly until the letter of the desired program mode appears in the right multifunction display Select C for comfort driving The vehicle starts out in second gear both forward and reverse for gentler starts This does not apply if full throttle is applied or gear range 1 is selected Traction and driving stability are improved on icy roads Upshifts occur earlier even when you give more gas The engine then operates at lower rpms and the wheels are less likely to spin Gear selector lever one touch gearshifting Even with an automatic transmission you can change the gears manually and limit or extend the gear range for automatic shifting with the gear selector lever in position D and driving in the automatic program mode C or S Downshifting Briefly press the gear selector lever to the left in the D direction The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next lower gear as permitted by the shift program This action simulta neously limits the gear range of the transmission page 172 Never change the program mode when the gear selector lever is out of position P This could result in a change of driving characteristics for which you may not be prepared i The last s
31. fort wear unevenly increase stopping dis tance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road de bris potholes etc i For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration 310 Operation Tires and wheels Quality grades can be found where appli cable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rat ing based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction The traction grades from highest to low est are AA A B and C Those grades rep resent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance Treadwear
32. frame upper windshield area hardtop shelf behind roll bars or trunk lid while the re tractable hardtop is being raised or lowered Serious personal injury may occur If potential danger exists release the re spective button on the SmartKey This im mediately interrupts the raising or lowering procedure You then can press button or to raise or lower the hardtop away from the danger zone 202 Controls in detail Retractable hardtop Engage the parking brake page 54 Close the luggage cover see Luggage cover page 205 Close the trunk lid Opening Summer opening feature Aim the transmitter eye at an outside door handle The SmartKey must be in close proxim ity to the outside door handle Press and hold button until the retractable hardtop is completely open The seat ventilation for the driver s seat switches on The rear side win dows open Release button to interrupt pro cedure Closing Convenience feature Aim the transmitter eye at the outside door handle The SmartKey must be in close proxim ity to the outside door handle Press and hold button until the retractable hardtop is completely closed The retractable hardtop and the rear side windows close Locking the retractable hardtop after raising lowering If the retractable hardtop is not properly locked lock it as follows i Make sure the retractable hardtop is dry be fore you open it Ot
33. gate operator or other device you wish to operate See the follow ing instructions for programming informa tion Interior rear view mirror with integrated re mote control 1 Indicator lamp 2 3 4 Signal transmitter button Needed for programming not part of vehi cle equipment 5 Hand held remote control of ga rage door opener gate operator or other device 6 Hand held remote control but ton Warning G Before programming the integrated remote control to a garage door opener or gate operator make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent po tential harm or damage When programming a garage door opener the door moves up or down When programming a gate operator the gate opens or closes Do not use the integrated remote control with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U S federal safety standards this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 A garage door that cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U S federal safety standards 252 Controls in detail Useful features Programming the integrated remote control Step 1 Switch on the ignition page 39 Step 2 If you have previously programmed an signal transmitter button and wish to retain its programming proceed to step 3 If you are programming the integrated remote control f
34. in an accident You and your passenger should always wear seat belts If you are ever in an accident your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled Without your seat belt buckled you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are properly wearing your seat belt Air bags can only protect as they are designed if the occupants are prop erly wearing their seat belts 78 Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning G Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous You could slide under the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the ab domen or neck This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body Keep door storage compartments closed while vehicle is in motion Failure to do so may cause the seat belt to catch at the rear and prevent proper positioning of the seat belt Warning G Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re strained with a separate seat belt Never use a seat belt
35. need for extreme care The responsibility during parking and other critical maneuvers always rests with the driver Special attention must be paid to objects with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes e g trailer couplings painted posts or road curbs Such objects may not be detected by the system and can damage the vehicle The operational function of the Parktronic system can be affected by dirty sensors es pecially at times of snow and ice See Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors page 326 Warning G Make sure no persons or animals are in the area in which you are maneuvering Other wise you run the risk of causing injury Interference caused by other ultrasonic sig nals e g working jackhammers car wash or the air brakes of trucks can cause the system to send erratic indications and should be taken into consideration 229 Controls in detail Driving systems The Parktronic system also deactivates when you place the gear selector lever in position P or depress the parking brake pedal The Parktronic system monitors the sur roundings of your vehicle with six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper 1 Sensors in the front bumper Range of the sensors Front sensors Rear sensors i To function properly the sensors must be free of dirt ice snow and slush Clean the sen sors regularly being careful not to scratch or damage the sensors see Cleaning the Pa
36. or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsu pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury 43 Getting started Adjusting Seat adjustment The seat adjustment switch is located in the door 1 Head restraint height 2 Seat height 3 Seat cushion tilt 4 Seat cushion depth 5 Seat fore and aft adjustment 6 Seat backrest tilt Switch on the ignition page 39 or Open the respective door Seat fore and aft adjustment Press the switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 5 Adjust seat to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the accelerator brake pedal safely The position should be as far to the rear as possible consistent with ability to properly operate controls Warning G Children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropri ate infant or child restraint recommended for the size and weight of the child The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle s seat belt fully in accordance with the child seat manufactur er s instructions A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint i The memory function page 126 lets you store the settings for the seat position together with the settings for the steering wheel and the exter
37. page 126 Do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could open the driver s door and unintentionally activate the easy entry exit feature which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury i The last set steering wheel position is stored when the ignition is switched off page 39 the position is stored in memory page 126 47 Getting started Adjusting With the easy entry exit feature activated the steering wheel tilts upwards when you remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or open the driver s door with the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or the KEYLESS GO start stop button in position 1 page 40 Mirrors Adjust the interior and exterior rear view mirrors before driving so that you have a good view of the road and traffic condi tions i If the current position for the steering wheel is in the uppermost tilt position the steering wheel will no longer be able to move upward when the easy entry exit feature is activated The adjustment procedure is briefly interrupted when the engine is started Warning G Let the system complete the adjustment procedure before setting the vehicle in mo tion All steering wheel adjustment must be completed before setting the vehicle in mo tion Driving off with the steering wheel still adjusting could cause the driver to lose con trol of the vehicle Warning G
38. s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems or brake failure i Data shown on placard example are for illus tration purposes only Load limit data are specif ic to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustration below Refer to placard on ve hicle for actual data specific to your vehicle i Data shown on placard example are for illus tration purposes only Seating data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustration below Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle 288 Operation Tires and wheels Steps for determining correct load limit The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49 Code of U S Federal Regulations Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966 Step 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicle s placard Step 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle Step 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilo grams or XXX lbs Step 4 The resulting figure equals the avail able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 140
39. sions Keep your vehicle in proper operating condition by following our rec ommended maintenance instructions as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet Emission control Certain systems of the engine serve to keep the toxic components of the exhaust gases within permissible limits required by law These systems of course will function properly only when maintained strictly ac cording to factory specifications Any ad justments on the engine should therefore be carried out only by qualified Mercedes Benz Center authorized techni cians Engine adjustments should not be altered in any way Moreover the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly according to Mercedes Benz servicing re quirements For details refer to the Maintenance Booklet To prevent damage to the catalytic convert ers only use premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should be repaired promptly Otherwise exces sive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic con verter causing it to overheat and potentially start a fire Warning G As with any vehicle do not idle park or op erate this vehicle in areas where combusti ble materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire 270 Operation Driving instructions Coolant temperature During severe operating conditions e g stop an
40. tance warnings 225 Controls in detail Driving systems 1 Distance warning function switch Activating Press switch 1 The indicator lamp on the switch comes on A loudspeaker symbol ap pears in the right multifunction display page 217 Deactivating Press switch 1 once more The indicator lamp on the switch goes out No loudspeaker symbol appears in the right multifunction display Active Body Control ABC The ABC system is an active comput er controlled system that hydraulically ad justs the suspension at all four wheels in response to various driving situations It automatically selects the optimum suspen sion tuning and ride height for your vehicle Vehicle level control Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride height to increase vehicle safety reduce fuel consumption Warning G To help avoid personal injury keep hands and feet away from wheel housing area and stay away from under the vehicle when low ering the vehicle chassis 226 Controls in detail Driving systems The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or lowered according to the selected level setting and to the vehicle speed With increasing speed ride height is re duced by up to approximately 0 5 inch 12 mm With decreasing speed the ride height is again raised to the selected vehicle level The following vehicle level settings can be selected when the vehicle is stationary Select the level 1 an
41. tow rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis frame or suspension parts i To signal turns while being towed with the hazard warning flasher in use turn SmartKey in starter switch to position 2 and activate the combination switch for the left or right turn signal in the usual manner only the selected turn signal will operate Upon canceling the turn signal the hazard warn ing flasher will operate again i If the battery is disconnected or discharged the SmartKey will not turn in the starter switch the gear selector lever will remain locked in position P For more information see Batteries page 414 and Jump starting page 419 423 Practical hints Towing the vehicle Installing towing eye bolt Front Example illustration SL 550 and SL 600 without Sport Package 1 Cover on passenger side of front bumper To remove cover Press mark on cover 1 in direction of arrow Lift cover 1 off to reveal the threaded hole for towing eye bolt To reinstall cover Fit locking tabs of cover under the lower edge of the opening in the bumper Apply even pressure on the upper part of the cover until it snaps into place Rear 1 Cover on passenger side of rear bumper To remove cover Insert flat blunt object as a lever into upper left or right recess of cover 1 Loosen cover 1 using the lever Fold cover 1 down in direction of ar row to reveal the threaded hole for the towing eye
42. 1 or M S for winter tires up to 100 mph 160 km h T M S1 up to 118 mph 190 km h H M S1 up to 130 mph 210 km h V M S1 up to 149 mph 240 km h i Not all M S rated tires provide special win ter performance Make sure the tires you use show M S and the mountain snowflake sym bol marking on the tire sidewall These tires meet specific snow traction performance re quirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Associ ation RMA and the Rubber Association of Canada RAC and have been designed specifi cally for use in snow conditions i For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration 307 Operation Tires and wheels DOT Tire Identification Number TIN U S tire regulations require each new tire manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced The TIN is a unique identifier which facili tates efforts by tire manufactures to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchasers the means to easily identify such tires The TIN is comprised of Manufacturer s identification mark Tire size Tire type code and Date of manufacture 1 DOT 2 Manufacturer s identification mark 3 Tire size 4 Tire type code at the option of the tire manufacturer 5 Date of manufacture DOT Department of Transportation A tire bran
43. 195 Automatic lighting control Interior lighting 135 Automatic locking when driving 119 Automatic shift program 173 Automatic transmission 168 Accelerator position 171 Comfort program mode 173 Emergency operation Limp Home Mode 179 Gear ranges 172 Gear selector lever 32 168 Gear selector lever position 168 170 454 Index Gear shifting malfunctions 179 Kickdown 171 Manual shifting 174 One touch gearshifting 174 Program mode selector switch 32 173 Starting the engine 52 Transmission fluid level 279 Automatic Transmission Fluid see ATF B Backrest Lumbar support 122 Multicontour seat 122 Power seat 44 Shoulder region support 122 Backup lamp Messages in the multifunction display 382 Replacing bulb 398 402 Bar 312 BAS 89 Batteries SmartKey Checking battery condition 105 Replacing 395 Batteries SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Checking battery condition 110 Replacing 395 Batteries Vehicle 281 Charging 417 Consumer battery 281 389 414 Jump starting 419 Messages in the multifunction display 366 Starter battery 281 414 Bead 312 Bi Xenon headlamps 398 Block heater Canada only 317 Brake Assist System see BAS Brake lamps 398 High mounted 398 Messages in the multifunction display 380 Brake pads Messages in the multifunction display 366 Brake system Messages in the multifunction display 370 Brakes 260 BAS 89 Brake fluid 272 445 447 Electro hydraulic brake s
44. Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System Advanced TPMS Canada only 298 Tire inflation pressure see the placard on the fuel filler flap Tire inspection 284 Tire load rating 314 Tire ply composition and material used 314 Tire speed rating 265 304 314 Tire terminology 312 Tire traction 265 468 Index Tires 283 Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System Advanced TPMS Canada only 298 Cleaning 285 Direction of rotation 286 Driving instructions 263 Low tire pressure telltale 343 Messages in display 385 Messages in the multifunction display 364 MOExtended 413 Retreads 283 Rims and tires 435 Rotating 315 Run Flat Indicator 293 Service life 284 Temperature 292 311 TPMS malfunction telltale 343 Tread depth 285 317 Wear pattern 315 Winter 316 Tools 388 Tow away alarm 98 Tow away alarm switch 32 Towing eye bolt vehicle tool kit Installing 423 Towing eye bolt see Vehicle tool kit Towing the vehicle 421 TPMS USA only 295 Traction 91 174 314 Transmission see Automatic transmission Tread 314 Tread depth 285 Treadwear indicators 314 Trip computer 163 Trip odometer 27 Resetting 137 Trunk Closing the lid 113 Lighting 135 Load assist 241 Lock button KEYLESS GO 110 Messages in display 387 Opening from inside vehicle 111 Opening closing system 113 114 Parcel net 237 Power closing assist for trunk lid 118 Unlocking 111 Unlocking KEYLESS GO 111 Unloc
45. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment i Canada only This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference re ceived including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment 257 Operation The first 1000 miles 1500 km Driving instructions At the gas station Engine compartment Tires and wheels Winter driving Maintenance Vehicle care 258 Operation In the Operation section you will find de tailed information on operating maintain ing and caring for your vehicle The first 1000 miles 1500 km The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the break in period the more satis fied you will be with its performance later on Drive your vehicle during the first 1000 miles 1500 km at varying but moderate vehicle and engine speeds During this period avoid heavy loads full throttle driving and excessive en gine speeds no more than 2 3 of max imum rpm in each gear Avoid accelerating by kickdown Do not attempt to slow the vehicle down by shifting to a lower gear using the gear selector lever Select positions 3 2 or 1 only when driving at
46. Brake system 1 1 US qt 1 05 l MB Brake Fluid DOT 4 Cooling system SL 550 SL 600 SL 55 AMG SL 65 AMG approx 12 3 US qt 11 6 l approx 13 6 US qt 12 9 l approx 12 7 US qt 12 0 l approx 16 4 US qt 15 5 l MB 325 0 Anticorrosion Antifreeze Low temperature cooling system SL 600 SL 65 AMG approx 2 2 US qt 2 1 l approx 3 1 US qt 2 9 l MB 325 0 Anticorrosion Antifreeze Fuel tank including a reserve of All models SL 550 SL 600 SL 55 AMG SL 65 AMG 21 1 US gal 80 0 l 2 6 US gal 10 0 l 2 6 US gal 10 0 l 3 7 US gal 14 0 l 3 7 US gal 14 0 l Premium unleaded gasoline Minimum Posted Octane 91 Avg of 96 RON 86 MON 446 Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Engine oils Engine oils are specifically tested for their suitability in our engines and durability for our service intervals Therefore only use approved engine oils and oil filters re quired for vehicles with Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS Canada vehicles For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters refer to the Factory Ap proved Service Products pamphlet or con tact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Engine oil additives Do not blend oil additives with engine oil They may damage the engine Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil additives are not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Air conditioning refrigerant R 134a HFC refrigerant and special
47. ESP is switched off it will not sta bilize the vehicle if the system recognizes that the vehicle starts to skid or that a wheel is spinning Switch the ESP back on page 92 Exceptions page 91 If leaving the ESP switched off adapt your speed and driving to the prevail ing road and weather conditions If the ESP cannot be switched on Have the system checked at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible The ESP is not operational due to a malfunc tion Risk of accident Observe additional messages in the multifunction display Continue driving with added caution Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather condi tions Have the system checked at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible 333 Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution v The yellow ABS ESP warning lamp flashes while driving The ESP ABS or traction control has come into operation because of detected traction loss in at least one tire The cruise control and the Distronic system are deactivated When driving off apply as little throt tle as possible While driving ease up on the acceler ator Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather condi tions Do not deactivate the ESP Exceptions page 91 Failure to follow these instructions in creases the risk of an accident
48. GO with the lock button on each door handle or trunk lid The tow away alarm remains disarmed un til you lock the vehicle again Canceling the alarm To cancel the alarm With the SmartKey Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch or Press the or button on the SmartKey With KEYLESS GO Grasp an outside door handle The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be within 3 ft 1 m of the vehicle or Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button page 40 The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be inside the vehicle 100 101 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Seats Memory function Lighting Instrument cluster Control system Automatic transmission Good visibility Automatic climate control Power windows Retractable hardtop Driving systems Useful features 102 Controls in detail In the Controls in detail section you will find detailed information on how to oper ate the equipment installed on your vehi cle If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle this section will be of particular interest to you To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba sic functions of the vehicle refer to the Getting started section of this manual The corresponding page numbers are giv en at the beginning of each segment For more information on locking and un locking see the Getting started section page 38 Locking and unlocking Sm
49. II page 57 With wiper arms in the vertical position turn SmartKey in starter switch to position 0 Remove SmartKey from starter switch Warning G For safety reasons switch off wipers and re move SmartKey from starter switch vehi cles with KEYLESS GO Make sure the vehicle s on board electronics have status 0 before replacing a wiper blade Otherwise the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury Warning G Wiper blades are components that are sub ject to wear and tear Change the wiper blades twice a year preferably in the spring and fall Otherwise the windows will not be properly wiped As a result you may not be able to observe surrounding traffic condi tions and could cause an accident To avoid damage to the hood The wiper arms should only be folded for ward when in the vertical position Never open the hood when the wiper arm is folded forward Never open the hood when the wiper arms are folded forward Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back If released the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the wind shield glass without a wiper blade inserted Make sure the wiper blades are properly in stalled Improperly installed wiper blades may cause windshield damage For your convenience we recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center 404
50. If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on when the ignition is switched on have it checked and replaced if necessary If a lamp in the instrument cluster re mains on after starting the engine or comes on while driving refer to Lamps in the instrument cluster page 332 3 Starting position SmartKey with KEYLESS GO KEYLESS GO start stop button 1 USA only 2 Canada only i When you switch on the ignition the indica tor and warning lamps except high beam head lamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated in the instrument cluster come on The indicator and warning lamps ex cept high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated should go out when the engine is running This indicates that the respective systems are operational i The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the starter switch the starter battery may not be sufficiently charged Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary page 414 Get a jump start page 419 To prevent accelerated battery discharge or a completely discharged battery always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch when the engine is not in operation 41 Getting started Unlocking The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be located in the vehicle Make sure the gear selector lever is set to P
51. If the left and right air distribution controls as well as the airflow volume control are set to U and there is a high need for cooling MAXCOOL is activated MAX COOL appears on the temperature controls 6 and b page 185 This provides the fastest possible cooling of the vehicle interior when retractable hardtop is closed Automatic climate control panel with MAXCOOL activated Front defroster You can use this setting to defrost the windshield for example if it is iced up You can also defog the windshield and the side windows i Keep this setting selected only until the windshield or the side windows are clear again 191 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Activating Press button P page 185 The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air conditioning switches to the fol lowing functions automatically cooling on to dehumidify maximum blower speed and heating power air flows onto the windshield and the front side windows the air recirculation mode is switched off Deactivating Press button P page 185 The indicator lamp on the button goes out Defrosting is turned off The previous settings are in effect again Windshield fogged on the outside Switch the windshield wipers on page 57 If the automatic air distribution and air vol ume are switched off Turn air distribution controls 1 and 5 page 185 to position h or k or Press control button
52. Locking and unlocking Selective setting If you frequently travel alone you may wish to reprogram the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO so that grasping an outside door handle only unlocks the driver s door interior lockable storage compartments and the fuel filler flap Press and hold buttons and simultaneously for about 6 seconds until battery check lamp 5 page 106 flashes twice The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO will then function as follows Unlocking the driver s door and fuel fill er flap Grasp the driver s door handle All turn signals flash once The locking knob in the driver s door moves up The anti theft alarm system is disarmed Global unlocking Grasp the door handle on the passen ger side All turn signals flash once The locking knobs in the doors move up The anti theft alarm system is disarmed Global locking Press lock button on an outside door handle or the trunk lid With the trunk and all doors closed all turn signals flash three times The lock ing knobs in the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed Restoring to factory setting Press and hold buttons and simultaneously for about 6 seconds until battery check lamp 5 page 106 flashes twice If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehi cle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO then the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is malfunction ing or the vehicle battery i
53. PAG lubricating oil are used in the air condition er system Never use R 12 CFC or mineral based lubricating oil Otherwise damage to the system will occur Model Capacity Fuels coolants lubricants etc Air conditioning system R 134a refrigerant and special PAG lu bricant oil never R 12 Hydraulic system for retractable hardtop 0 42 US qt 0 4 l MB Hydraulic Fluid Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system 7 4 US qt 7 l MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1 1 Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and commercially available pre mixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze for temperatures below freezing Follow suggested mixing ratios page 452 Using engine oils and oil filters of specifica tion other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS Canada vehicles or changing oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS Canada vehicles will result in engine or emis sion control system damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Please follow Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS Canada vehicles recom mendations for scheduled oil changes Failure to do so could result in engine or emission control system damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty 447 Technical data Fue
54. SL 65 AMG Front axle Rims light alloy 8 5 J x 18 H2 8 5 J x 19 EH2 Wheel offset 1 18 in 30 mm 1 18 in 30 mm Summer tires1 1 Radial ply tires 255 40 ZR18 95Y 255 35 ZR19 96Y XL Extra Load Rear axle Rims light alloy 9 5 J x 18 H2 9 5 J x 19 EH2 Wheel offset 1 30 in 33 mm 1 22 in 31 mm Summer tires1 2 2 Must not be used with snow chains 285 35 ZR18 97Y 285 30 ZR19 98Y XL Extra Load 439 Technical data Rims and tires MOExtended tires SL 550 SL 550 Sport Package SL 600 SL 600 Sport Package SL 55 AMG Front axle Rims light alloy 8 5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset 1 18 in 30 mm Summer tires1 2 1 Radial ply tires 2 Must be used in conjunction with Tire Pressure Monitoring System U S vehicles Run Flat Indicator Canada vehicles or Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System Canada vehicles only 255 40 R18 95Y MOExtended Winter tires1 2 4 255 40 R18 95V M S MOExtended Rear axle Rims light alloy 9 5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset 1 30 in 33 mm Summer tires1 2 3 3 Must not be used with snow chains 285 35 R18 97Y MOExtended Winter tires1 2 3 4 4 Not available as factory equipment 285 35 R18 97V M S MOExtended 440 Technical data Rims and tires Spare wheel SL 550 SL 600 SL 55 AMG SL 55 AMG Performance Package SL 65 AMG Rim 6 B x 17 H2 6 B x 18 6 5 B x 19 Wheel offset 0 98 in 25 mm 0 98 in 25 mm 0 55 in
55. TIN is comprised of Manufacturer s identifica tion mark Tire size Tire type code and Date of manufacture Tire load rating Numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support Tire ply composition and material used This indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufac turers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and sidewall which include steel nylon polyester and others Tire speed rating Part of tire designation indicates the speed range for which a tire is approved Traction Force exerted by the vehicle on the road via the tires The amount of grip provided Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Treadwear indicators Narrow bands sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only 1 16 in 1 6 mm of tread remains Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s traction temperature and treadwear Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire Vehicle capacity weight Rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kilograms 150 lbs times the vehicle s designated seating capacity Vehicle maximum load on the tire Load on an individual tire that is determined
56. These batteries should always be suffi ciently charged in order to achieve their rated service life Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery maintenance intervals If you use your vehicle mostly for short distance trips you will need to have the battery charge checked more frequent ly When replacing batteries always use bat teries approved by Mercedes Benz If you do not intend to operate your vehicle for an extended period of time consult an authorized Mercedes Benz Center about steps you need to observe Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling Warning G Observe all safety instructions and precau tions when handling automotive batteries Risk of explosion Fire open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling batteries Avoid creating sparks Battery acid is caustic Do not allow it to come into contact with skin eyes or clothing Wear suitable protective cloth ing especially gloves apron and faceguard Wear eye protection Rinse any acid spills immediate ly with clear water Contact a physician if necessary Keep children away Follow the instructions in this Operator s Manual 282 Operation Engine compartment Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system The windshield washer re
57. Traction Temperature 200 AA A Warning G The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 311 Operation Tires and wheels Temperature The temperature grades are A the high est B and C representing the tire s resis tance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high tem perature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and ex cessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Mo tor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Tire ply material 1 Plies in sidewall 2 Plies under tread This marking tells you about the type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread Warning G The temperature grade for this tire is estab lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underin flation or excessive loading either sepa rately or in combination can cause excessive heat build up and possible tire failure i For illustration purposes only Actual data o
58. also by Air pollution Road salt Tar Gravel and stone chipping To avoid paint damage you should imme diately remove Grease and oil Fuel Coolant Brake fluid Bird droppings Insects Tree resins etc Frequent washing reduces and or elimi nates the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse influences More frequent washings are necessary to deal with unfavorable conditions near the ocean in industrial areas smoke exhaust emissions during winter operation You should check your vehicle from time to time for stone chipping or other damage Any damage should be repaired as soon as possible to prevent corrosion In doing so do not neglect the underbody of the vehicle A prerequisite for a thor ough check is a washing of the underbody followed by a thorough inspection Dam aged areas need to be re undercoated Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax base rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for the lifetime of the vehicle Post production treatment is neither necessary nor recommended by Mercedes Benz because of the possibility of incompatibility between materials used in the production process and others applied later Warning G Many cleaning products can be hazardous Some are poisonous others are flammable Always follow the instructions on the partic ular container Always open your vehicle s doors or windows when cleaning the inside Nev
59. any modifications made may produce an undesired effect on other sys tems Electronic malfunctions could seri ously impair the operating safety of your vehicle See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for repairs or modifications to electronic components Other improper work or modifications on the vehicle could also have a negative impact on the operating safety of the vehicle Some safety systems only function while the engine is running You should therefore nev er turn off the engine while driving Warning G Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or tires wheels for example when running over an obstacle road debris or a pothole may cause serious damage and impair the operating safety of your vehicle If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride distur bance or you suspect that damage to your vehicle has occurred you should turn on your hazard warning flashers carefully slow down and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires wheels for possible damage If the ve hicle appears unsafe have it towed to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center or other qualified maintenance or repair fa cility for further inspection or repairs Warning G Various warning labels are attached to your vehicle These warning labels are intended to make you and others aware of various risks You should not remove any of these warning labels unless expl
60. bag on or off based on the classified occu pant weight category determined by weight sensor readings from the passenger seat Occupants must sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with their back against the seat backrest and feet on the floor to be correctly classified If the occupant s weight is transferred to another object in the vehicle e g by leaning on armrests the OCS may not be able to properly approximate the occupant s weight category i The system does not deactivate the head thorax air bag and the emergency tension ing device 73 Safety and Security Occupant safety Both driver and the passenger should al ways use the 5 indicator lamp as an indication of whether or not the passen ger is properly positioned i If the seat including the trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way take the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Only seat accessories approved by Mercedes Benz may be used Warning G If the 5 indicator lamp illuminates when an adult or someone larger than a small individual is in the passenger seat have the passenger re position himself or herself in the seat until the 5 indi cator lamp goes out More information about air bag display messages page 356 In the event of a collision the air bag control unit will not allow passenger front air bag deployment when the OCS classified the passenger seat occupant as being up to or less than th
61. cause consequence Suggested solution E The white Distronic indicator lamp comes on while driving The Distronic distance sensor has recog nized a preceding vehicle E The red distance warning lamp comes on while driving and you hear a warning sound You are gaining too rapidly on the vehicle ahead of you The distance warning system has recog nized a stationary obstacle on your prob able line of travel Apply the brakes immediately Carefully observe the traffic situation You may need to brake or maneuver to avoid hitting an obstacle A The yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp lights while driv ing The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark Refuel at the next gas station page 271 The fuel cap is not closed tightly Check the fuel cap page 271 340 Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution C The yellow roll bar warning lamp comes on or flickers when the engine is running The roll bar system is malfunctioning For safety reasons always have the roll bar raised when driving with the retract able hardtop open Attempt to raise the roll bar manually page 81 Have the roll bar checked by an au thorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Warning G If the roll bar warning lamp does not come on does not go out after a long time flickers or comes on while driving as described above then the roll bar syst
62. com partment 234 b Parcel net in passenger footwell 236 c Armrest storage compart ment 234 Armrest storage tray 234 d Luggage straps 237 36 At a glance Door control panel Item Page 1 Inside door handle 111 2 Switches for opening clos ing door and rear side win dows 196 3 Storing seat mirror and steering wheel settings Memory function 126 4 Seat heating switch 123 Seat ventilation switch 125 5 Seat adjustment switch 42 121 6 Remote trunk opening switch 112 Remote trunk open ing closing switch 113 37 Getting started Unlocking Adjusting Driving Parking and locking 38 Getting started The Getting started section provides an overview of the vehicle s most basic func tions First time Mercedes Benz owners should pay special attention to the infor mation given here If you are already familiar with the basic functions described here the Controls in detail section will provide you with further information The corresponding page refer ences are located at the end of each seg ment Unlocking Unlocking with the SmartKey SmartKey with remote control 1 Lock button 2 Unlock button for trunk lid 3 Unlock button 4 Panic button Press unlock button on the SmartKey All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knobs in the doors move up The anti theft alarm system is dis armed The electro hydra
63. coolant level and add cool ant if necessary page 280 In case of accident If the vehicle is leaking gasoline Do not start the engine under any cir cumstances Notify local fire and or police authori ties If the extent of the damage cannot be de termined Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If no damage can be determined on the major assemblies fuel system engine mount Start the engine in the usual manner 60 Getting started Parking and locking You have now completed your first drive You have properly stopped and parked your vehicle End your drive as follows Warning G With the engine not running there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve hicle Warning G Do not park this vehicle in areas where com bustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re sult of vehicle movement before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always Keep right foot on brake pedal Firmly depress parking brake pedal Move the gear selector lever to position P Slowly release brake pedal When parked on an incline turn front wheels towards the road curb Turn the Smar
64. days In addition a signal sounds when the mes sage appears Any authorized Mercedes Benz Center will reset the maintenance service indicator following a completed maintenance ser vice Calling up the maintenance service indicator display You can call up the maintenance service in dicator display at any time to check when the next maintenance service is due Switch on the ignition page 39 Press button or on the mul tifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display appears in the multifunction display page 145 Press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel until the maintenance service indicator display with the maintenance service symbol 9 or appears in the left mul tifunction display and the maintenance service deadline appears in the right multifunction display i The menu overview can be found on page 142 321 Operation Maintenance Resetting the maintenance service indicator In the event that the maintenance service on your vehicle is not carried out by an au thorized Mercedes Benz Center you can have the maintenance service indicator reset The automotive maintenance facility carrying out the maintenance service will find the information for resetting the maintenance service indicator in the main tenance relevant information for your vehi cle Such information is available either from an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or directly from Mercedes Ben
65. device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference re ceived including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment 87 Safety and Security Driving safety systems Driving safety systems In this section you will find information on the following driving safety systems ABS Antilock Brake System BAS Brake Assist System ESP Electronic Stability Program Electro hydraulic brake system ABS The Antilock Brake System ABS regulates the brake pressure so that the wheels do not lock during braking This allows you to maintain the ability to steer your vehicle The ABS is functional above a speed of approximately 5 mph 8 km h indepen dent of road surface conditions On slippery road surfaces the ABS will re spond even to light brake pressure Warning G The following factors increase the risk of ac cidents Excessive speed especially in turns Wet and slippery road surfaces Following another vehicle too closely The ABS BAS ESP and the electro hy draulic brake system cannot reduce this risk Always adjust your driving style to the pre vailing road and weather conditions i In winter operation the maximum effecti
66. display 9 Basic service A Extended service B Clearing the maintenance service indi cator message The maintenance service indicator mes sage is automatically cleared after approx imately 30 seconds after you have switched on the ignition after you have reached the mainte nance service threshold while driving You can also clear the maintenance ser vice indicator message yourself i Vehicles equipped with Maintenance System U S vehicles only The Maintenance System tracks distance driven and the time elapsed since the last maintenance service calculates other maintenance service work required and calls for the next mainte nance service accordingly i Vehicles equipped with FSS Flexible Ser vice System only Canada vehicles The interval between maintenance services de pends on your driving habits A gentle driving style moderate engine speeds and the avoid ance of short distance trips will lengthen the in terval between services 320 Operation Maintenance 1 Reset button Press reset button 1 on the instru ment cluster The maintenance service indicator message is cleared and the standard display appears in the multifunction display page 145 Maintenance service term exceeded If you have exceeded the suggested main tenance service term you will see the fol lowing message in the right multifunction display Service A exceeded by XXXX miles km Service A exceeded by XXX
67. engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Continued on next page 372 Practical hints What to do if During severe operating conditions e g stop and go traffic the coolant tempera ture may rise close to 248 F 120 C Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the instrument cluster page 27 If the temperature rises again Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately Warning G Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire You could be seriously burned Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the engine hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Turn off the engine get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248 F 120 C Do ing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty 373 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution B Top up coolant See Oper Manual The coolant level is too low Add coolant page 280 Comply with all warnings while doing so If you have to add coolant f
68. equipment varies between models the descriptions and illustrations in this manual may differ slightly from the actual equipment of your vehi cle This symbol points to instructions for you to follow A number of these symbols appearing in succession indicates a multiple step procedure Page This symbol tells you where to look for further information on a topic This continuation symbol indi cates a procedure which will be continued on the next page This continuation symbol indi cates a warning which will be continued on the next page Display Words appearing in the multi function display are printed in the type shown here Warning G Warning notices draw your attention to haz ards that may endanger your health or life or the health or life of others Highlights hazards that may result in dam age to your vehicle i Helpful hints or further information you may find useful 16 Introduction Operating safety Proper use of the vehicle Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are familiar with the following information and rules the safety precautions in this manual the Technical data section in this manual traffic rules and regulations motor vehicle laws and safety stan dards Warning G Work improperly carried out on electronic components and associated software could cause them to cease functioning Because the vehicle s electronic components are in terconnected
69. eter can briefly vary from the speed setting for the Distronic 216 Controls in detail Driving systems If Distronic detects a vehicle directly ahead the Distronic indicator lamp E in the speedometer dial comes on white If Distronic calculates that there is a dan ger of collision The distance warning lamp E in the speedometer comes on red An intermittent warning sounds Immediately apply the brake to avoid a collision Under no circumstances should the driver await the intermittent warning sound before braking See the follow ing warning note The intermittent warning sound ceases and the red distance warning lamp E goes out when the neces sary distance to the vehicle ahead is established again Warning G An intermittent warning sounds and the distance warning lamp red E in the speedometer dial is illuminated if the Dis tronic system calculates that the distance to the vehicle ahead and your vehicle s current speed indicate that Distronic will not be ca pable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to maintain the preset following distance which creates a danger of a collision Immediately brake the vehicle to increase the distance to the preceding vehicle The warning sound is intended as a final caution that you have not interceded with your own braking inputs to avoid a potentially danger ous situation Do not wait for the operation of the warning signal to intercede with your own braking as t
70. exterior lamp switch The front fog lamps are switched off The green indicator lamp in the exterior lamp switch goes out Rear fog lamp driver s side only Switch on the front fog lamps page 131 Pull out the exterior lamp switch to sec ond stop The rear fog lamp is switched on The yellow indicator lamp in the lamp switch comes on page 128 Push in the exterior lamp switch to first stop The rear fog lamp is switched off The yellow indicator lamp in the exterior lamp switch goes out The front fog lamps remain lit Warning G In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions only switch from position U to B with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location Switching from U to B will briefly switch off the headlamps Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident i Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and or the low beam headlamps on Fog lamps should only be used in conjunction with low beam headlamps Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding permissible lamp operation i The fog lamps cannot be switched on with the exterior lamp switch in position U To switch on the fog lamps turn the exterior lamp switch to position B first 132 Controls in detail Lighting Corner illuminating front fog lamps The corner illuminating front fog lamps im prove illumination of the road into which you are turning
71. factors including driving style Higher oil consumption can occur when the vehicle is new the vehicle is driven frequently at higher engine speeds Engine oil consumption checks should only be made after the vehicle break in period To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood never open the hood if the wiper arms are folded forward away from the windshield Warning G When closing the hood use extreme caution not to catch hand or fingers Be careful that you do not close the hood on anyone Make sure the hood is securely engaged be fore driving Do not continue driving if the hood can no longer engage after an accident for example The hood could otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in motion and injure you and or others i Do not use any special lubricant additives as these may damage the drive assemblies Us ing special additives not approved by Mercedes Benz may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty More information on this subject is available at any Mercedes Benz Center 276 Operation Engine compartment Checking engine oil level with the control system When checking the oil level the vehicle must be parked on level ground with the engine at operating tempera ture the vehicle must have been sta tionary for at least 5 minutes with the engine turned off with the engine not at operating tem perature the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 30 mi
72. for more than one person at a time Warning G Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked Only use seat belts which have been ap proved by Mercedes Benz Do not make any modifications to the seat belts Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection Have all work carried out only by qualified technicians Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center 79 Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning G USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY Seat belts can only work when used properly Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this section as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all times because seat belts help reduce the likelihood of and potential severity of injuries in accidents includ ing rollovers The integrated restraint system includes SRS driver air bag driver side knee bag passenger front air bag head thorax air bags and ETD seat belt emergency tensioning device The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal front air bags driver side knee bag and ETD and side head thorax air bags and ETD im pacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds Never wear the shoulder belt under you
73. for repairs 264 Operation Driving instructions The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread Specified tire inflation pressures must be maintained This applies particularly if the tires are subjected to extreme operating conditions e g high speeds heavy loads high ambient temperatures Hydroplaning Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road hydroplaning may occur even at low speeds and with new tires Reduce vehicle speed avoid track grooves in the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain Warning G Although the applicable federal motor vehi cle safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators TWI be come visible at approximately 1 16 in 1 6 mm we recommend that you do not al low your tires to wear down to that level As tread depth approaches 1 8 in 3 mm the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced Depending upon the weather and or road surface conditions the tire traction varies widely Warning G Do not drive with a flat tire A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You may lose control of the vehicle Continued driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build up and possibly a fire 265 Operation Driving instructions Tire traction The safe speed on a wet snow covered or icy road is always lower than on a dry road You should pa
74. fore or aft after ad justing the head restraints the head restraints may readjust automatically 45 Getting started Adjusting Steering wheel Make sure that you can reach the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent at the elbows you can move your legs freely all displays including malfunction and indicator lamps on the instrument cluster are clearly visible Steering wheel adjustment The steering wheel adjustment stalk is located on the lower left of the steering column 1 Adjusting steering wheel in or out 2 Adjusting steering wheel up or down Switch on the ignition page 39 or Open the driver s door Warning G Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv ing Adjusting the steering wheel while driv ing could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the vehicle the steering wheel adjustment feature can be operated when the driver s door is open Therefore do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equip ment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury i The memory function page 126 lets you store the
75. i When you switch off the engine the RACETIMER will be reset to 0 after 30 seconds All laps are deleted i These functions are only available if you have saved at least one lap and have stopped the RACETIMER 149 Controls in detail Control system Lap analysis Press button or repeatedly until you see the AMG menu Press button j repeatedly until you see the lap analysis 1 Lap number 2 Lap time 3 Maximum speed 4 Average speed during lap 5 Lap length Press button j or k to see other lap analyses AUDIO menu The functions in the AUDIO menu operate the audio equipment which you currently have turned on If no audio equipment is currently turned on the message AUDIO OFF appears in the right multifunction display The following functions are available Selecting radio station Turn on COMAND and select radio Re fer to the separate operating instruc tions Press button or repeatedly until you see the currently tuned sta tion in the right multifunction display 1 Waveband setting 2 Station frequency Press button k or j repeatedly until the desired station is found i These functions are only available if you have saved at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER i Each lap is shown in its own submenu The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol 1 Function Page Selecting radio station 149 Selecting satellite radio station USA only 150 Operating CD
76. illuminated The position of the gear selector lever de termines which warning indicators will be activated Center approx 8 in 20 cm Corners approx 6 in 15 cm Gear selector lever position Warning indicator D Front area activated R or N Front and rear area activated P Neither activated 231 Controls in detail Driving systems As your vehicle approaches an object one or more distance segments will illuminate depending on the distance When the eighth distance segment illuminates you have reached the minimum distance Front area An intermittent acoustic warning will sound as the first red dis tance segment illuminates and a con stant acoustic warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound for the second distance segment The sig nal is canceled when the gear selector lever is placed in position P or the park ing brake is set Rear area An intermittent acoustic warning will sound when the first dis tance segment illuminates This signal quickens with each additional distance segment lit When the eighth distance segment illuminates the acoustic warning becomes a constant signal The signal is canceled when the gear selector lever is placed in position D or P or the parking brake is set Switching the Parktronic system on off You can switch off the Parktronic system manually The Parktronic switch is located in the low er part of the center console page 32 1 Parktronic
77. in wheel spin and loss of control Deactivate the cruise control when driv ing in fog The Resume function should only be oper ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ ously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed 210 Controls in detail Driving systems 1 Setting current or higher speed 2 Setting current or lower speed 3 Canceling the cruise control 4 Activating the cruise control or resum ing to last set speed Activating cruise control You can activate the cruise control when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 30 km h In the following cases you cannot activate the cruise control when you brake when you have set the parking brake when the gear selector lever is set to position P R or N when the ESP is switched off Setting current speed Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed Briefly lift the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 or depress in direction of arrow 2 The current speed is set Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The cruise control is activated The currently set speed appears in the mul tifunction display Warning G The cruise control brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded Keep in mind that the cruise control is a con venience system designed to assist the driv er during vehicle operation The driver is and must always remain responsible for the ve hicle s speed and for safe bra
78. indicator lamp Passenger side Front air bag 72 Pedals 259 Phone book 166 Loading 167 Quick search 167 Phone number Dialing 166 Redialing 167 Plastic parts cleaning 328 Poly V belt drive Layout 432 Potential problems associated with under inflated and overinflated tires 301 Power assistance 260 Power closing assist for trunk lid 118 Power outlet 242 Power seat Adjusting backrest tilt 44 Adjusting head restraint height 44 Adjusting head restraint tilt 44 Adjusting seat cushion depth 44 Adjusting seat cushion tilt 44 Adjusting seat height 44 Power windows 196 Cleaning 326 Closing with KEYLESS GO 198 Side windows 196 Synchronizing 198 Problems while driving 59 Production options weight 313 Program mode selector switch Automatic transmission 32 173 PSI 313 PULSE function Massage function 122 Q Quick search Phone book 167 464 Index R RACETIMER see Control system menus AMG menu Radio Operating 149 Satellite 150 Selecting station 149 Radio transmitters Control and operation 268 Range distance to empty Calling up 165 Reading lamp 33 Rear lamps see Tail lamps Rear luggage compartment 237 Rear view mirrors see Mirrors Recommended inflation pressure 313 Redial memory 167 Refueling 271 Regular checks 272 Regular driving style 228 Remote Trunk opening closing switch 114 Remote trunk opening switch 112 Remote trunk opening closing switch 113 Replacing Ba
79. information on engine oil see Technical data section page 444 and page 446 For information on messages in the multi function display concerning engine oil see the Practical hints section page 375 Adding engine oil i In vehicles without an oil dipstick the engine oil level is measured via the control system page 276 i The filling quantity between the upper and lower marks on the oil dipstick is approximately 2 1 US qt 2 0 l Only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS Canada vehicles For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters re fer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet in your vehicle literature portfolio or contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Main tenance System U S vehicles or FSS Canada vehicles or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS Canada vehicles will result in engine or emis sion control system damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty 279 Operation Engine compartment Example illustration SL 550 1 Filler cap Example illustration SL 55 AMG 1 Filler cap Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck Add engine oil as required Be careful not to overfill with o
80. interior thus preventing the win dows from fogging up Deactivating It is possible to deactivate the cooling function of the automatic climate control system The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified Press button 2 page 185 The indicator lamp on the button goes out The cooling function switches off after a short delay i A window will only return to its previous po sition if it has not moved to another position us ing the respective window switch after it was closed with button i Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction Warning G If you turn off the cooling function the vehicle will not be cooled when weather conditions are warm The windows can fog up more quickly Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others 194 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Activating Moist air can fog up the windows You can dehumidify the air with the air condition ing Press button 2 once more page 185 The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134A This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer Residual heat and ventilation With the engine switched off it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine Ac
81. is the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire under normal driving conditions Normal occupant weight The number of occupants the vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 68 kilograms 150 lbs Occupant distribution The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions Production options weight The combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5 lbs 2 3 kilograms in excess of those standard items which they replace not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight including heavy duty brakes ride levelers roof rack heavy duty battery and special trim PSI Pounds per square inch A standard unit of measure for air pressure gt bar kilopascal kPa Recommended tire inflation pressure Recommended tire inflation pressure listed on placard located on driver s door B pillar for normal driving conditions Provides best handling tread life and riding comfort Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead 314 Operation Tires and wheels TIN Tire Identification Number Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchases the means to easily identify such tires The
82. liquids on vehicle occupants and or vehicle equip ment only use containers that fit into the cup holder Use lids on open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the contents especially hot liquids could spill during braking vehicle maneuvers or in an accident Liquids spilled on vehicle occu pants may cause serious personal injury Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty When not in use keep the cup holder closed An open cup holder may cause injury to or others when contacted during braking vehicle maneuvers or in an accident Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup holder may come lose during braking vehi cle maneuvers or in an accident and be thrown around in the vehicle interior Ob jects thrown around in the vehicle interior may cause an accident and or serious per sonal injury 239 Controls in detail Useful features Ashtray 1 Cover plate 2 Sliding knob Opening ashtray Briefly touch cover plate 1 The ashtray opens automatically Closing ashtray Press cover plate 1 down until it latches Removing the ashtray insert Secure vehicle from movement by set ting the parking brake Move the gear selector lever to position N Now you have more room to take out the insert Press sliding knob 2 to the right The insert will eject a short distance Replacing the ashtray insert Press the insert into th
83. locator lighting feature is activated Setting night security illumination Exterior lamps delayed switch off fea ture Use this function to set whether you would like the exterior lamps to remain on for 15 seconds during darkness after exiting the vehicle and closing the doors With the delayed switch off feature activat ed and the exterior lamp switch in position U before the engine is turned off the following lamps will switch on when the en gine is turned off Parking lamps Tail lamps License plate lamps Side marker lamps Front fog lamps 161 Controls in detail Control system If after turning off the engine you do not open a door or do not close an opened door the lamps will switch off automatical ly after 60 seconds Move the selection marker with button or to the Lighting sub menu Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Headlamps delayed switch off appears in the multifunc tion display The selection marker is on the current setting Press button or to switch the delayed switch off feature On or Off Turn the exterior lamp switch to posi tion U before turning off the engine The delayed switch off feature is acti vated You can temporarily deactivate the de layed switch off feature Before exiting the vehicle turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 Then turn it to position 2 and back to 0 The delayed switch off feature is deac t
84. luggage cover opened see Opening lug gage cover page 206 You could otherwise be injured Before installing the luggage cover make sure that the cloth end is in front of the cloth holder Otherwise it could be damaged 208 Controls in detail Retractable hardtop Fold retainer springs of tensioning clasps downward and clip them into holders on both sides page 206 Close tensioning clasps on both sides by pressing them upward Pull handle of luggage cover towards the rear Clip eyelets onto side trim panels Close the zipper completely page 206 Fold back the zipper s cloth cover across the entire length of the luggage cover Sunshade for panorama roof The sunshade protects you from excessive sunlight coming in through the panorama roof 1 Stop buttons 2 Handle Opening Squeeze stop buttons 1 and guide the sunshade towards the rear Closing Using handle 2 slide the sunshade towards the front of the vehicle Warning G Do not operate the sunshade while driving Adjusting the sunshade while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehi cle 209 Controls in detail Driving systems Driving systems The driving systems of your vehicle are de scribed on the following pages Cruise control and Distronic with which the vehicle can maintain a preset speed Distance warning function only avail able with Distronic which warns of stationary
85. measure because it affects the load you can carry in your vehicle If a trailer is towed the tongue load must be added to the weight of all occupants riding and any cargo you are carrying in the vehicle The tongue load typically is 10 percent of the trailer weight and every thing loaded in it Your Mercedes Benz has been designed primarily to carry passengers and their cargo Mercedes Benz does not recom mend trailer towing with your vehicle 291 Operation Tires and wheels Recommended tire inflation pressure Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and Loading Information placard located on the driver s door B pillar page 286 The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be ad justed on cold tires The tires can be con sidered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km Follow recommended cold tire inflation pressures listed on placard Keeping the tires properly inflated provides the best handling tread life and riding comfort In addition to the tire placard on the driver s door B pillar also consult the fuel filler flap for any additional information pertaining to special driving situations For more information see Important notes on tire inflation pressure page 292 1 Tire and Loading Information placard with recommended cold tire inflation pressures The Tire and Loading Information placard lists the recommen
86. moderate speeds for hill driving Select C as the preferred shift program page 169 for the first 1000 miles 1500 km After 1000 miles 1500 km you may gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds to the permissible maximum All of the above instructions as may apply to your vehicle type also apply when driv ing the first 1000 miles 1500 km after the engine or the rear differential has been replaced Additional instructions for AMG vehicles During the first 1000 miles 1500 km do not exceed a speed of 85 mph 140 km h During this period avoid engine speeds above 4500 rpm SL 55 AMG or 4000 rpm SL 65 AMG in each gear i Always obey applicable speed limits 259 Operation Driving instructions Driving instructions Drive sensibly save fuel Fuel consumption to a great extent de pends on driving habits and operating con ditions To save fuel you should Keep tires at the recommended infla tion pressures Remove unnecessary loads Allow engine to warm up under low load use Avoid frequent acceleration and decel eration Have all maintenance work performed at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet and as required by the maintenance system Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Fuel consumption is also increased by driv ing in cold weather in stop and go traffic on short trips and in hilly area Drinking and driving Pedals Warning G Drin
87. necessary to achieve proper belt po sitioning for children over 41 lbs until they reach a height where a lap shoulder belt fits properly without a booster When the child restraint is not in use remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an accident Do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle even if the children are secured in a child restraint system Unsupervised chil dren in a child restraint system may use ve hicle equipment and cause an accident and or serious personal injury 86 Safety and Security Panic alarm An audible alarm and flashing exterior lamps will operate briefly 1 button Activating Press and hold button 1 for at least 1 second Deactivating Press button 1 again or Insert SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO in starter switch or Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button on the gear selector lever The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be in the vehicle i USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the fol lowing two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference re ceived including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment i Canada only This
88. not active and may not initiate a call Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center and have the system checked or contact the Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada as soon as possi ble i The indicator lamp in the respective button flashes until the call is concluded Calls can only be terminated by a Response Center or Custom er Assistance Center representative except Roadside Assistance and Information calls which can also be terminated by pressing button t on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the COMAND headunit If the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system does not reset contact the Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada or Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance at 1 800 FOR MERCedes 1 800 367 6372 in the USA or Customer Ser vice at 1 800 387 0100 in Canada i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated the COMAND system audio is muted and the select ed mode radio or CD pauses The optional cel lular phone if installed switches off If you must use this phone the vehicle must be parked Dis connect the coiled cord and place the call The COMAND navigation system if engaged will continue to run The display in the instrument cluster is available for use and spoken com mands are only available by pressing the RPT button on the COMAND unit A pop up window will appear in the COMAND di
89. open the starter switch is set to position 0 same as SmartKey removed from starter switch approximately 20 seconds after you locked the vehicle from outside i If the electro hydraulic brake system is acti vated as the brake pedal is first depressed you may feel a reduced pedal resistance and longer pedal travel than normal When releasing the pedal you may also feel the brake pedal pulsate and you may hear a sound which is caused by the activation of the electro hydraulic brake system pump This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction Pedal travel returns to normal when you release the brake pedal and the sound soon ceases If you experience the above while driving and the red brake warning lamp page 335 illumi nates and or warning messages appear in the multifunction display page 366 the brake system is malfunctioning Follow the instructions of the warning message s and have the brake system checked immediately Warning G Have brake pad replacement and other work on the electro hydraulic brake system car ried out by qualified technicians only Con tact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for further information The electro hydrau lic brake system must be deactivated prior to working on the system High pressure is intermittently built up in the system as part of its automatic self test In addition the system is automatically activated when the vehicle is unlocked by remote control when the drive
90. operational 42 Getting started Adjusting Seats Warning G All seat head restraint steering wheel and rear view mirror adjustments as well as fas tening of seat belts must be done before the vehicle is put into motion Warning G Do not adjust the driver s seat while driving Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous You could slide under the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the ab domen or neck That could cause serious or fatal injuries The seat backrest and seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and belts are properly positioned on the body Your seat must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt page 49 Never place hands under the seat or near any moving parts while a seat is being ad justed Warning G When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the start er switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the vehicle the power seats can be operated when the respective door is open Therefore do not leave children unattended in the vehicle
91. or outside door handle or press the trunk lid lock To prevent personal injury never actuate the closing assist mechanism by tampering with the door or trunk lid latch Warning G Only drive with the trunk closed as among other dangers such as blocked visibility ex haust fumes may enter the vehicle interior 119 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Automatic central locking The doors and the trunk lid lock automati cally when the vehicle is set into motion You can open a locked door from the in side Open door only when conditions are safe to do so You can deactivate the automatic locking using the control system page 162 Locking and unlocking from the inside You can lock or unlock the vehicle from in side using the central locking switches This can be useful for example if you want to unlock the passenger door from the in side or want to lock the vehicle before starting to drive The central locking switch does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap The switches are located above and be tween the center air vents of the air condi tioning Central locking switches 1 Locking 2 Unlocking i The doors unlock automatically after an ac cident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset threshold The vehicle locks automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at ve hicle speeds of approximately 9 mph 15 km h or more You could therefore lock your
92. player 150 i You can only store new stations using the designated feature on the radio Refer to the separate operating instructions 150 Controls in detail Control system Selecting satellite radio station USA only The satellite radio is treated as a radio ap plication Select satellite radio with the corre sponding key on the COMAND control panel SAT Press button or repeatedly until you see the currently tuned sta tion in the right multifunction display 1 SAT mode 2 Channel name or number Press button k or j repeatedly until the desired channel is found Operating the CD player Selecting CD track Turn on COMAND and select CD Refer to the separate COMAND operating in structions Press button or repeatedly until the settings for the CD currently being played appear in the right multi function display 1 Current CD with additional number from 1 to 6 when running from CD changer 2 Current track Press button k or j repeatedly until the desired track is selected i Additional optional satellite radio equipment and a subscription to satellite radio service pro vider are required for satellite radio operation Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for details and availability for your vehicle For more information refer to separate COMAND operating instructions 151 Controls in detail Control system Selecting MP3 CD track Turn on COMAND and select MP3 CD
93. pro grammed the indicator lamp will only start flashing after 20 seconds 253 Controls in detail Useful features Step 5 After indicator lamp 1 changes from a slow to a rapidly flashing light release the hand held remote control button and the signal transmitter button Step 6 Press and hold the just trained signal transmitter button 2 3 or 4 and observe indicator lamp 1 If indicator lamp 1 stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the respective signal transmitter button 2 3 or 4 is pressed and re leased Step 7 To program the remaining two signal transmitter buttons repeat the steps above starting with step 3 Rolling code programming To train a garage door opener or other rolling code devices with the rolling code feature follow these instructions after completing the Programming portion steps 1 through 6 of this text A second person may make the following training procedures quicker and easier Step 8 Locate training button on the garage door opener motor head unit Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand Depending on manufacturer the training button may also be referred to as learn or smart button If there is difficulty locating the transmitting button refer to the garage door opener Operator s Manual Step 9 Press the training button on the ga rage
94. roll bar is lowered If the roll bar was raised automatically Press and hold button 1 until you hear the roll bar lock into place Press and hold button 2 until the roll bar is lowered i When the roll bar is raised automatically you will hear a ratcheting sound Warning G If the roll bar warning light in the ta chometer remains lit after starting the en gine there is a malfunction In the display you see the message Raise roll over bar For safety reasons drive only with the roll bar upright until the malfunction is repaired Have your vehicle checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center i If you have raised the roll bar manually using the button the roll bar will automatically be low ered and then raised again when you close and open the retractable hardtop 83 Safety and Security Occupant safety Children in the vehicle If an infant or child is traveling with you in the vehicle Secure the child using an infant or child restraint appropriate to the age and size of the child Make sure the infant or child is proper ly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion Infant and child restraint seats and information on choosing an appropriate restraint system can be obtained from any Mercedes Benz Center Infant and child restraint systems We recommend all infants and children be properly restrained at all times while the vehicle is in motion The passenger lap shoulder belt ha
95. safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center 350 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution ABC Malfunction Stop car ABC is malfunctioning Stop the vehicle in a safe location and press the vehicle level control button to select a higher vehicle level page 226 If the vehicle does not raise observe the following when you continue to drive Do not turn steering wheel too far to avoid damaging the front fenders Listen for scraping noises Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible ABC Malfunction The capability of the ABC system is re stricted This can impair handling Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Vehicle rising Please wait The vehicle s level is too low while at a standstill The vehicle will be raised Do not drive off Wait until the message disappears from the multifunction display You may then drive off 351 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution ABS ABS ESP unavailable See Oper Manual The ABS and ESP are not available due to a malfunction The BAS is also deactivated The system s self diagnosis may not be completed yet The electr
96. see Windshield washer sys tem and headlamp cleaning system page 282 Rear view mirrors For information on setting the rear view mirrors see Mirrors page 47 Auto dimming rear view mirrors The reflection brightness of the exterior rear view mirror on the driver s side and the interior rear view mirror will respond automatically to glare when the ignition is switched on and incoming light from headlamps falls on the sensor in the interior rear view mir ror The interior rear view mirror will not react if reverse gear is engaged the interior lighting is switched on i The headlamps will automatically be cleaned when you have switched on the headlamps and operated the windshield wipers with wind shield washer fluid fifteen times When you switch off the ignition the counter re sets 181 Controls in detail Good visibility Warning G The auto dimming function does not react if incoming light is not aimed directly at sen sors in the interior rear view mirror The interior rear view mirror and the exterior rear view mirror on the driver s side do not react for example if the wind screen is in stalled Light hitting the mirror s at certain angles incident light could blind you As a result you may not be able to observe traffic con ditions and could cause an accident Warning G In case of an accident liquid electrolyte may escape from the mirror housing if
97. severe operating conditions e g stop and go traffic the coolant temperature may rise close to 248 F 120 C 138 Controls in detail Instrument cluster Tachometer The red marking on the tachometer de notes excessive engine speed To help protect the engine the fuel supply is interrupted if the engine is operated within the red marking Outside temperature indicator The outside temperature is displayed in the left or right multifunction display page 26 depending on the setting page 156 The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper area Due to its location the sensor can be affected by road or engine heat during idling or slow driving There fore the accuracy of the displayed temper ature can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer placed next the sensor not by comparison to external displays e g bank signs etc When moving the vehicle into colder ambi ent temperatures e g when leaving your garage you will notice a delay before the lower temperature is displayed A delay also occurs when ambient temper atures rise This prevents inaccurate tem perature indications caused by heat radiated from the engine during idling or slow driving Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Warning G The outside temperature indicator is not de signed to serve as an ice warnin
98. spare wheel only 3 Retaining screw 4 Storage well casing base Remove storage well casing base 4 Remove retaining screw 3 by turning it counterclockwise Remove spare wheel 1 390 Practical hints Where will I find Storing the spare wheel after use If you wish to store the spare wheel after use carry out the following steps Other wise the spare wheel may not fit the spare wheel well Unscrew the valve cap from the valve of the collapsible tire Take the valve extractor from the vehicle tool kit page 388 Unscrew the valve insert from the valve and allow the air to escape Screw the valve insert back into the valve Screw the valve cap back onto the valve Store the spare wheel by carrying out the steps described in Removing the spare wheel page 389 in reverse order Compressing the collapsible tire vehicles with 19 spare wheel only The collapsible tire on a 19 spare wheel must be compressed with two tensioning straps before you can store it back in the trunk Extend the tensioning strap by pulling the slider Place tensioning strap around spare wheel rim and collapsible tire with the buckle facing the inside of the rim Close the buckle Pull the loose end of the tensioning strap The tensioning strap must be pulled as tight as possible Make sure the spare wheel is dry before storing it i It may take a few minutes for the collapsible tire to deflate comp
99. specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration Warning G Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard located on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems or brake failure 309 Operation Tires and wheels Maximum tire inflation pressure 1 Maximum permissible tire inflation pressure This is the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure for the tire Always follow the recommended tire inflation pressure page 291 for proper tire inflation Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards U S vehicles Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors treadwear traction and temperature resistance 1 Treadwear 2 Traction 3 Temperature resistance i For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration Warning G Never exceed the max tire inflation pressure Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly adverse ly affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being overheated Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride com
100. steps in re verse order Reconnecting the batteries Turn off all electrical consumers Install starter battery in the designated location in the engine compartment Install consumer battery in the desig nated location in the trunk Attach supports and brackets Tighten support and bracket screws Connect positive lead 4 page 414 of the consumer battery and positive lead 1 page 414 of the starter bat tery and fasten covers Connect negative lead 2 page 414 of the starter battery Connect negative lead 5 page 414 of the consumer battery Reinstall the trunk floor Close trunk luggage cover page 206 Always connect the batteries in the order described below Otherwise the vehicle s elec tronics can be damaged Never invert the terminal connections i The following procedures must be carried out following any interruption of battery power e g due to reconnection Resynchronize the ESP page 355 Resynchronize side windows page 198 419 Practical hints Jump starting Jump starting If the starter battery is discharged the en gine can be started with jumper cables and the battery of another vehicle Observe the following Jump starting should only be performed when the engine and catalytic converter are cold Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen Let the battery thaw out first Only jump start from batteries with the same voltage rating 12V
101. system Press and hold button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO until trunk unlocks and begins to open or Pull on handle 1 Vehicles without KEYLESS GO The vehicle must be unlocked Opening the trunk from the inside Vehicles without trunk opening closing system 1 Remote trunk opening switch 2 Indicator lamp Pull switch 1 until the trunk begins to open The trunk lid unlocks Indicator lamp 2 comes on and remains lit until the trunk is closed again Lift the trunk lid The trunk lid swings open upwards automat ically Always make sure that there is sufficient overhead clearance To stop the opening procedure press button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO or pull the trunk lid handle 113 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Vehicles with trunk opening closing system 1 Remote trunk opening closing switch 2 Indicator lamp Pull and hold switch 1 until the trunk unlocks and begins to open Indicator lamp 2 comes on and re mains lit until the trunk closed Release switch 1 To interrupt the opening procedure Press or pull switch 1 Closing the trunk Closing trunk from outside manually 1 Handle Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on handle 1 Close trunk lid with hands placed flat on trunk lid The power closing assist automatically en sures that the lid is pulled closed com pletely page 118 The trunk lid swings open upwards a
102. systems is required by law in all 50 states the District of Columbia the U S territories and all Canadian provinces Even where this is not the case we strong ly recommend that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened and wear them properly For information on fastening seat belts see Fastening the seat belts page 49 Warning G If the 5 indicator lamp should not illuminate the system is not functioning You must see an authorized Mercedes Benz Center before seating any child on the pas senger seat Warning G Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat e g pillow since it reduces the effectiveness of the Occupant Classifi cation System The bottom of the child seat must make full contact with the passenger seat cushion An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause injuries to the child in case of an accident instead of increasing protec tion for the child Follow the manufacturer s instructions for installation of child seats i For information on infants and children trav eling with you in the vehicle and restraint sys tems for infants and children see Children in the vehicle page 83 Warning G Always fasten your seat belt before driving off Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained even pregnant women Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity
103. the diameter of the bead seat not the diameter of the rim edge Rim diameter is indicated in inches in Tire load rating The tire load rating 5 page 302 is a numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support For example a load rating of 91 corre sponds to a maximum load of 1356 lbs 615 kg the tire is designed to support See also Maximum tire load page 308 where the maximum load as sociated with the load index is indicated in kilograms and lbs 304 Operation Tires and wheels For additional information on tire load rating see Load identification page 306 Tire speed rating The tire speed rating 6 page 302 indicates the approved maximum speed for the tire Warning G The tire load rating must always be at least half of the GAWR page 312 of your vehi cle Otherwise tire failure may be the result which may cause an accident and or seri ous personal injury to you or others Always replace rims and tires with the same designation manufacturer and type as shown on the original part Warning G Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard located on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems or brake failure i Tire load rating 5 page 302 and tire sp
104. the connection is established the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number model color and lo cation subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be established Describe the nature of the need for as sistance The Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified Mercedes Benz technician or arrange to tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center For services such as labor and or towing charges may ap ply Refer to the Roadside Assistance Manual for more information The following is only available in the USA Sign and Drive services Services such as jump start a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with the vehicle spare tire are obtainable i The indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance button remains illuminated in red for approximately 10 seconds during the system self check after switching on the ignition together with the SOS button and the Informa tion button See system self check page 244 if the indi cator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds If the indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance button is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response C
105. the front wheel housings and in front of the rear wheel housings Warning G The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack tubes built into both sides of the vehicle To help avoid per sonal injury use the jack only to lift the ve hicle during a wheel change Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised Be certain that the jack is always vertical plumb line when in use es pecially on hills Always try to use the jack on level surface Be sure that the jack arm is fully inserted in the jack tube Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jack stands before working under the vehicle Warning G When turning the wheel wrench to loosen the wheel bolts make sure you position hands on the wrench in such a way that you avoid injury to yourself such as scraping your hands against the wheel Make sure turning the wheel wrench will not scratch or damage the wheel rim 408 Practical hints Flat tire 1 Jack support tube cover except SL 55 AMG SL 65 AMG and vehicles with Sport Package Open cover 1 by pressing at point in dicated by arrow Remove cover 1 taking care not to damage the locking tabs 2 Jack support tube cover SL 55 AMG SL 65 AMG and veh
106. the information contained on the placard with regards to loading your vehi cle i Spare wheels may be mounted against the direction of rotation spinning even with a unidi rectional tire for temporary use only until the reg ular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced Always observe and follow applicable temporary use restrictions and speed limitations indicated on the spare wheel 287 Operation Tires and wheels Tire and Loading Information Tire and Loading Information placard 1 Load limit information on the Tire and Loading Information placard The placard showing the load limit informa tion is located on the driver s door B pillar Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs on this placard The combined weight of all occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue load if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced in that statement Seating capacity The seating capacity gives you important information on the number of occupants that can be in the vehicle Observe front and rear seating capacity The placard showing the load limit information is locat ed on the driver s door B pillar page 286 1 Seating capacity information on the Tire and Loading Information placard Warning G Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard on the driver
107. the mirror glass breaks Electrolyte has an irritating effect Do not al low the liquid to come into contact with eyes skin clothing or respiratory system In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary Warning G Exercise care when using the passen ger side exterior rear view mirror The mirror surface is convex outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view Objects in mirror are closer than they appear Check your in terior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can be completely re moved only while in the liquid state by applying plenty of water 182 Controls in detail Good visibility Sun visors The sun visors protect you from sun glare while driving 1 Mounting 2 Vanity mirror cover 3 Vanity mirror lamp 4 Holder for gas cards Glare through the windshield Make sure the sun visor is properly engaged in mounting 1 Swing the respective sun visor down When you do not experience glare any more swing the sun visor up Glare through a door window Swing respective sun visor down Disengage the sun visor from mounting 1 Pivot the sun visor to the side Vanity mirror Swing respective sun visor down Flip up vanity mirror cover 2 to access the vanity mirror Vanity mirror lamp 3 comes on After using the vanity mirror flip d
108. the starter switch Vehicles with KEYLESS GO Open the driver s door Open the trunk Read and observe safety instructions and precautions page 281 Open the luggage cover in the trunk page 206 Remove the trunk floor The battery for electrical consumers is located in the right hand area of the trunk page 388 Use the 10 mm open end wrench from the vehicle tool kit to disconnect the negative lead from negative terminal 5 of the consumer battery page 414 Warning G With a disconnected battery you will no longer be able to turn the SmartKey in the starter switch and pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop button on the gear selector lever will have no effect the gear selector lever will remain locked in position P Always disconnect the batteries in the order described below even if you only want to charge the starter battery for example Otherwise the vehicle s electronics can be damaged 417 Practical hints Batteries Open the hood page 274 Use the 10 mm open end wrench from the vehicle tool kit to disconnect the negative lead from negative terminal 2 of the starter battery page 414 Remove the covers from the positive terminals 1 and 4 page 414 Disconnect the positive lead from pos itive terminal 4 of the consumer bat tery page 414 Disconnect the positive lead from pos itive terminal 1 of the starter battery page 414 Removing the batteries Rem
109. the trunk lid before the hard top is completely lowered button 3 will flash and a warning will sound i The power outlet can be used to accommo date electrical consumers e g air pump auxiliary lamps up to a maximum of 180 W 243 Controls in detail Useful features Telephone Radio transmitters such as a portable tele phone or a citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are con nected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle The external antenna must be approved by Mercedes Benz Please contact an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center for informa tion on the installation of an approved external antenna Refer to the radio trans mitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna You can take and place telephone calls us ing the s and t buttons on the steering wheel To carry out other tele phone functions use the control system page 165 See separate instruction manual for in structions on how to operate the tele phone Warning G Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built in or attached antenna i e with out being connected to an external antenna from inside the vehicle while the engine is running Doing so could lead to a malfunc tion of the vehicle s electronic system pos sibly resulting in an accident and or serious personal injury Warning G Please do not forget that your primary re sponsibility is to drive
110. the values given in this Operator s Manual inflate the tire to the recommended tire inflation pressure given on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim Do not operate the electric air pump longer than 8 minutes without interruption Otherwise it may overheat You may operate the air pump again after it has cooled off Warning G Follow recommend inflation pressures Do not overinflate tires Overinflating tires can result in sudden deflation blowout be cause they are more likely to become punc tured or damaged by road debris potholes etc Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being overheated 412 Practical hints Flat tire Lowering the vehicle Lower vehicle by turning crank coun terclockwise until the full weight of the vehicle is resting on the ground Pull the jack out of the jack support tube 1 5 Wheel bolts Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly fol lowing the diagonal sequence illustrat ed 1 to 5 until all bolts are tight Observe a tightening torque of 96 lb ft 130 Nm Before storing the jack in the trunk crank back to storage position and fold in the arm Replacing jack support tube cover Slide tongue of cover under the upper edge of the tube opening Applying even pressure press cover until it snaps into place Be careful not to damage the locking tabs or clamp t
111. the vehicle A driver s attention to the road must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others we rec ommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a tele phone call If you choose to use the telephone1 while driving please use the hands free device and only use the telephone when road weather and traffic conditions permit Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a ve hicle Only operate the COMAND Cockpit Man agement and Data System 1 if road weath er and traffic conditions permit 1 Observe all legal requirements Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second 244 Controls in detail Useful features Tele Aid The Tele Aid system Telematic Alarm Identification on De mand The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response Automatic and manual emergency Roadside Assistance Information The Tele Aid system is operational provid ing that the vehicle s battery is charged properly connected not damaged and cel lular and GPS coverage is available The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can be adjusted when using the volume control on the multifunction steering wheel To raise press button and to lower press button or use the volume knob on your COMAND headu
112. to the vehicles ahead Distance warning function When Distronic is deactivated this func tion will continue to warn you when recog nizing a stationary obstacle or a slower vehicle moving in your vehicle s path and the danger of a collision exists The distance warning lamp E in the speedometer comes on red An intermittent warning will sound if necessary If these warnings are issued you must brake manually to maintain a safe distance and avoid a collision with the preceding vehicle When depressing the brake pedal the warning sound ceases The warning sound will also cease when the distance to the preceding vehicle is sufficient again with out applying the brakes In this case the distance warning lamp will also go out Warning G If the distance warning lamp red E in the speedometer comes on while driving and or an intermittent warning sounds im mediate attention on part of the driver is required As required by the traffic situation apply the brakes and navigate around a possible ob stacle However do not drive by relying on the distance warning function as this will result in an emergency braking application This will not always enable you to avoid a collision especially when traveling on vary ing road surface conditions and with varying driver reaction i Complex driving situations are not always fully recognized by the distance warning func tion This could result in wrong or missing dis
113. transmitter operation in structions regarding use of an external an tenna Warning G Always fasten items being carried as secure ly as possible In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle The trunk is the preferred place to carry ob jects Warning G Please do not forget that your primary re sponsibility is to drive the vehicle safely Only operate the COMAND Cockpit Man agement and Data System radio or tele phone1 if road weather and traffic conditions permit Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximate ly 14 m every second 1 Observe all legal requirements Warning G Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built in or attached antenna i e with out being connected to an external antenna from inside the vehicle while the engine is running Doing so could lead to a malfunc tion of the vehicle s electronic system pos sibly resulting in an accident and or personal injury 269 Operation Driving instructions Catalytic converter Your Mercedes Benz is equipped with monolithic type catalytic converters an important element in conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve substantial con trol of the pollutants in the exhaust emis
114. under AUDIO for example These functions serve to call up relevant informa tion or to customize the settings for your vehicle It is helpful to think of the menus and the functions within each menu as being ar ranged in a circular pattern If you press button or re peatedly you will pass through each menu one after the other If you press button k or j re peatedly you will pass through each function display one after the other in the current menu In the Settings menu instead of functions you will find a number of submenus for calling up and changing settings For in structions on using these submenus see Settings menu page 153 The number of menus available in the sys tem depends on which optional equipment is installed in your vehicle The menus are described on the following pages 142 Controls in detail Control system Menus This is what you will see when you scroll through the menus The table below provides an overview of the individual menus 143 Controls in detail Control system Menus submenus and functions Table continued on next page Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5 Standard display AMG1 AUDIO NAV Distronic page 145 page 146 page 149 page 151 page 151 Commands submenus Digital speedome ter Outside tempera ture Engine oil temperature Selecting radio station Show route guidance instructions current direction travel
115. vehicle is standing still and a front door is opened For more information on the seat belt telltale lt see the Practical hints sec tion page 341 81 Safety and Security Occupant safety Emergency tensioning device ETD seat belt force limiter The seat belts are equipped with emergen cy tensioning devices and belt force limiters The ETD is designed to activate in the fol lowing cases in frontal or rear end impacts exceed ing the system deployment threshold if the restraint systems are operational and functioning correctly see 1 in dicator lamp page 66 in certain vehicle rollovers if the sys tem determines an additional degree of protection When activated emergency tensioning de vices remove slack from the belts in such a way that the seat belts fit more snugly against the body Belt force limiters reduce the force exerted by the seat belts on oc cupants during a crash Automatic comfort fit feature seat belt The automatic comfort fit feature reduces the retracting force of the seat belts when they are in normal use Roll bar i The ETDs will only activate if the seat belts are fastened latch plate properly inserted into buckle Warning G An emergency tensioning device ETD that was activated must be replaced When disposing of the emergency tension ing device our safety instructions must be followed These are available at your autho rized Mercedes Benz Center
116. vehicle is taken to an auto matic car wash or during windshield cleaning Windshield wipers will operate in the presence of water sprayed on the windshield and windshield wipers may be damaged as a result If you have set intermittent wiping dirt on the surface of the rain sensor or optical effects may cause the windshield wipers to wipe in an undesired fashion This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windows You should therefore switch off the windshield wipers when weather conditions are dry 58 Getting started Driving Single wipe Press the combination switch briefly in direction of arrow 2 to the resistance point The windshield wipers wipe one time without washer fluid Wiping with windshield washer fluid Push the combination switch in direc tion of arrow 2 past the resistance point The windshield wipers operate with washer fluid For information on filling up the washer reservoir see Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system page 282 i Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is opened This protects persons getting into or out of the vehicle from being sprayed Intermittent wiping will be continued when all doors are closed and the gear selector lever is in position D or R or the wiper setting is changed using the com bination switch i To prevent smears on the windshield wipe with windshie
117. very well impair turning stability and that overall driving stability may be reduced Adapt your driving style accordingly Have the spare tire replaced with a winter tire at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center i Block heater not available for SL 55 AMG and SL 65 AMG 318 Operation Winter driving Snow chains Snow chains should only be driven on snow covered roads at speeds not to ex ceed 30 mph 50 km h Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on roads without snow Please observe the following guidelines when using snow chains Use of snow chains is not permissible with all wheel tire combinations page 435 Use snow chains in pairs and on rear wheels only Follow the manufacturer s mounting instructions Only use snow chains that are ap proved by Mercedes Benz Any autho rized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to advise you on this subject Use of snow chains may be prohibited depending on location Always check local and state laws before installing snow chains Do not use snow chains on the spare wheel page 440 Do not use snow chains on wheels with MOExtended tires page 439 When driving with snow chains always se lect setting 1 of the level control system page 225 Other settings may result in dam age to your vehicle Some tire sizes do not leave adequate clear ance for snow chains To help avoid serious dam age to your vehicle or tires use of snow chain
118. visibility and endangering you and others i When operating the automatic climate control system in automatic mode you will only rarely need to adjust the temperature air volume and air distribution In automatic mode cooling with dehumidify is switched on This function can be switched off if necessary page 185 188 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Air distribution in automatic mode You can separately adjust the air distribu tion for each side of the passenger com partment Activating Press control button 1 or 5 page 185 The control button is engaged The U symbol on the control button comes on Air distribution for the re spective side of the passenger com partment is adjusted automatically Deactivating Press control button 1 or 5 page 185 once more The control button sticks up slightly The U symbol on the control button goes out Automatic air distribution for the respective side of the passenger compartment is switched off Adjust the air distribution manually page 189 Air volume in automatic mode The air volume settings are the same for the entire passenger compartment Activating Press control button 9 page 185 The control button is engaged The U symbol on the control button comes on Deactivating Press control button 9 page 185 once more The control button sticks up slightly The U symbol on the control button goes out Adjust the air v
119. when a wheel is spin ning or if the vehicle starts to skid By ap plying brakes to the appropriate wheel and by limiting engine output the ESP works to stabilize the vehicle The ESP is espe cially useful while driving off and on wet or slippery road surfaces The ESP also sta bilizes the vehicle during braking maneu vers The ABS ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster page 27 flashes when the ESP is engaged The ABS ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster comes on when you switch on the ignition It goes out when the engine is running Warning G If the BAS is malfunctioning the brake sys tem is still functioning normally but without the additional brake boost available that BAS would normally provide in an emergen cy braking maneuver Therefore the braking distance may increase Warning G BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns fol lowing another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabili ties of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 90
120. will involve shifting down one or more gears i You cannot shift with the steering wheel gearshift paddle when the gear selector lever is in position P N or R The last selected program mode C or S is switched on when the engine is restarted Warning G On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control 177 Controls in detail Automatic transmission Manual shift program SL 55 AMG and SL 65 AMG only In addition to the automatic shift program C or S your vehicle is equipped with the manual shift program MANUAL In the MANUAL program mode system controlled automatic gearshifting is switched off and you need to change the gears by manually upshifting or downshift ing using the steering wheel gearshift pad dles page 175 or the gear selector lever The program mode selector switch is located on the lower part of the center console Example illustration SL 65 AMG 1 Program mode selector switch MANUAL For manual gear shifting C Comfort For comfort driving S Sport For standard driving The current gear selector lever position and the selected program mode M C S are indicated in the right multifunction display page 169 Allow engine to warm up under low load use Do not place full load on the engine until the op erating tempe
121. wiper arms in vertical position switch off the ignition page 39 To prevent scratches or damage never ap ply strong force and only use a soft non scratch ing cloth when cleaning Distronic system sensor cover 1 Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensor with a dry cloth or sponge Do not apply strong pressure to the sensor covers Applying strong pressure may damage the sensor covers Follow the instructions provided by the power washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer To prevent scratches never apply strong force and only use a soft non scratching cloth when cleaning the sensors Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge The windshield wipers must be in a vertical position before folding them away from the wind shield They could otherwise damage the hood Never open the hood when the wiper arms are folded forward 327 Operation Vehicle care Fold the wiper arms forward until they snap into place Clean the wiper blade inserts with a clean cloth and detergent solution Use a soft clean cloth and a mild win dow cleaning solution on all outside and inside glass surfaces An automotive glass cleaner is recom mended Rear window cleaning Clean the rear window with the hardtop fully raised and closed Use a soft clean cloth and a mild win dow cleaning solution on all outside and inside glass surfaces An
122. with a tire pressure monitor ing system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated Accord ingly when the low tire pressure telltale illu minates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible Driving on a signif icantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may effect the vehi cle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driv er s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale i Operating radio transmission equipment e g wireless headsets two way radios in or near the vehicle could cause the TPMS to mal function 300 Operation Tires and wheels Reactivating Advanced TPMS The TPMS must be reactivated when you have adjusted the tire inflation pressure to a new level e g because of different load or driving conditions The TPMS is then recalibrated to the current tire inflation pressures Using the tire placard on the driver s door B pillar page 286 or if avail able the supplemental tire pressure information on the inside of the fuel filler flap page 292 make sure the tire inflation pressure of all four tires i
123. 0 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 lbs Step 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 Step 6 if applicable If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be trans ferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle page 290 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configura tions and number and size of occupants The following examples use a load limit of 1500 lbs This is for illustration purposes only Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on the vehicle s placard page 287 289 Operation Tires and wheels The higher the weight of all occupants the less cargo and luggage load capacity is available For more information see Trailer tongue load page 290 Example Combined weight limit of occu pants and cargo from placard Number of occupants driver and passengers Occupants weight Combined weight of all occupants Available cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight total load limit or vehicle capacity weight f
124. 1 Make sure the gear selector lever is set to position P page 168 Turn off all electrical consumers Turn off the engine page 62 Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Vehicles with KEYLESS GO Open the driver s door Warning G Only use fuses approved by Mercedes Benz with the specified amperage for the system in question and do not attempt to repair or bridge a blown fuse Using other than ap proved fuses or using repaired or bridged fuses may cause an overload leading to a fire and or cause damage to electrical components and or systems Have the cause determined and remedied by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center i A blown fuse must be replaced by an appro piate spare fuse recognizable by its color or the fuse rating given on the fuse of the amperage recommended in the fuse chart Any Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to advise you on this subject 425 Practical hints Fuses Fuse boxes in engine compartment Open the hood page 274 The fuse boxes are located on the driver s and passenger side in front of the bulk head wall separating the engine and pas senger compartment Fuse box on driver s side 1 Fuse box cover 2 Locking 3 Unlocking Fuse box on passenger side 1 Fuse box cover 2 Locking 3 Unlocking Opening Move slide to position 3 and lift cover 1 Closing Hook cover 1 onto tabs and close it Move slide to position 2 Close the hood after che
125. 109 Unlocking 106 Snow chains 318 Spare fuses 424 Spare fuses see Vehicle tool kit Spare tire see Spare wheel 405 Spare wheel 388 389 405 440 Collapsible tire 410 440 Inflating collapsible tire 410 Tire inflation pressure 410 Speed settings Cruise control 212 Speedometer 27 Setting units 156 Sporty driving style 228 SRS Indicator lamp 342 Messages in the multifunction display 361 Standing lamps 128 398 Standing water Driving instructions 267 Starter battery 281 414 Starter switch 25 40 Starter switch positions 39 Starting difficulties 53 Starting position 40 Starting the engine With the SmartKey 52 With the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO 53 Steering column In out adjustment 46 Length adjustment 46 Up down adjustment 46 Steering wheel Adjusting 45 Buttons 30 Cleaning 328 Heating 240 Height adjustment 46 Steering wheel adjustment lever 25 Steering wheel gearshift control 175 Stopping Windows 198 Storage compartment Center console 234 Storage compartments 233 Armrest 234 Cup holder 238 Glove box 233 In door 233 Locking compartments separately 235 Locking storage compartments 235 Parcel net 236 Rear 235 Seats 234 Storage tray 234 Unlocking compartments separately 236 Unlocking storage compartments 236 392 Ventilated glove box 195 Storing tires 285 Submenus 143 Convenience 162 Instrument cluster 156 157 Lighting 159 Selecting 154 Settings menus 15
126. 14 mm Collapsible tire1 1 Must not be used with snow chains 185 60 17 93P 175 55 18 95P 175 50 19 97P Recommended tire inflation pressure 36 psi 2 5 bar 51 psi 3 5 bar 51 psi 3 5 bar Please compare the recommended tire in flation pressure for your vehicle with the tire in flation pressure on the yellow label located on the spare wheel rim If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim differs from the values given in this Operator s Manual inflate the col lapsible tire to the recommended tire inflation pressure given on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim i Please note that the tire inflation pressure of the collapsible tire differs from the tire inflation pressure of the road tires 441 Technical data Electrical system Electrical system Model SL 550 SL 600 SL 55 AMG SL 65 AMG Generator alternator 14 V 150 A 14 V 180 A 14 V 180 A 14 V 180 A Starter motor 12 V 1 7 kW 12 V 1 7 kW 12 V 1 7 kW 12 V 1 7 kW Starter battery 12 V 35 Ah 12 V 35 Ah 12 V 35 Ah 12 V 35 Ah Battery for electrical consumers 12 V 70 Ah 12 V 70 Ah 12 V 70 Ah 12 V 70 Ah Spark plugs Bosch Y 7 MPP 33 NGK PLKR6A NGK IFR6QG NGK ILFR6A NGK IFR6QG Electrode gap 0 031 in 0 8 mm 0 028 in 0 7 mm 0 031 in 0 8 mm 0 028 in 0 7 mm Tightening torque 15 18 lb ft 20 25 Nm 18 22 lb ft 25 30 Nm 18 22 lb ft 25 30 Nm 18 2
127. 162 Cruise control 212 Daytime running lamp mode 159 Interior lighting delayed switch off 161 Lamps and lighting control system 159 Language multifunction display 157 Locator lighting 160 Miles kilometers in speedometer 156 Night security illumination 160 Resetting all control system 153 Selective SmartKey with KEYLESS GO 109 Selective SmartKey 104 Speedometer display mode 156 Time 157 Units in speedometer 156 Shifting Gear selector lever 168 Gear selector lever positions 170 Into optimal gear range Automatic transmission 175 Shoulder support Seat adjustment 122 Side marker lamps 398 Cleaning lenses 325 Side windows Automatic closing 198 Automatic opening 197 Closing 196 197 Closing fully 198 Closing with KEYLESS GO 198 Express close 198 Express open 197 Opening 196 197 Opening fully 197 Stopping 198 Synchronizing power windows 198 Sidewall 313 SmartKey 102 Batteries 395 Checking the batteries 105 Closing retractable hardtop 201 Global locking 103 104 Global unlocking 103 Loss of 105 Positions in starter switch 40 Restoring factory settings 104 109 Selective setting 104 Starter switch positions 40 Starting the engine 52 Turning off the engine 62 SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Checking the batteries 110 Global locking 108 109 Global unlocking 108 Locking 110 466 Index Loss of 110 Messages in display 379 Reprogramming 109 Selective setting
128. 2 lb ft 25 30 Nm 442 Technical data Main dimensions Model SL 550 SL 600 SL 55 AMG SL 65 AMG Overall vehicle length 178 5 in 4540 mm 178 5 in 4540 mm 178 5 in 4535 mm 178 5 in 4535 mm Overall vehicle length when opening closing hardtop 185 6 in 4713 mm 185 6 in 4713 mm 185 6 in 4713 mm 185 6 in 4713 mm Overall vehicle width exterior rear view mirrors folded out 80 0 in 2033 mm 80 0 in 2033 mm 80 0 in 2033 mm 80 0 in 2033 mm Overall vehicle width exterior rear view mirrors folded in 71 9 in 1827 mm 71 9 in 1827 mm 71 9 in 1827 mm 71 9 in 1827 mm Overall vehicle height 51 0 in 1295 mm 51 0 in 1295 mm 51 0 in 1295 mm 51 0 in 1295 mm Overall vehicle height when opening closing hardtop 65 9 in 1674 mm 65 9 in 1674 mm 65 9 in 1674 mm 65 9 in 1674 mm Wheelbase 100 8 in 2560 mm 100 8 in 2560 mm 100 8 in 2560 mm 100 8 in 2560 mm Track front 61 4 in 1559 mm 61 4 in 1559 mm 61 8 in 1569 mm 61 8 in 1569 mm Track rear 60 5 in 1537 mm 60 5 in 1537 mm 61 2 in 1555 mm 61 1 in 1551 mm Turning circle 36 1 ft 11 0m 36 1 ft 11 0m 36 1 ft 11 0m 36 1 ft 11 0m 443 Technical data Weights Weights Trunk load max 220 lbs 100 kg 444 Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Capacities Vehicle components and their respective lubricants must match Therefore use only products
129. 4 Time 157 Vehicle 162 467 Index Submenus see Control system submenus Summer opening feature 201 Sun blind see Sunshade Sun visors 182 Sunshade 208 Closing 208 Opening 208 Suspension tuning For regular driving style 228 For sporty driving style 228 Suspension tuning ABC 225 Switching on headlamps 55 Symbol Distance warning function 217 Synchronizing ESP 355 Power windows 198 Synchronizing time with head unit 157 T Tachometer 29 138 Tail lamps 398 402 Cleaning lenses 325 Technical data Electrical system 441 Main dimensions 442 Rims and tires 435 Weights 443 Windshield and headlamp washer system 452 Tele Aid 244 Emergency calls 245 Information 248 Initiating an emergency call manually 246 Messages in display 384 Roadside Assistance 247 SOS button 33 246 Tele Aid system 244 Telephone 30 243 Answering a call 166 Dialing 166 Ending a call 167 Loading phone book 167 Messages in display 384 Operating 165 Redialing 167 Telephones and two way radios 268 Temperature Outside temperature indicator 138 Sensor Interior 33 Tires 292 Tightening torque 412 Time Settings control system 157 TIN 314 Tire Vehicle maximum load on 314 Tire and Loading Information 287 Tire and loading terminology 312 Tire care and maintenance 284 Tire Identification Number see TIN Tire inflation pressure Checking 273 291 292 Checking tire pressure electronically with the
130. 5 Automatic transmission program mode Press button or repeatedly until you see the standard display menu in the multifunction display You can modify the standard display menu Instead of outside temperature 2 you can choose the digital speedometer to be displayed in the left multifunction display by changing the setting in the Select dis play function of the Inst cluster sub menu page 157 Press button k or jto select the functions in the standard display menu The following functions are available Display digital speedometer or outside temperature Press button k or juntil the digital speedometer or depending on the chosen setting the outside temper ature appears in the right multifunction display Function Page Calling up digital speedometer 145 Calling up maintenance service indicator 320 Checking tire inflation pressure 292 Checking engine oil level 276 i If you have selected the digital speedometer for the standard display page 157 select the outside temperature display here 146 Controls in detail Control system AMG menu The main screen of the AMG menu shows you the gear currently engaged as well as the engine oil temperature Press button or repeatedly until you see the AMG menu 1 Engine oil temperature 2 Gear indicator Use buttons k or j to select the fol lowing functions in the AMG menu Vehicle supply voltage Press button or repeatedly un
131. 6 l SL 65 AMG main cooling system 8 2 US qt 7 75 l 9 0 US qt 8 5 l SL 65 AMG low temperature cooling system 1 5 US qt 1 45 l 1 7 US qt 1 6 l 452 Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Windshield and headlamp washer system Both the windshield and headlamp washer systems are supplied from the windshield washer fluid reservoir The windshield and headlamp washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of approx 7 4 US qt 7 l Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate and water or con centrate and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze depending on am bient temperatures Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio For temperatures above freezing point use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate MB SummerFit and water 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water 1 34 fl oz 40 ml MB SummerFit to 1 gal 4 0 l water For temperatures below freezing point use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate MB SummerFit and commercially avail able premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts solvent 1 34 fl oz 40 ml MB SummerFit to 1 gal 4 0 l solvent Warning G Washer solvent antifreeze is highly flamma ble Do not spill washer solvent antifreeze on hot engine parts because it may ignite and burn You could be seriously burned 453 Index A ABC 225 Messages in
132. 6 years regardless of the remaining tread 285 Operation Tires and wheels Tread depth Do not allow your tires to wear down too far Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths under 1 8 in 3 mm Treadwear indicators TWI are required by law These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approx imately 1 16 in 1 6 mm at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced Recommended minimum tire tread depth Summer tires 1 8 in 3 mm Winter tires 1 6 in 4 mm 1 TWI Tread Wear Indicator The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread Storing tires Cleaning tires Warning G Although the applicable federal motor safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators TWI become visible at approximately 1 16 in 1 6 mm we recom mend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level As tread depth approaches 1 8 in 3 mm the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply re duced Depending upon the weather and or road surface conditions the tire traction varies widely Keep unmounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Pro tect tires from contact with oil grease and gaso line Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires The intense jet of water can result in dam age to the tire Always repl
133. 8 Air bag control unit with crash sensors Emergency tensioning device ETD for seat belts page 81 Roll bar page 81 Air bag system components with Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp page 76 Front passenger seat with Occupant Classification System OCS page 72 Although independent systems their pro tective functions work in conjunction with each other The SRS system conducts a self test when the ignition is switched on and in regular intervals while the engine is running This facilitates detection of malfunctions The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument clus ter comes on when the ignition is switched on and goes out no later than a few sec onds after the engine has been started The SRS components are in operational readiness if the 1 indicator lamp is not lit when the engine is running A malfunction in the system has been detected if the 1 indicator lamp fails to go out after approximately 4 seconds after the engine was started does not come on at all comes on after the engine was started or while driving i For information on infants and children trav eling with you in the vehicle and restraint sys tems for infants and children see Children in the vehicle page 83 67 Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning G Modifications to or work improperly con ducted on restraint systems such as seat belts and anchors emergency tensioning devices sea
134. 9 i While the RACETIMER is being displayed you cannot adjust the volume using buttons or i When you stop the vehicle and turn the Smartkey to position 1 page 40 or in vehi cles with KEYLESS GO turn off the engine and do not open the driver s door the RACETIMER stops timing Timing is resumed when you switch the ignition back on page 39 or restart the engine page 52 and then press the button i You can save up to nine laps 148 Controls in detail Control system Press button within the next 5 seconds The intermediate time shown will be saved as a lap time The RACETIMER begins timing the new lap The new lap begins to be timed as soon as the intermediate time is called up 1 Best lap time 2 Lap number 3 RACETIMER 4 Gear indicator Resetting current lap Press button while the timer is running The timer stops Press button The lap time is reset to 0 Deleting all laps Press button while the timer is running The timer stops Press the reset button twice page 27 Press button The timer starts The saved laps are de leted Overall analysis Press button or repeatedly until you see the AMG menu Press button j repeatedly until you see the overall analysis 1 Overall analysis of RACETIMER 2 Overall driving time 3 Maximum speed 4 Average speed 5 Overall distance driven i It is not possible to delete a single saved lap
135. Control system submenus 143 Convenience 162 Instrument cluster 156 Lighting 159 Time 157 Vehicle 162 Convenience feature 201 Coolant 449 Anticorrosion antifreeze mixing ratio and quantity 451 Checking coolant level 280 Coolant warning lamp 337 Messages in the multifunction display 371 373 Temperature 270 Temperature gauge 137 Corner illuminating front fog lamps 132 Corner illuminating front fog lamps Replacing bulbs 397 Courtesy lighting 135 Cruise control 209 Messages in the multifunction display 352 353 Cup holder 238 Curb weight 312 D Daytime running lamp mode 130 Setting 159 Deep water see Standing water Defogging Windshield 191 Defrosting Front 190 Defrosting Rear 183 456 Index Delayed switch off Exterior lamps 160 Interior lighting 161 Department of Transportation see DOT Difficulties While driving 59 With starting the engine 53 Digital clock see Clock Digital speedometer 145 Dimensions Vehicle 442 Dipstick see Oil dipstick Direction of rotation tires 286 Displays Digital speedometer 145 Distronic 215 Maintenance service indicator 319 Multifunction display 139 Outside temperature 138 145 Symbol messages 365 Text messages 349 Vehicle status message memory 152 Vehicle status messages 347 Distance to empty range Trip computer 165 Distance warning function 224 Activating 225 Deactivating 225 Intermittent warning sound 224 Symbol 217 Distr
136. Flat tire Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button on the gear selector lever once without depressing the brake pedal Press I on the electric air pump switch 2 The electric air pump should now switch on and inflate the tire Inflate the spare tire SL 550 to 36 psi 2 5 bar SL 600 SL 55 AMG SL 55 AMG Performance Package and SL 65 AMG to 51 psi 3 5 bar This takes about 5 minutes Air hose 4 and union nut 5 can be come hot during inflation Exercise proper caution to avoid burning your self when using the equipment Press 0 on the electric air pump switch 2 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 or Press KEYLESS GO start stop button on the gear selector lever twice without depressing the brake pedal The electric air pump should now be switched off If the spare tire inflation pressure is above the recommended tire inflation pressure for the respective collapsible tire page 440 release excess spare tire inflation pressure using the vent screw Detach the electric air pump Stow the electrical plug and the air hose behind the flap and place the air pump back in the trunk Compare the recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label located on the spare wheel rim If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim differs from
137. Jump start ing with a more powerful battery could damage the vehicle s electrical system which will not be covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Only use jumper cables with sufficient cross section and insulated terminal clamps Always make sure the jumper cables are not on or near pulleys fans or other parts that move when an engine is started or running Warning G Failure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components and can lead to a battery explosion and severe injury or death Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting you might get injured Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes skin or clothing In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary A battery will also produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and very explosive Keep flames or sparks away from battery avoid improper connection of jumper cables smoking etc Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can result in it exploding causing personal injury Read all instructions before proceeding Do not tow start the vehicle Jump starting may only be performed on the battery installed in the engine compartment Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts Do not attempt to start the engine using a bat tery quick charge unit If the engine does not run after several unsuc cess
138. Key or KEYLESS GO opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti theft alarm system To cancel the alarm do one of the following Press button or on the SmartKey Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch Vehicles with KEYLESS GO Grasp an outside door handle The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be within 3 ft 1 m of the vehicle Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button page 40 The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be in side the vehicle Warning G Only drive with the trunk closed as among other dangers such as blocked visibility ex haust fumes may enter the vehicle interior i If the trunk lid does not open the trunk lid is still locked separately page 117 i To facilitate trunk loading and unloading when the hardtop is retracted you can raise the hardtop from its storage position in the trunk us ing the load assist feature page 241 You may also unhook the luggage cover Remember to re secure the luggage cover after loading unloading the trunk Otherwise you will not be able to lower the retractable hardtop 112 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Opening the trunk from the outside 1 Trunk lid handle Vehicles without trunk opening closing system Press button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO or Pull on handle 1 In vehicles without KEYLESS GO The vehicle must be unlocked Lift the trunk lid Vehicles with trunk opening closing
139. Key with KEYLESS GO 379 SRS 361 Tele Aid 384 Telephone 384 Tires 385 Trunk 387 Washer fluid 387 Multifunction steering wheel 30 140 Buttons 140 N Navigation system Operating 151 Night security illumination 160 Normal occupant weight 313 O Occupant Classification System see OCS Occupant distribution 313 Occupant safety Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 76 OCS 72 SRS 66 OCS 72 Self test 76 Odometer main 27 Oil Adding 278 Consumption 275 Oil dipstick 278 Oil see Engine oil One touch gearshifting 174 Canceling gear range limit 175 Downshifting 174 Upshifting 175 Ornamental moldings 325 Overdue maintenance service 320 Overhead control panel 33 Overspeed range 138 463 Index P Paintwork code see Certification label Panic alarm 86 Panic button on SmartKey 86 Panorama roof Sunshade 208 Sunshade closing 208 Sunshade opening 208 Parcel net In front passenger footwell 236 Parcel net in trunk 237 Parking 263 Parking assistance Parktronic 228 Parking brake Engaging 61 Releasing 54 Parking brake pedal 25 Parking lamps 398 Switching on 128 Parktronic 32 228 Activating 231 Cleaning system sensors 326 Malfunctioning 231 Minimum distance 230 Range 229 Rear sensors 230 System sensors 326 Warning indicators 25 230 Parktronic deactivation switch 32 Parts service 428 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp see Front passenger front air bag off
140. P warning lamp v is illuminated continuously the ESP is switched off or is not operational due to a malfunction Vehicle stability in standard driving maneuvers reduces Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail ing road conditions and to the non operating status of the ESP Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an ex tended period with the ESP switched off This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Warning G Never ignore a brake malfunction indicated in the speedometer display for example by the USA only or 3 Canada only indicator lamp Refer to the Practical hints section page 335 Also read and ob serve the messages in the instrument clus ter multifunction display page 366 93 Safety and Security Driving safety systems The electro hydraulic brake system is auto matically activated when you unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO open the driver s or passenger door turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 in vehicles with KEYLESS GO press the start stop button on the gear se lector lever once depress the brake pedal release the parking brake Warning G The electro hydraulic brake system requires electrical power to operate A malfunction in the vehicle s power supply or electrical system may impair brake sys tem operation and switch it into its eme
141. Possible solution This message will appear when the trunk lid is open and you are trying to open or close the retractable hardtop Close the trunk lid M Close trunk partition You are trying to open or close the retractable hardtop even though the luggage cover in the trunk is not closed and or properly engaged Close the luggage cover and engage it into side holders page 205 W Washer fluid Please refill The washer fluid in the washer fluid reservoir has fallen below the mini mum level Add washer fluid page 282 Warning G Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may ignite when if it comes into contact with hot engine parts You could be seriously burned 388 Practical hints Where will I find First aid kit The first aid kit is located in storage com partment under the passenger seat 1 Handle 2 Lid Pull handle 1 up Fold lid 2 down You can now remove the first aid kit Vehicle tool kit jack and spare wheel The vehicle tool kit jack and spare wheel are stored in the space underneath the trunk floor Lift up the trunk floor cover You can now remove the tools and ac cessories The vehicle tool kit includes One pair of universal pliers Two open end wrenches One hex socket wrench One interchangeable slot Phillips screwdriver One towing eye bolt One alignment bolt One fuse extractor One fuse
142. Refer to the separate COMAND operat ing instructions Press button or repeatedly until the settings for the MP3 CD cur rently being played appear in the right multifunction display 1 Current track Press button k or j repeatedly until the desired track is selected NAV menu The NAV menu contains the functions need ed to operate your navigation system Press button or repeatedly until you see the message NAV in the left multifunction display The message shown in the multifunction display depends on the status of the navi gation system With COMAND switched off the mes sage NAV off appears in the multifunction display With COMAND switched on but route guidance not activated the direction of travel and if applicable the name of the street currently traveled on appear in the multifunction display With COMAND switched on and route guidance activated the direction of travel and maneuver instructions ap pear in the multifunction display Please refer to the COMAND manual for in structions on how to activate the route guidance system Distronic menu Use the Distronic menu page 217 to display the current settings for your Dis tronic system The information shown in the multifunction display depends on whether the Distronic system is activated or deactivated Please refer to the Driving systems sec tion of this manual page 213 for in structions on how to activate Distronic
143. Sommer Corporate Media AG Operator s Manual SL Class Order No 6515 3065 13 Part No 230 584 46 83 USA Edition A 2007 7 tNs 2305844683 Operator s Manual SL Class SL 550 SL 55 AMG SL 600 SL 65 AMG Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new Mercedes Benz Your selection of our product is a demon stration of your trust in our company name Furthermore it exemplifies your de sire to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service Your Mercedes Benz represents the ef forts of many skilled engineers and crafts men To help assure your driving pleasure and also the safety of you and your passen gers we ask you to make a small invest ment of time Please read this manual carefully then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for your reference Please follow the recommendations contained in this manual They are de signed to acquaint you with the opera tion of your Mercedes Benz Please pay attention to the warnings and cautions contained in this manual They are designed to help improve the safety of the vehicle operator and oc cupants We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe pleasurable driving Mercedes Benz USA LLC A DaimlerChrysler Company Contents Introduction 9 Product information 9 Operator s Manual
144. The brake system requires electrical power to operate A malfunction in the vehicle s power supply or electrical system may impair brake sys tem operation and switch it into its emer gency operation mode To brake the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the expected braking ef fect If necessary apply full pressure to the brake pedal Brakes are only applied to the front wheels Stopping distance is increased Adapt your driving style accordingly For more information see Electro hydraulic brake system page 92 With the engine not running there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve hicle Adapt your driving accordingly When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground please note the following With the automatic central locking activated and the SmartKey in starter switch position 2 or KEYLESS GO start stop button in position 2 the vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel as well as the right rear wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of approx 9 mph 15 km h or more To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking deactivate the automatic central locking page 119 Towing of the vehicle should only be done using the properly installed towing eye bolt Never attach tow cable
145. The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning An auxiliary bulb has been brought into use Replace the bulb as soon as possible page 397 C Raise roll over bar The roll bar is malfunctioning For safety reason always have the roll bar raised when driving with the retractable hardtop open Attempt to raise the roll bar using the roll bar button page 81 Have the roll bar checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center L TeleAid inoperative One or more main functions of the Tele Aid system are malfunctioning Have the Tele Aid system checked by an au thorized Mercedes Benz Center t Function unavailable This display appears if button t or s on the multifunction steer ing wheel is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped with a telephone 385 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution H Please correct the tire pressure The tire inflation pressure is too low in one or more tires Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required page 292 Tire pressure Caution Tire defect One or more tires are deflating Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers If necessary change the wheel page 405 Caution Tire defect Vehicles with Advanced TPMS One or more tires are deflating The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display Carefully bring the v
146. a section provides the necessary technical data for your vehicle Parts service All authorized Mercedes Benz Centers maintain a stock of Genuine Mercedes Benz parts required for mainte nance and repair work In addition strate gically located parts distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts service More than 300 000 different parts for Mercedes Benz models are available Genuine Mercedes Benz parts are subject ed to stringent quality inspections Each part has been specifically developed man ufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes Benz vehicles Therefore Genuine Mercedes Benz parts should be installed The use of non genuine Mercedes Benz parts and accessories not authorized by Mercedes Benz could damage the vehicle which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty or could compromise the vehicle s du rability or safety 429 Technical data Warranty coverage Warranty coverage Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the warranties printed in the Service and Warranty Information booklet Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will ex change or repair any defective parts origi nally installed in the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the following warranties New Vehicle Limited Warranty Emission System Warranty Emission Performance Warranty California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont Emission Control Systems Warranty Replacement parts and accessorie
147. ace a damaged tire 286 Operation Tires and wheels Direction of rotation Unidirectional tires offer added advan tages such as better hydroplaning perfor mance To benefit however you must make sure the tires rotate in the direction specified An arrow on the sidewall indicates the intended direction of rotation spinning of the tire Loading the vehicle A label on your vehicle shows how much weight it may properly carry The Tire and Loading Information placard can be found on the driver s door B pillar This placard tells you im portant information about the number of people that can be in the vehicle and the total weight that can be carried in the vehicle It also contains information on the proper size and recommended tire inflation pressures for the original equipment tires on your vehicle The Certification label also found on the driver s door B pillar tells you about the gross weight capacity of your vehi cle called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo The Certification label also tells you about the front and rear axle weight capacity called the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the total allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for either the front axle or rear axle 1 Driver s door B pillar Following is a discussion on how to work with
148. ail Lighting Activating automatic control Slide switch 4 to the left The interior lighting switches on in darkness when you unlock the vehicle remove the SmartKey from the starter switch open a door open the trunk In addition the entry exit lamps in the door trays come on when you open a door The interior lighting switches off after approximately 10 seconds if the interi or lighting delayed switch off feature is set to On in the control system page 161 Manual control Switching interior lighting on and off Press switch 3 The interior lighting switches on Press switch 3 once more The interior lighting switches off Switching reading lamps on and off Press reading lamp switch 1 or 2 to switch on the desired reading lamp Press reading lamp switch 1 or 2 again to switch off the respective read ing lamp Courtesy lighting For better orientation in the dark courtesy lamps will illuminate the interior of your ve hicle as follows With parking lamps switched on the door handles the driver and passenger footwells With SmartKey in starter switch position 1 the door handles the center console Trunk lamp The trunk lamp switches on when the trunk is opened If the trunk lid remains open the trunk lighting switches off automatically after ap proximately 10 minutes i If a door remains open the interior lighting switches off automatically after approximately 5 mi
149. al functions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty after a reasonable number of repair attempts During the pe riod of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18000 miles approx 29000 km on the odometer of the vehicle whichever occurs first a reasonable number of repair at tempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following oc curs 1 the same substantial defect or mal function results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven that de fect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times and you have directly notified Mercedes Benz USA LLC in writing of the need for its repair 2 the same substantial defect or mal function of a less serious nature than category 1 has been subject to repair four or more times and you have direct ly notified us in writing of the need for its repair or 3 the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different sub stantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days Written notification should be sent to us not a dealer at Mercedes Benz USA LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes Drive Montvale NJ 07645 0350 12 Introduction Operator s Manual Maintenance The Maintenance Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be performed at regular
150. alarm system is armed Warning G When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle It is possible for children to open a locked door from the inside which could result in an accident and or serious injury To prevent possible malfunction avoid ex posing the SmartKey to high levels of electro magnetic radiation i USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the fol lowing two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference re ceived including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment i Canada only This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference re ceived including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment i You can also open and close the power win dows page 196 and the retractable hardtop using the SmartKey page 201 104 Controls in detail Loc
151. alfunctioning Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible High beam left The left high beam lamp is malfunc tioning Replace the bulb as soon as possible page 397 High beam right The right high beam lamp is mal functioning Replace the bulb as soon as possible page 397 License plate lamp left The left license plate lamp is mal functioning Replace the bulb as soon as possible page 397 License plate lamp right The right license plate lamp is mal functioning Replace the bulb as soon as possible page 397 Low beam left The left low beam lamp is malfunc tioning Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Low beam right The right low beam lamp is malfunc tioning Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Marker lamp front left The front left side marker lamp is malfunctioning Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Marker lamp front right The front right side marker lamp is malfunctioning Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Marker lamp rear left The rear left side marker lamp is malfunctioning Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible 382 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution Marker lamp rear right The rear righ
152. all tires on the vehicle make sure only matching tires marked with MOExtended are mounted in the size specified for your vehicle page 439 414 Practical hints Batteries For more information on batteries see Battery page 281 Your vehicle is equipped with two batteries The starter battery The battery for electrical consumers consumer battery located in the trunk The starter battery is located on the right hand side of the engine compart ment 1 Positive terminal 2 Negative terminal 3 Battery ventilation The consumer battery is located on the right hand side of the trunk 4 Positive terminal 5 Negative terminal The starter battery its filler caps and the ventilation hose must always be securely in stalled when the vehicle is in operation The consumer battery located in the trunk is a valve regulated lead acid VRLA battery also referred to as fleece battery Such batteries do not require topping up of the electrolyte level VRLA batteries therefore do not have cell caps and the battery cover is non removable Do not attempt to open the consumer battery as other wise the battery will be damaged Even though VRLA batteries do not require top ping up of the electrolyte level and cannot be opened to check the electrolyte level the bat tery condition must be checked periodically by performing a battery conductance test Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery condition
153. and other electronic components could be severely damaged Have the starter battery checked regularly by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Refer to Maintenance Booklet for maintenance intervals or contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for further information Warning G Do not place metal objects on the battery as this could result in a short circuit Use leak proof batteries only to avoid the risk of acid burns in the event of an acci dent Warning G The brake system requires electrical power to operate A malfunction in the vehicle s power supply or electrical system may impair brake sys tem operation and switch it into its emer gency operation mode The same applies if battery is disconnected To brake the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the expected braking ef fect If necessary apply full pressure to the brake pedal Brakes are only applied to the front wheels Stopping distance is in creased Adjust your driving style according ly For more information see Electro hydraulic brake system page 92 416 Practical hints Batteries Disconnecting the batteries Apply the parking brake page 61 Make sure the gear selector lever is set to position P page 168 Close the retractable hardtop page 199 Turn off all electrical consumers Turn off the engine page 62 Remove the SmartKey from
154. artKey Your vehicle comes supplied with two SmartKeys each with remote control and a removable mechanical key The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two SmartKeys are a differ ent color to help distinguish each SmartKey unit The SmartKey provides an extended oper ating range To prevent theft however it is advisable to only unlock the vehicle when you are in close proximity to it The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks the doors the trunk lid the glove box the storage compartment under the armrest the storage compartment in the rear the fuel filler flap SmartKey with remote control 1 Lock button 2 Opening button for trunk page 111 3 Mechanical key locking tab 4 Unlock button 5 Battery check lamp 6 Panic button page 86 103 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Factory setting Global unlocking Press button All turn signals flash once The locking knobs in the doors move up The anti theft alarm system is disarmed The vehicle will lock again automatically and reactivate the alarm system within ap proximately 40 seconds of unlocking if neither door nor trunk is opened the SmartKey is not inserted in the starter switch the central locking switch is not acti vated Global locking Press button With the trunk and all doors closed all turn signals flash three times The lock ing knobs in the doors move down The anti theft
155. ause consequence Possible solution F Key still in vehicle A SmartKey with KEYLESS GO left in the vehicle was recognized while locking the vehicle from the out side Take the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO out of the vehicle 3rd brake lamp The high mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible AUTO light inoperative The light sensor is malfunctioning The headlamps switch on automati cally In the control system set lamp operation to manual mode page 159 Switch on headlamps using the exterior lamp switch Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Brake lamp left Auxiliary bulb on The left brake lamp is malfunction ing An auxiliary bulb has been brought into use Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Brake lamp Right Substitute bulb on The right brake lamp is malfunction ing A substitute bulb has been brought into use Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Front foglamp left The left front fog lamp or left cor ner illuminating front fog lamp is malfunctioning Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible 381 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution Front foglamp right The right front fog lamp or right cor ner illuminating front fog lamp is m
156. automotive glass cleaner is recom mended Warning G For safety reasons switch off wipers and re move SmartKey from starter switch vehi cles with KEYLESS GO Make sure the vehicle s on board electronics have status 0 before cleaning the windshield and or the wiper blades Otherwise the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts They could tear Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto the windshield before turning the SmartKey in the starter switch or pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop button vehicles with KEYLESS GO Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back If released the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield To clean the window interior do not use a dry cloth abrasives solvents or cleaners con taining solvents Do not touch the inside of the front rear or side windows with hard objects such as an ice scraper or ring Doing so may damage the windows Warning G Do not clean the rear window with the hard top in a position other than the fully raised and closed position Otherwise the hardtop may move unexpectedly which may result in personal injury to you or others 328 Operation Vehicle care Light alloy wheels If possible clean wheels once a week Use Mercedes Benz approved Wheel Care a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of water for cleaning the light al loy wheels Pla
157. ay not be activated page 74 i Deployment of the driver front air bag does not mean that the passenger front air bag also should have deployed The Occupant Classification System page 72 may have determined that the seat was empty or occupied by the weight up to or less than that of a typical 12 month old child seated in a standard child restraint both instances where the system suppresses deployment of the pas senger front air bag even though the impact met the criteria and was of sufficient severity to deploy the driver front air bag that the seat was occupied by a small individ ual such as a young teenager or a small adult or a child weighing more than the weight of a typical 12 month old child in a standard child restraint instances where the system may suppress deployment of the passenger front air bag even though the impact met the criteria and was of sufficient severity to deploy the driver front air bag 76 Safety and Security Occupant safety The 5 indicator lamp is located in the upper part of the center console be tween the center air vents 1 Front passenger front air bag off indica tor lamp The 5 indicator lamp 1 will be illuminated except with the SmartKey removed or in starter switch position 0 Self test Occupant Classification System After turning the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop button once or twice the 5 indi
158. b Wear eye and hand protection Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are fogged up on the inside as a result of high humid ity driving the vehicle a distance with the lights on should clear up the fogging i Auxiliary bulbs will be brought into use when the following lamps malfunction Turn signal lamps Brake lamps Parking lamps Tail lamps Observe the messages in the multifunction dis play page 347 398 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Front lamps Rear lamps Lamp Type 1 Additional turn signal LED 2 Turn signal lamp 1156 NA 3 Low beam1 1 Vehicles with Xenon or Bi Xenon headlamps Low beam and high beam use the same D2S 35W lamp Do not replace the Xenon and Bi Xenon bulbs yourself Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center D2S 35W 4 Xenon headlamp High beam high beam flasher H7 55W Bi Xenon headlamp High beam flasher H7 55W Parking and standing lamp W 5 W 5 Front fog lamp Cor ner illuminating front fog lamp H11 55W 6 Side marker lamp W 5 W Lamp Type 7 Rear fog lamp driver s side only P 21 W 8 High mounted brake lamp LED 9 Backup lamp P 21 W a Tail parking and standing lamp side marker lamp LED b Brake lamp LED c License plate
159. be placed near the roof frame upper windshield area hardtop shelf behind roll bars or trunk lid while the re tractable hardtop is being raised or lowered Serious personal injury may occur If potential danger exists release retract able hardtop switch immediately This im mediately interrupts the raising or lowering procedure 201 Controls in detail Retractable hardtop Retractable hardtop switch 1 Opening 2 Closing Engage the parking brake page 54 Close the luggage cover see Luggage cover page 205 Close the trunk lid Switch on the ignition page 39 Opening Pull up on the retractable hardtop switch as indicated by arrow 1 until the retractable hardtop is completely lowered into its trunk storage compart ment The multifunction display will briefly show the message K in operation Closing Press down on the retractable hardtop switch as indicated by arrow 2 until the retractable hardtop is completely closed and locked The multifunction display will briefly show the message K in operation Opening closing with the SmartKey i Make sure the retractable hardtop is dry be fore you open it Otherwise water may enter the trunk interior Warning G Before operating the retractable hardtop make sure there is no danger of anyone being injured by the moving parts retract able roof roof frame and trunk lid due to in attention Hands must never be placed near the roof
160. bolt To reinstall cover Fit cover 1 and snap into place Installing towing eye bolt Take the towing eye bolt and the wheel wrench from the vehicle tool kit page 388 Screw towing eye bolt into threaded hole to its stop Insert wheel wrench into towing eye and tighten towing eye bolt by turning it clockwise Removing towing eye bolt Take the wheel wrench from the vehicle tool kit page 388 Insert wheel wrench into towing eye and loosen towing eye bolt by turning it counterclockwise Remove towing eye bolt 424 Practical hints Fuses The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to switch off malfunctioning power circuits If a fuse is blown the components and sys tems secured by that fuse will stop operat ing If a newly inserted fuse blows again have the cause determined and rectified by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center The following aids are available to help you replace fuses They are located in the trunk with the vehicle tool kit page 388 Fuse chart The fuse chart explains the fuse alloca tion and fuse amperages Spare fuses Fuse extractor The electrical fuses are located in different fuse boxes on the driver s side of the engine com partment page 425 on the passenger side of the engine compartment page 425 under passenger side rear storage compartment page 426 in the trunk page 426 Before replacing fuses Apply the parking brake page 6
161. by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing it by two 315 Operation Tires and wheels Rotating tires Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles with tires of the same dimension all around If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the same dimension all around tires can be rotated observing a front to rear rotation pattern that will maintain the intended rotation spinning direction of the tire page 286 In some cases such as when your vehicle is equipped with mixed size tires different tire dimension front vs rear tire rotation is not possible If applicable to your vehicle s tire configu ration tires can be rotated according to the tire manufacturer s recommended in tervals in the tire manufacturer s warranty pamphlet located in your vehicle literature portfolio If none is available tires should be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles 5000 to 10000 km or sooner if neces sary according to the degree of tire wear The same rotation spinning direction must be maintained page 286 Rotate tires before the characteristic tire wear pattern becomes visible shoulder wear on front tires and tread center wear on rear tires Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels and brake disks i e the inner side of the wheels tires during each rotation Check for and ensure proper tire inflation pressure For information on wheel change see the Practical
162. c climate control The automatic climate control is operation al whenever the engine is running You can operate the automatic climate control sys tem in either the automatic or manual mode The system cools or heats the inte rior depending on the selected interior temperature and the current outside tem perature Nearly all dust particles pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air en ters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system The air conditioning will not engage no cooling if the A C mode is deactivated page 193 Warning G When operating the automatic climate con trol the air that enters the passenger com partment through the air vents can be very hot or very cold depending on the set tem perature This may cause burns or frostbite on unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents Always keep sufficient dis tance between unprotected parts of the body and the air vents If necessary use the air distribution control page 185 to di rect the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unpro tected skin Warning G Follow the recommended settings for heat ing and cooling given on the following pag es Otherwise the windows could fog up impairing visibility and endangering you and others i Severe conditions e g strong air pollution may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval A clogged fil
163. cator lamp located in the upper part of the center con sole between the center air vents illumi nates If an adult occupant is properly sitting on the passenger seat and the sys tem senses the occupant as being an adult the 5 indicator lamp will illuminate and go out after approximately 6 seconds If the seat is not occupied and the system senses the passenger seat as being empty the 5 indicator lamp will illuminate and not go out Warning G If the 1 indicator lamp and the 5 indicator lamp are lit at the same time there is a malfunction in the Occupant Classification System The passenger front air bag will be deactivated in this case In order to ensure proper operation of the air bag system and OCS Have the system checked as soon as possible by qualified technicians Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with your back against the seat backrest Do not lean on the armrests or lift your self from the seat by using the handle over the door as this may cause the OCS to be unable to correctly approximate the occupant weight category Only have the seat repaired or replaced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Read and observe all warnings in this chapter 77 Safety and Security Occupant safety More information can be found in the Practical hints section page 345 Seat belts The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint
164. ccordance with label instruc tions The water in the cooling system must meet minimum requirements which are usually satisfied by normal drinking water If you are not sure about the water quality con sult an authorized Mercedes Benz Center 451 Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Anticorrosion antifreeze Your vehicle contains a number of alumi num parts The use of aluminum compo nents in motor vehicle engines necessitates that anticorrosion antifreeze coolant used in such engines be specifical ly formulated to protect the aluminum parts Failure to use such anticorro sion antifreeze coolant will result in a sig nificantly shortened service life Therefore the following product is strongly recommended for use in your vehicle Mercedes Benz 325 0 anticorrosion anti freeze agent Before the start of the winter season or once a year in hot southern regions you should have the anticorrosion antifreeze concentration checked The coolant is also regularly checked each time you bring your vehicle to an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for service Anticorrosion antifreeze quantity Model Approx freeze protection 35 F 37 C 49 F 45 C SL 550 6 1 US qt 5 8 l 6 8 US qt 6 4 l SL 600 main cooling system 6 9 US qt 6 5 l 7 5 US qt 7 1 l SL 600 low temperature cooling system 1 2 US qt 1 1 l 1 3 US qt 1 2 l SL 55 AMG 6 3 US qt 6 0 l 7 0 US qt 6
165. ce submenu via the Settings menu Use the Convenience sub menu to change the settings for a number of convenience features The following functions are available Activating easy entry exit feature Use this function to activate and deacti vate the easy entry exit feature page 46 Function Page Setting automatic locking 162 Function Page Activating easy entry exit feature 162 163 Controls in detail Control system Move the selection marker with the or button to the Conve nience submenu Press button j or k repeatedly until you see Activate Easy entry feature in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Press or to switch the easy entry exit feature On or Off Trip computer menu Use the trip computer menu to call up sta tistical data on your vehicle The following information is available Warning G You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel when the easy entry exit feature is activated To stop steering wheel adjustment do one of the following Move steering column stalk page 45 Press the memory button page 126 Do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could open the driver s door and unintentionally activate the easy entry exit feature which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Function Page F
166. ces Remove the jumper cables first from negative terminals 4 and 3 and then from positive terminals 2 and 1 You can now turn on the lights Have the battery checked at the near est Mercedes Benz Center Warning G Keep flames or sparks away from battery Do not smoke Observe all safety instructions and precau tions when handling automotive batteries page 281 Never invert the terminal connections 421 Practical hints Towing the vehicle Towing the vehicle Mercedes Benz recommends that the vehi cle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift dolly equipment When circumstances do not permit the recommended towing methods the vehi cle may be towed with all wheels on the ground or front wheels raised only so far as necessary to have the vehicle moved to a safe location where the recommended towing methods can be employed Use flatbed or wheel lift dolly equipment with SmartKey in starter switch turned to position 0 Do not tow with sling type equipment Towing with sling type equipment over bumpy roads will damage radiator and supports To prevent damage during transport do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts Switch off the tow away alarm and the automatic central locking If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised the gear selector lever must be in position N and the engine must be shut off SmartKey in starter swi
167. chart Spare fuses i Check expiration dates and contents for completeness at least once a year and replace missing expired items Warning G The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack tubes built into both sides of the vehicle To help avoid per sonal injury use the jack only to lift the ve hicle during a wheel change Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised Be certain that the jack is always vertical plumb line when in use es pecially on hills Always try to use the jack on a hard level surface Be sure that the jack arm is fully inserted in the jack tube Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehi cle 389 Practical hints Where will I find 1 Spare wheel 2 Electric air pump 3 Vehicle tool kit 4 Storage well casing Take spare wheel 1 out of the trunk see Removing the spare wheel page 389 to access jack 5 and wheel wrench 6 5 Jack 6 Wheel wrench Removing the spare wheel Open the trunk page 111 Lift up the trunk floor cover Remove storage well casing that con tains the vehicle tool kit and the elec tric air pump 1 Spare wheel 2 Tensioning strap vehicles with 19
168. cking or re placing fuses page 275 The fuse box cover must be properly posi tioned with the slide at the symbol to pre vent moisture or dirt from entering the fuse box and possibly impairing fuse operation 426 Practical hints Fuses Fuse box in passenger compartment The fuse box is located under the rear pas senger side storage compartment 1 Clips 2 Storage compartment floor Open the rear passenger side storage compartment page 235 Lift both clips 1 Remove storage compartment floor 2 in direction of arrow You can now access the fuses To reinstall storage compartment floor 2 after checking or replacing fuses follow the procedure in reverse order Fuse in trunk The fuse in the trunk is located on the right hand side of the trunk Lift up the trunk floor cover Emergency engine shut down If the engine cannot be turned off as de scribed you may use the following emer gency procedure Take the fuse chart from the vehicle tool kit page 388 Find row Engine emergency stop in the fuse chart table to identify the fuses that have to removed as well as their locations Remove the respective fuses 427 Technical data Parts service Warranty coverage Identification labels Layout of poly V belt drive Engine Rims and tires Electrical system Main dimensions Weights Fuels coolants lubricants etc 428 Technical data The Technical dat
169. cleaning 326 d Windshield Cleaning with wiper fluid 58 Cleaning 326 e Retractable hardtop Opening closing 199 Wind screen 204 Luggage cover 205 Sunshade for panorama roof 208 24 At a glance Cockpit 25 At a glance Cockpit Item Page 1 Exterior lamp switch 55 128 2 Headlamp washer button 180 3 Cruise control lever Cruise control Distronic 209 213 4 Shift paddle downshift 175 5 Instrument cluster 26 136 6 Multifunction steering wheel 30 140 7 Shift paddle upshift 175 8 Lever for voice control system see separate operating instructions 9 Front Parktronic warning indicator 230 Item Page a Digital clock b Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 76 c Interior storage compart ments locking unlocking 235 d Overhead control panel 33 e Glove box 233 f Center console 31 32 g Starter switch 41 h Horn j Steering wheel adjustment stalk Heated steering wheel 45 240 Item Page k Combination switch Turn signals Windshield wipers High beam 56 57 133 l Parking brake pedal 54 61 m Parking brake release han dle 54 n Hood lock release 274 o Door control panel 36 p Power window switch 196 26 At a glance Instrument cluster 27 At a glance Instrument cluster Item Page 1 Coolant temperature gauge with D Coolant temperature warning lamp 337
170. cluster submenu Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the left multifunction display Digital speedometer The selection marker is on the current setting Press or to set the speed ometer units to Kilometers or Miles Selecting language Move the selection marker with button or to the Inst cluster submenu Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Text appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Function Page Selecting speedometer display mode 156 Selecting language 156 Selecting standard display 157 157 Controls in detail Control system Press or to select the language to be used for the multifunction display messages Available languages German English French Italian Spanish Dutch Swedish Danish Turkish Portuguese Selecting standard display Move the selection marker with button or to the Inst cluster submenu Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the left multifunction display Select display The selection marker is on the current setting Press or to select the de sired setting The selected option appears in the left multifunction display The option not selected will appear in the right multifunction display when scrolling through the standard display page 145 Time submenu Access the Time submenu via the Se
171. cold coolant is up to the upper mark on the bracing rib of the coolant expansion tank translucent for warm coolant is approx 0 6 in 1 5 cm higher Add coolant as required Replace and tighten cap For more information see Coolants page 449 Warning G In order to avoid any possibly serious burns Use extreme caution when opening the hood if there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking from the cooling system or if the coolant temperature gauge indi cates that the coolant is overheated Do not remove pressure cap on coolant reservoir if coolant temperature is above 158 F 70 C Allow engine to cool down before removing cap The coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and is under pressure Using a rag slowly open the cap approx imately 1 2 turn to relieve excess pres sure If opened immediately scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown out un der pressure Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts Antifreeze contains ethylene gly col which may burn if it comes into con tact with hot engine parts SL 600 and SL 65 AMG Only open the cap on coolant expansion tank 1 Never open the cap between the two charge air coolers Other wise the engine could be damaged 281 Operation Engine compartment Battery Your vehicle is equipped with two batter ies The starter battery located in the en gine compartment The battery for electrical consumers located in the trunk
172. crew 2 approximately one quarter of a turn Hook luggage cover into holders page 205 Let go of the hardtop It should gradually lower into the trunk When top is completely lowered return locking screw 2 to its original posi tion Close the lid Replace the trunk floor Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Do not overtighten the screw 395 Practical hints Replacing SmartKey batteries Replacing SmartKey batteries If the batteries in the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO are dis charged the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked It is recommended to have the batteries replaced at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling Remove the mechanical key from the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO page 391 1 Mechanical key 2 Battery compartment Insert mechanical key 1 into opening Press mechanical key 1 in direction of arrow The battery compartment is unlatched Pull battery compartment 2 out of the housing Warning G Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive substances Therefore keep the batteries out of reach of children If a battery is swallowed seek medical help immediately i When inserting batteries make su
173. ctivated auto matically at high outside temperatures if the concentration of carbon monoxide CO and or nitrogen oxide NOx in the out side air increases for example in a tunnel The indicator lamp on button is not lit when the air recirculation mode is automatically switched on A quantity of outside air is added after approxi mately 30 minutes i The manually selected air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41 F 5 C after 5 minutes if the air conditioning is turned off after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41 F 5 C Warning G Never operate the windows if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure In the event that the procedure causes po tential danger the closing of the windows can be immediately halted by releasing the button or by pressing and pulling the respective window switch 193 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Deactivating Press and hold button The indicator lamp on the button goes out The air recirculation mode is deac tivated The windows will return to their previous position Air conditioning The air conditioning cooling function is operational when the engine is running and cools the vehicle interior down to the se lected temperature In addition the cool ing function dehumidifies the air in the vehicle
174. current tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference pressures and then moni tored If you wish to cancel activation Press the button Checking tire pressure electronically with the Advanced Tire Pressure Moni toring System Advanced TPMS Canada only The TPMS only functions on wheels that are equipped with the proper electronic sensors It monitors the tire inflation pres sure as selected by the driver in all four tires A warning is issued to alert you to a decrease in pressure in one or more of the tires Tire pressure inquiries are made using the multifunction display The present inflation pressures are displayed only after a few minutes travel time Switch on the ignition page 39 Press the j or k button until the current inflation pressures for each tire appear in the multifunction display i Possible differences between the readings of a tire pressure gauge of an air hose e g gas station equipment and the vehicle s control system can occur Usually the readings issued by the control system are more precise i When the message Tire pressure displayed after driving for a few minutes appears in the multifunction display the individual inflation pressure values are matched with the tires The individual values are displayed after a few minutes driving Warning G It is the driver s responsibility to calibrate the TPMS on the recommended cold infla tion pressure Underinflated t
175. cy calls Tele Aid 244 245 Emergency engine shut down 426 Emergency operation Limp Home Mode 179 Emergency operations Automatic transmission Limp Home Mode 179 Glove box Unlocking 392 Load assist Lowering 394 Locking unlocking the vehicle 391 393 Remote door unlock Tele Aid 250 Trunk lid Releasing from the inside 117 Trunk lid Unlocking 392 Emergency Tensioning Device see ETD Emission control 269 Information label 431 System warranties 10 Vacuum line routing diagram label 431 Engine Block heater Canada only 317 Break in recommendations 258 Cleaning 324 Compartment 274 Malfunction indicator lamp 29 336 Number 431 Poly V belt layout 432 Starting 52 Tachometer 29 Technical data 433 Turning off 62 Engine coolant see Coolant Engine oil 275 446 Adding 278 444 Additives 446 Checking level With control system 276 Checking level With oil dipstick 278 Consumption 275 Filler neck 278 279 Messages in the multifunction display 277 375 Oil dipstick 278 ESP 87 89 Switch 32 Switching off 91 Switching on 92 Synchronizing 355 Warning lamp 27 332 ETD 81 Safety guidelines 70 Warning and indictor lamps 342 Exterior lamp switch 128 Exterior rear view mirrors 48 180 458 Index F Filler neck Engine oil 278 279 First aid kit 388 Flat tire 405 Preparing the vehicle 405 Spare wheel 388 405 Flexible Service System see FSS Fluids Automatic climate contro
176. cylinders 8 12 Bore 3 82 in 97 00 mm 3 23 in 82 00 mm Stroke 3 31 in 84 00 mm 3 43 in 87 00 mm Total piston displacement 333 3 cu in 5461 cm3 336 4 cu in 5513 cm3 Compression ratio 10 7 1 9 1 Output acc to SAE J 1349 382 hp 6000 rpm2 285 kW 6000 rpm 2 Premium fuel required Performance may vary with fuel octane rating 510 hp 5000 rpm2 380 kW 5000 rpm Maximum torque acc to SAE J 1349 391 lb ft 2700 rpm 530 Nm 2800 4800 rpm 612 lb ft 1900 3500 rpm 830 Nm 1900 3500 rpm Maximum engine speed 6500 rpm 5950 rpm Firing order 1 5 4 2 6 3 7 8 1 12 5 8 3 10 6 7 2 11 4 9 Poly V belt 2404 mm 2335 mm 434 Technical data Engine Model SL 55 AMG 230 474 1 1 The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment SL 65 AMG 230 479 1 Engine 113 275 Mode of operation 4 stroke engine gasoline injection 4 stroke engine gasoline injection No of cylinders 8 12 Bore 3 25 in 82 60 mm 3 25 in 82 60 mm Stroke 3 66 in 93 00 mm 3 66 in 93 00 mm Total piston displacement 331 8 cu in 5439 cm3 364 9 cu in 5980 cm3 Compression ratio 11 1 9 1 Output acc to SAE J 1349 510 hp 6100 rpm2 380 kW 6100 rpm 2 Premium fuel required Performance may vary with fuel octane rating 603 hp 4800 5100 rpm2 450 kW 4800 5100 rpm Maximum torq
177. d Coolant temperature gauge Tachometer Have the electronic systems checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center page 336 Engine Service There may be a malfunction in the fuel injection system ignition system exhaust system fuel system Have the engine checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center page 336 375 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution _ Entry position Do not drive The steering wheel has not yet moved into its stored driving posi tion Wait until the steering wheel has moved to its driving position The message disappears N USA only Add 1 qt engine oil at next refueling Canada only Add 1 liter engine oil at next refueling Vehicles with engine oil measuring system only The engine oil level is too low Add engine oil page 278 and check the engine oil level page 276 Engine oil level Stop car turn engine off Vehicles with engine oil measuring system only There is no oil in the engine There is a danger of engine damage Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so Turn off the engine Add engine oil page 278 and check the engine oil level page 276 Engine oil level Reduce oil level Vehicles with engine oil measuring system only You have added too much engine oil There is a risk of damaging the engine
178. d and child restraint from passenger seat and properly secure the child in rear seat employing the child restraint if necessary Make sure that no objects which applying supplemental weight onto the seat are present The system may recog nize such supplemental weight and sense that an occu pant on the passenger seat is of a greater weight than actually present Keep the seat unoccupied close the passenger door and switch on the ignition page 39 Monitor the 5 indicator lamp between the center air vents and the multifunction display in the instrument cluster page 139 for the following Continued on next page 357 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution Front passenger airbag enabled See Oper Manual With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on the 5 indicator lamp between the center air vents should illuminate and remain illuminated indicating that the OCS page 72 has deactivated the air bag the message Front passenger airbag enabled See Oper Manual or the message Front passenger airbag disabled See Oper Manual should not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied Wait at last 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display If above conditions are met you can occupy the passenger seat again Depending on
179. d go city traffic the coolant tem perature may rise close to approx 266 F 130 C The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature over 248 F 120 C Doing so may cause serious en gine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Warning G Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide CO and inhaling it can cause un consciousness and possible death Do not run the engine in confined areas such as a garage which are not properly ventilated If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving have the cause determined and corrected immediately If you must drive under these conditions drive only with at least one win dow fully open at all times Warning G Driving when your engine is badly over heated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine com partment to catch fire You could be se riously burned Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the engine hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Turn off the engine get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down 271 Operation At the gas station At the gas station Refueling The fuel filler flap is located on the right hand side of the vehicle towards the rear Locking unlocking the vehicle with t
180. d if this occurs assistance must be summoned by other means 245 Controls in detail Useful features than 10 seconds or do not come on The message TeleAid malfunction Visit workshop appears for approximately 10 seconds in the multifunction display Emergency calls An emergency call is initiated automatically following an accident in which the emergency tensioning devices ETDs or air bags deploy An emergency call can also be initiated manually by opening the cover next to the interior rear view mirror labeled SOS then briefly pressing the button located under the cover See page 246 for instruc tions on initiating an emergency call man ually Once the emergency call is in progress the indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin to flash The message Connecting call appears in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted When the con nection is established the message Call connected appears in the multifunc tion display All information relevant to the emergency such as the location of the ve hicle determined by the GPS satellite loca tion system vehicle model identification number and color are generated A voice connection between the Response Center and the occupants of the vehicle will be established automatically soon af ter the emergency call has been initiated The Response Center will attempt to deter mine more precisely the nature of the emergency provided they can speak t
181. d level 2 settings only when required by current driving condi tions Otherwise Fuel consumption may increase Handling may be impaired The ABC vehicle level control button with the indicator lamps is located in the lower section of the center console 1 Indicator lamp 1 2 Indicator lamp 2 3 ABC vehicle level control button i These height adjustments are so small that you may not notice any change Vehicle level Use for Indicator lamps Normal For driving on nor mal roads Both lamps off Level 1 For driving on rough roads or with snow chains page 318 One lamp on Level 2 For driving on very rough road surface conditions Both lamps on i The selected vehicle level setting remains stored in memory even if the engine is turned off and restarted 227 Controls in detail Driving systems Start the engine page 52 Briefly press button 3 to change from one level setting to the next The normal level is selected if both indicator lamps are off At level 1 indicator lamp 1 is on At level 2 both indicator lamps are on When the vehicle is at level 2 pressing the button will return the vehicle to nor mal level Suspension tuning The suspension tuning is set according to Your driving style Road surface conditions The vehicle loading Your choice of suspension style You can set the following suspension styles Regular Comfort Sporty The ABC suspens
182. d must be set manually if re quired Move the selection marker with the or button to the Time submenu Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Set time Minute s appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the minute setting Press button or to set the minutes i For information on setting the time refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions 159 Controls in detail Control system Lighting submenu Access the Lighting submenu via the Settings menu Use the Lighting sub menu to change the lamp and lighting set tings on your vehicle The following functions are available Setting daytime running lamp mode USA only Move the selection marker with button or to the Lighting sub menu Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Light circuit Headlamp mode appears in the multi function display The selection marker is on the current setting Press button or to select manual operation Manual or daytime running lamp mode Constant With daytime running lamp mode activated and the exterior lamp switch at position M or U the low beam head lamps are switched on when the engine is running In low ambient light conditions the follow ing lamps will switch on additionally Parking lamps Tail lamps License plate lamps Side marker lamps Function Page Setting daytime running lamp mode USA only 159 Setting locator li
183. d on the top side of the seat 1 Seat forward 2 Seat backward Moving the seat forward Press switch at 1 and release The seat moves forward automatically Moving the seat backward Press switch at 2 and release The seat moves backwards to its previ ous position automatically Lumbar support You can adjust the contour of the seat s lumbar support to help enhance support to your spine 1 Thumbwheel Switch on the ignition page 39 Set the lumbar support between 0 and 5 Warning G When moving the seats be sure that no one can be caught by them Never place hands under seat or near any moving parts during a seat adjustment procedure To stop the seat from moving when potential danger ex ists press the switch again move the seat adjustment switch on the door page 42 When moving the seats make sure that there are no items in the footwell or behind the seats Otherwise you could damage the seats 122 Controls in detail Seats Multicontour backrest The multicontour backrest has inflatable air cushions built into the seat backrest to provide additional lumbar and side sup port The seat backrest cushion height and cur vature can be continuously varied with switches on the lower left side driver s seat or the lower right side passenger side of the seat when the ignition is switched on 1 Lumbar region support 2 Shoulder region support 3 Side bolsters adjustment 4 Mas
184. d rating and the speed capabil ity of the tire is limited to 186 mph 300 km h Any tire with a speed capability above 186 mph 300 km h must include a ZR in the size designation AND the service description must be placed in parenthesis Example 275 40 ZR 18 99Y The Y speed rating in paren thesis designates the maximum speed capability of the tire as being above 186 mph 300 km h Consult the tire manufacturer for the actual maximum permissible speed of the tire Index Speed rating Q up to 100 mph 160 km h R up to 106 mph 170 km h S up to 112 mph 180 km h T up to 118 mph 190 km h H up to 130 mph 210 km h V up to 149 mph 240 km h W up to 168 mph 270 km h Y up to 186 mph 300 km h Y above 186 mph 300 km h ZR above 149 mph 240 km h 306 Operation Tires and wheels All season and winter tires Load identification 1 Load identification In addition to tire load rating special load information may be molded into the tire sidewall following the letter designating the tire speed rating 1 page 306 No specification given absence of any text like in above example indicates a standard load SL tire XL or Extra Load designates an extra load or reinforced tire Light Load designates a light load tire C D E designates load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Index Speed rating Q M S1
185. d the vehicle requires towing with all four wheels on the ground Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is only permissible for distances up to 30 miles 50 km and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph 50 km h For more infor mation see Towing the vehicle page 421 369 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution USA only Canada only 3 Check brake fluid level There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir Risk of accident Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so Do not drive any further Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not add brake fluid This will not solve the problem Warning G Driving with the message Check brake fluid level displayed can result in an ac cident Have your brake system checked im mediately Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire You can be serious ly burned If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks 370 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution USA only Canada only 3 Service brak
186. de C or S The MANUAL program mode is not stored Emergency operation Limp Home Mode If vehicle acceleration becomes less re sponsive or sluggish or the transmission no longer shifts the transmission is most likely operating in limp home emergency operation mode In this mode only second gear and reverse gear can be activated Stop the vehicle in a safe location Move gear selector lever to P Turn off the engine Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting Restart the engine Move gear selector lever to drive position D for second gear or reverse gear R Have the transmission checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Warning G On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control i When you brake or stop the transmission shifts down to a gear from which you can easily accelerate or take off 180 Controls in detail Good visibility For information on windshield wiper opera tion see Windshield wipers page 57 Headlamp cleaning system The button is located on the left side of the dashboard 1 Headlamp washer button Switch on the ignition page 39 Press button 1 The headlamps are cleaned with a high pressure water jet For information on filling up the washer flu id reservoir
187. decelera tion as assessed by the air bag control unit On the passenger side the front air bag deploy ment is additionally influenced by the passen ger s weight category as identified by the Occupant Classification System OCS page 72 The lighter the passenger side occupant the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required for the second stage inflation of the air bag 72 Safety and Security Occupant safety The passenger front air bag will only be de ployed if the system based on OCS weight sen sor readings senses that the front pas senger seat is occupied the 5 indicator lamp in the center console is not lit page 76 the impact exceeds a preset deploy ment threshold Knee bag The knee bag is located on the driver side lower instrument panel It is designed to operate together with the driver air bag in certain frontal impacts exceeding a preset threshold The knee bag operates best in conjunction with a properly positioned and fastened seat belt Head thorax air bags 1 Head thorax air bag The head thorax air bags are deployed in impacts exceeding a preset deploy ment threshold on the impacted side of the vehicle independently of the front air bags The head thorax air bags are not deployed in impacts which do not exceed the sys tem s deployment threshold Occupant Classification System The Occupant Classification System OCS automatically turns the passenger front air
188. ded cold tire inflation pressures for maximum loaded vehicle weight The tire inflation pressures listed apply to the tires installed as original equipment Warning G Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being over heated Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort wear unevenly increase stopping distance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris potholes etc i Data shown on placard example are for illus tration purposes only Tire data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustration below Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle 292 Operation Tires and wheels Important notes on tire inflation pressure Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure are also increased while driving depending on the driving speed and the tire load If you will be driving your vehicle at high speeds of 100 mph 160 km h or higher where it is legal and conditions allow consult the placard on the inside of the fuel filler flap on how to adjust the cold tire in flation pressure If you do not adjust the tire inflation pressure excessive heat can build up and result in sudden tire fail
189. ding symbol 1 page 307 which denotes the tire meets require ments of the U S Department of Transpor tation Manufacturer s identification mark The manufacturer s identification mark 2 page 307 denotes the tire manufacturer New tires have a mark with two symbols Retreaded tires have a mark with four sym bols For more information on retreaded tires see page 283 Tire size The code 3 page 307 indicates the tire size i For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration 308 Operation Tires and wheels Tire type code The code 4 page 307 may at the option of the manufacturer be used as a descriptive code for identifying significant characteristics of the tire Date of manufacture The date of manufacture 5 page 307 identifies the week and year of manufac ture The first two figures identify the week starting with 01 to represent the first full week of the calendar year The second two figures represent the year For example 3202 represents the 32nd week of 2002 Maximum tire load 1 Maximum tire load rating The maximum tire load is the maximum weight the tires are designed to support For more information on tire load rating page 303 For information on calculating total and cargo load capacities page 288 i For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are
190. display 349 Oil level 279 ABS 87 Indicator lamp 29 334 Messages in the multifunction display 351 352 Warning lamp 27 332 Accelerator position automatic transmission 171 Accessory weight 312 Accident 59 Active Body Control see ABC Air bags 68 Children in the vehicle 83 Front 71 Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 76 Head thorax 72 Knee bag 72 Occupant Classification System OCS 72 Passenger 72 Air conditioning system see Automatic cli mate control system Air distribution 188 189 Air pressure 312 Tire inflation pressure 291 Air pump 410 Air recirculation mode 191 Air vents 185 Air volume 188 190 Alarm system see Anti theft systems Alignment bolt vehicle tool kit 409 Anticorrosion antifreeze 445 451 Antiglare Interior rear view mirror 180 Antilock Brake System see ABS Anti theft systems Anti theft alarm system 96 Immobilizer 96 Tow away alarm 98 Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning Armrest 234 Ashtray 31 239 Aspect ratio 312 ATF 279 Auto dimming Rear view mirrors 180 Automatic central locking 119 Control system 162 Automatic climate control system 184 Air conditioning Cooling 193 Air conditioning refrigerant 446 Air distribution 188 189 Air recirculation mode 191 Air vents 185 Air volume 188 190 Control panel 185 Deactivating system 187 Defrosting 183 190 Residual heat utilization 194 Temperature 188 Temperature sensor 33 Ventilated glove box
191. door opener motor head unit The training light is activated You have 30 seconds to initiate the follow ing step Step 10 Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for 2 seconds and release the pro grammed signal transmitter button 2 3 or 4 Step 11 Press hold for 2 seconds and release same signal transmitter button a sec ond time to complete the training pro cess i If indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly for about 2 seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with programming steps 8 through 12 as your garage door opener may be equipped with the rolling code feature i Some garage door openers or other rolling code equipped devices may require you to press hold for 2 seconds and release the same signal transmitter button a third time to com plete the training process 254 Controls in detail Useful features Step 12 Confirm the garage door operation by pressing the programmed signal trans mitter button 2 3 or 4 Step 13 To program the remaining two signal transmitter buttons repeat the steps above starting with step 3 Gate operator Canadian programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for the integrated signal transmitter to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time o
192. dren are around When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehi cle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Warning G Maintain sight of trunk area while operating door mounted switch Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being injured To interrupt the closing procedure release the door mounted remote trunk open ing closing switch again Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the vehicle the remote trunk opening closing switch can be operated Therefore do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equip ment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury i If the trunk lid comes into contact with an object while closing e g luggage that has been piled too high in the upper motion sequence the closing procedure is stopped and the trunk re opens slightly 115 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Press and hold switch 1 until the trunk is closed Indicator lamp 2 in the switch goes out when the trunk is closed To interrupt the closing procedure Release s
193. e 200 Controls in detail Retractable hardtop Opening closing with retractable hardtop switch The retractable hardtop switch is located on the lower part of the center console Warning G When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsu pervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and or serious personal injury Never sit or place heavy objects on the rear shelf Doing so could cause damage to the re tractable hardtop and the rear shelf When opening and closing the retractable roof make sure there is sufficient clearance for the retract able hardtop to move up and for the trunk lid to move back the luggage cover is installed extended and closed the trunk is loaded only to the height of the luggage cover luggage cargo does not push up the closed luggage cover the trunk lid is closed the outside temperature is above 5 F 15 C the roof is dry and clean when opening Otherwise the retractable hardtop and trunk as well as other parts of the vehicle could be dam aged Warning G Before operating the retractable hardtop make sure there is no danger of anyone being injured by the moving parts retract able roof roof frame and trunk lid due to in attention Hands must never
194. e Visit workshop There are malfunctions but the electro hydraulic brake system is operating normally Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Brakes overheated Drive on but with even greater care The brake system is overheated due to an excessive load on the brakes Relieve the load on the brake system Drive more smoothly and think ahead to avoid unnecessary braking When driving down steep grades shift into a lower gear to use the engine s braking power page 174 Cautiously continue driving so that the air stream will cool down the brakes USA only Canada only Release parking brake You are driving with the parking brake set Release the parking brake page 61 371 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution Coolant Stop car Turn engine off The coolant is too hot Among other possible causes the poly V belt could be broken Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so Turn off the engine Check the poly V belt If it is broken Do not continue to drive Otherwise the en gine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the en gine Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If it is intact Wait for the message to disappear before re starting the engine Doing otherwise could result in serious
195. e highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked Only use belts in stalled or supplied by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Air bags and pyrotechnic emergency tensioning devices ETDs are designed to function on a one time only basis An air bag or ETD that has deployed must be replaced Do not pass belts over sharp edges They could tear Do not make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the belts No modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the SRS This includes changing or removing any component or part of the SRS the installation of additional trim material badges etc over the steering wheel hub passenger front air bag cov er door frame trims or door trim pan els and installation of additional electrical electronic equipment on or near SRS components and wiring Keep area between air bags and occupants free from objects e g packages purs es umbrellas etc Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide ade quate protection Air bag system components will be hot after an air bag has inflated Do not touch Never place your feet on the instrument panel dashboard or on the seat Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat 71 Safety and Security Occupant safety When you sell your vehicle we strongly urge you to give
196. e last speed set Warning G It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to select the appropriate setting given road conditions traffic driver s preferred driving style and applicable laws and driving recom mendations for safe following distance 222 Controls in detail Driving systems Driving with Distronic This section describes a number of driving situations where special precaution is re quired on the part of the driver Be pre pared to brake in such situations This will deactivate the Distronic system The most likely cause for a malfunctioning system is a dirty sensor located behind the hood grille especially at times of snow and ice or heavy rain In such a case Distronic will switch off and the message Distronic Currently unavailable See Oper Manual appears in the multifunction display For cleaning and care of the Distronic sen sor see Cleaning the Distronic system sensor cover page 325 Warning G Distronic works to maintain the speed se lected by the driver unless a moving obsta cle proceeding directly ahead of it in the same travel direction is detected e g fol lowing another vehicle ahead of you at your set distance This means that Your vehicle can pass another vehicle after you have changed lanes While in a sharp turn or if the preceding vehicle is in a sharp turn Distronic could lose sight of the preceding vehicle Your vehicle could then accelerate to the
197. e 95 F 35 C When these conditions do not apply anymore steering wheel heating continues i Indicator lamp 3 flashes or switches off in case of power surge or undervoltage in case of a steering wheel heating malfunc tion i The steering wheel heating switches off au tomatically when you remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or on vehicles with KEYLESS GO when you switch off the ignition page 40 and open the driver s door Warning G To prevent injuries make sure that there is no possibility of body parts getting caught in moving parts If potential danger exists press the switch again This will immediately stop the movement of the hardtop 242 Controls in detail Useful features 1 Retracted hardtop 2 Luggage cover 3 Load assist button Hardtop 1 can only be raised or lowered when luggage cover 2 is closed the trunk lid is completely opened Raising the hardtop Press button 3 Hardtop 1 rises a short distance Button 3 comes on brightly You can now open luggage cover 2 Lowering the hardtop Close luggage cover 2 Press button 3 Hardtop 1 lowers Button 3 is dimly lit Power outlet A power outlet is located on the right side of the trunk Switch on the ignition page 39 Flip up cover and insert electrical plug cigar lighter type Only close the trunk if the hardtop is com pletely lowered Otherwise you could damage the hardtop If you begin to close
198. e batteries and their connec tions checked page 414 Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors page 393 If the SmartKey is malfunctioning contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center 105 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Checking the batteries Press button or Battery check lamp 5 page 102 comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in order Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key you should do the following Have the SmartKey deactivated by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Report the loss of the SmartKey or the mechanical key to your car insurance company immediately If necessary have the mechanical lock replaced Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to supply you with a replace ment SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS GO come with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS GO each with remote controls and a remov able mechanical key The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two SmartKeys with KEYLESS GO are a different color to help distinguish each SmartKey with KEYLESS GO unit The function of the SmartKey overrules the KEYLESS GO function The KEYLESS GO function is integrated into the SmartKey On these vehicles the validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is checked every time you grasp a door handle i If battery check lamp 5 does not come on briefly durin
199. e care 322 Cleaning and care of the vehicle 322 Contents Practical hints 331 What to do if 332 Lamps in the instrument cluster 332 Air bag off indicator lamp 345 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 347 Where will I find 388 First aid kit 388 Vehicle tool kit jack and spare wheel 388 Locking unlocking in an emergency 391 Unlocking the vehicle 391 Locking the vehicle 393 Lowering the load assist manually 394 Replacing SmartKey batteries 395 Replacing bulbs 397 Bulbs 397 Replacing bulbs for front lamps 399 Replacing bulbs for rear lamps 402 Replacing wiper blades 403 Placing wiper arms in vertical position 403 Removing wiper blades 404 Installing wiper blades 404 Flat tire 405 Preparing the vehicle 405 Mounting the spare wheel 405 MOExtended system 413 Batteries
200. e chrome cleaner on ornamental moldings Although ornamental moldings may have chrome appearance they could be made of anodized aluminum that will be damaged when cleaned with chrome cleaner Instead use damp cloth to clean those ornamental moldings Very dirty ornamental moldings of which you are sure are chrome plated use a chrome cleaner If in doubt whether an ornamental molding is chrome plated contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Only use window cleaning solutions that are suitable for plastic lamp lenses Window clean ing solutions which are not suitable may damage the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps There fore do not use abrasives solvents or cleaners that contain solvents Never apply strong force and only use a soft non scratching cloth when cleaning the lenses Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or sponge Otherwise you may scratch or damage the lens surface 326 Operation Vehicle care Restart the engine after cleaning sensor cover 1 Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors 1 Parktronic system sensors in front bumper Use a mild car wash detergent such as Mercedes Benz approved Car Shampoo with plenty of water and a soft non scratching cloth to clean sensors 1 on the bumpers Cleaning the windows and the wiper blades Make sure the hood is fully closed Switch on the ignition page 39 Turn combination switch to wiper setting II page 57 With
201. e entire turn signal unit must be re placed Have the turn signal unit replaced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Front side marker lamp bulbs Since replacing the side marker lamp bulbs is a technically highly demanding process we recommend you have the side marker lamp bulbs replaced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center 402 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Replacing bulbs for rear lamps Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear lamp do the following first Turn the exterior lamp switch to posi tion M page 128 Open the trunk page 111 Tail lamp unit 1 Backup lamp 2 Driver s side Rear fog lamp Passenger s side Substitute lamp 3 Turn signal lamp Fold the trim to the side and remove it Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it out Gently push the bulb into the socket turn it counterclockwise and remove it Insert the new bulb and reinstall the bulb socket The bulb socket should audibly click into place Reinstall the trim License plate lamp 1 Screws Loosen both screws 1 Remove the license plate lamp Replace the bulb Reinstall the license plate lamp Retighten screws 1 403 Practical hints Replacing wiper blades Replacing wiper blades Placing wiper arms in vertical position Wiper blades in vertical position Vehicles with SmartKey Turn SmartKey to starter switch position 1 page 39 Turn combination switch to wiper setting
202. e frame until it snaps into place Cigarette lighter Switch on the ignition page 39 Warning G Remove ashtray only with vehicle standing still Set the parking brake to secure vehicle from movement Move gear selector lever to position N With gear selector lever in position N turn off the engine Warning G Never touch the heating element or sides of the lighter they are extremely hot Hold the knob only Make sure that any children traveling with you do not injure themselves or start a fire with the hot cigarette lighter When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsu pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause serious personal injury 240 Controls in detail Useful features 1 Cigarette lighter Push in cigarette lighter 1 The lighter will pop out automatically when hot Heated steering wheel The steering wheel heating warms up the leather area of the steering wheel The stalk is located on the lower left hand side of the steering wheel 1 Switching on 2 Switching off 3 Indicator lamp The lighter socket can accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories up to a maximum of 85 W designed for use with the standard cigarette lighter plug type Keep in mind how ever that connecting acces
203. e gear R or parking position P only when the vehicle is stopped Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfac es This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty 170 Controls in detail Automatic transmission Gear selector lever position Effect Park position Gear selector lever position when the vehicle is parked Place gear selector lever in position P only when vehicle is stopped The park position is not intended to serve as a brake when the vehicle is parked Rather the driver should always set the parking brake in addition to placing the gear selector lever in position P to secure the vehicle Effect The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P With the SmartKey removed the gear selector lever is locked in position P Reverse gear Place gear selector lever in position R only when vehicle is stopped Effect Neutral No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle When the brakes are released the vehicle can be moved freely pushed or towed To avoid damage to the trans mission never engage N while driving If the ESP is deactivated or malfunctioning Move gear selector lever to N only if the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads Drive The transmission shifts automatically
204. e is factory equipped with W rated tires which have a speed rating of 168 mph 270 km h An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 155 mph 250 km h SL 600 SL 55 AMG SL 65 AMG SL 550 Sport Package SL 600 Sport Package Your vehicle is factory equipped with Y rated tires which have a speed rating of 186 mph 300 km h An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 155 mph 250 km h SL 55 AMG Performance Package Your vehicle is factory equipped with Y rated tires which have a speed rating of 186 mph 300 km h An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 186 mph 300 km h Winter driving instructions The most important rule for slippery or icy roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration braking and steering maneuvers Do not use the cruise control system under such conditions When the vehicle is in danger of skidding move gear selector lever to position N Try to keep the vehicle under control by cor rective steering action i For information on tire speed rating for win ter tires see All season and winter tires page 306 For additional general information on tire speed markings on tire sidewall see Tire speed rating page 304 i For information on driving with snow chains see Snow chains page 318 Warning G On slippery road s
205. e label you should determine the proper tire infla tion pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitor ing system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accord ingly when the low tire pressure telltale illu minates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significant ly underinflated tire causes the tire to over heat and can lead to tire failure Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehi cle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driv er s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale USA only Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is com bined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the mal function indicator is illuminat
206. e same time When using a seat belt to secure infant or toddler restraints or children in booster seats always follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions Check your seat belt during travel to make sure that it is properly positioned Make sure the seat belt is always fitted snugly Take special care of this when wearing loose clothing Warning G Do not pass belts over sharp edges They could tear Do not allow the belt to get caught in the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism This could damage the belt Never attempt to make modifications to seat belts This could impair the effective ness of the belts Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center 52 Getting started Driving Starting the engine Automatic transmission Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission P Park position with gear selector lever lock R Reverse gear N Neutral D Drive position For more information see Automatic transmission page 168 Starting with the SmartKey Make sure the gear selector lever is set to P Do not depress the accelerator Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 and hold until the engine starts page 40 For information on turning off the engine wi
207. e seat belts must not be treated with chemical cleaning agents Do not dry the seat belts at temperatures above 176 F 80 C or in direct sunlight Warning G Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection Warning G Only use seat or head restraint covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes Benz for your vehicle model Using other seat or head restraint covers may interfere with or prevent the activation of the active head restraints Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for availability Do not use solvents like tar remover or wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as these may be abrasive 330 331 Practical hints What to do if Where will I find Locking unlocking in an emergency Replacing SmartKey batteries Replacing bulbs Replacing wiper blades Flat tire Batteries Jump starting Towing the vehicle Fuses 332 Practical hints What to do if Lamps in the instrument cluster General information If any of the following lamps in the instru ment cluster fails to come on during the bulb self check when switching on the igni tion have the respective bulb checked and replaced if necessary Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution v The yellow ABS ESP warning lamp comes on while driving The ESP has been switched off Risk of accident When the
208. e starting the engine with the SmartKey Turn SmartKey in starter switch to position 0 and repeat starting procedure If you are starting the engine with KEYLESS GO Close any doors that may be open to allow for better detec tion of the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Or Start the engine with the SmartKey as radio signals from another source may be interfering with the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Repeat the starting procedure page 52 Remember that extended starting attempts can drain the battery Get a jump start page 419 If the engine does not start after several starting attempts there could be a mal function in the engine electronics or in the fuel supply system Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center 54 Getting started Driving Parking brake 1 Release handle 2 Parking brake pedal Release the parking brake by pulling on release handle 1 The indicator lamp USA only or 3 Canada only in the instru ment cluster goes out Driving off Depress the brake pedal Place the gear selector lever in position D or R Warning G When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could release the parking brake which could result in an accident and or serious injury Warning G It is dangero
209. e the freez ing point do not guarantee that the road sur face is free of ice Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown depth Before driving through water determine its depth Never accelerate before driving into water The bow wave could force wa ter into the engine and auxiliary equipment thus damaging them If you must drive through standing water drive slowly to prevent water from entering the pas senger compartment or the engine compart ment Water in these areas could cause damage to electrical components or wiring of the engine or transmission or could result in water being in gested by the engine through the air intake causing severe internal engine damage Any such damage is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty 268 Operation Driving instructions Passenger compartment Driving abroad Abroad there is an extensive Mercedes Benz service network at your disposal If you plan to drive into areas which are not listed in the index of your Mercedes Benz Center directory you should request pertinent information from an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Control and operation of radio trans mitters COMAND radio and telephone Telephones and two way radios Radio transmitters such as a portable tele phone or a citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are con nected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle Refer to the radio
210. e to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident ESP unavailable See Oper Manual The ESP is deactivated because the power supply has been interrupted The electro hydraulic brake system is still functioning normally but without the ESP available Synchronize the ESP With the vehicle stationary turn the steering wheel com pletely to the left and then to the right If the ESP message does not go out Continue driving with added caution Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident When sychronizing the ESP make sure you can turn the steering wheel in both directions as far as it will go without the wheels hitting any ob jects e g a road curb 356 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution Front passenger airbag enabled See Oper Manual The passenger front air bag is activated while driving even though a child small individual or object below the system s weight threshold is on the front passenger seat or the front pas senger seat is empty Objects on the seat or forces acting on the seat may make the system sense supplemental weight Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the passenger seat for the following Switch off the ignition page 39 Remove chil
211. e trunk lid with the emergency release button Arming the alarm system The alarm system is armed after locking the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS GO The turn signal lamps flash three times to indicate that the alarm sys tem is activated The indicator lamp in the central locking switch page 31 begins to flash after arming the alarm system Disarming the alarm system The alarm system is disarmed when you unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS GO The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate that the alarm system is disarmed Canceling the alarm To cancel the alarm With the SmartKey Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch or Press the or button on the SmartKey With KEYLESS GO Grasp an outside door handle The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be within 3 ft 1 m of the vehicle or Press the KEYLESS GO start stop but ton page 40 The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be inside the vehicle i If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds a call to the Response Center is ini tiated automatically by the Tele Aid system page 245 provided Tele Aid service was sub scribed to and properly activated and that nec essary cellular service and GPS coverage are available i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three times a door or the trunk lid may not be properly closed Close the respective element and lock the vehi cle again i The alarm system will rearm auto
212. e weight of a typical 12 month old child in a standard child restraint or if the passenger seat is sensed as being empty When the OCS senses that the passenger seat occupant is classified as being up to or less than the weight of a typical 12 month old child in a standard child restraint the 5 indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated indicating that the pas senger front air bag is deactivated When the OCS senses that the passenger seat is classified as being empty the 5 indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated indicating that the passenger front air bag is deactivated 74 Safety and Security Occupant safety When the OCS senses that the passenger seat occupant is classified as being heavier than the weight of a typical 12 month old child seated in a standard child restraint or as being a small individual such as a young teenager or a small adult the 5 in dicator lamp will illuminate for approximate ly 6 seconds when the engine is started and then depending on occupant weight sensor readings from the seat remain illuminated or go out With the 5 indicator lamp illuminated the passenger front air bag is deactivated With the 5 indicator lamp out the passenger front air bag is acti vated When the OCS senses that the passenger seat occupant is classified as an adult or someone larger than a small individual the 5 indicator la
213. e while driving Activating the memory function while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle 127 Controls in detail Memory function Storing positions into memory Adjust the seats steering wheel and exterior rear view mirrors to the de sired position page 42 Press memory button M Release memory button and press a stored position button 1 2 or 3 within 3 seconds All the settings are stored at the select ed position Recalling positions from memory On memory switch press and hold stored position button 1 2 or 3 until the seat steering wheel and exterior rear view mirrors have fully moved to the stored positions i Releasing the button immediately stops movement to the stored positions 128 Controls in detail Lighting For information on how to switch on the headlamps and use the turn signals see Switching on headlamps page 55 and Turn signals page 56 Exterior lamp switch The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel M Off Daytime running lamp mode page 130 U Automatic headlamp mode Daytime running lamp mode page 130 C Parking lamps also tail lamps li cense plate lamps side marker lamps instrument panel lamps Canada only When the engine is running the low beam headlamps are also switched on B Low beam headlamps or high beam headlamps when the combi nation switch is pushed for
214. ear window defroster can then be switched on If the rear window defroster switches off too soon and the indicator lamp starts flashing too many electrical consumers are operating simul taneously and there is insufficient voltage in the battery The system responds automatically by switching the rear window defroster off As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage the rear window defroster automatically switches back on automatically 184 Controls in detail Automatic climate control 185 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Automatic climate control panel Item 1 Defroster air vents fixed 2 Left center air vent adjustable 3 Cockpit air vent fixed 4 Right center air vent adjustable 5 Right side air vent adjustable 6 Air volume control for right side air vent 7 Air volume control for center air vents 8 Air volume control for left side air vent 9 Automatic climate control panel a Left side air vent adjustable i For draft free ventilation move the sliders for center air vent and side air vents to the mid dle position Item 1 Air distribution left 2 Front defroster 3 Air recirculation 4 Rear window defroster 5 Air distribution right 6 Temperature control right 7 Automatic climate control on off entire system 8 Residual heat ventilation 9 Air volume control a AC cooling on off b Temperature control left 186 Controls in detail Automati
215. ed 37 Unlocking 38 Unlocking with the SmartKey 38 Unlocking with KEYLESS GO 39 Starter switch positions 39 Adjusting 42 Seats 42 Steering wheel 45 Mirrors 47 Driving 49 Fastening the seat belts 49 Starting the engine 52 Parking brake 54 Driving off 54 Switching on headlamps 55 Turn signals 56 Windshield wipers 57 Problems while driving 59 Parking and locking 60 Parking brake 61 Switching off headlamps 61 Turning off the engine 62 Releasing seat belts 62 Locking 63 Contents Safety and Security 65 Occupant safety 66 Air bags 68 Occupant Classification System 72 Seat belts 77 Roll bar
216. ed Calling up settings Calling up maintenance service indicator Vehicle supply voltage Selecting satellite radio station USA only Checking tire inflation pressure RACETIMER Operating CD player Checking engine oil lev el Overall analysis Lap analysis 1 AMG vehicles only 144 Controls in detail Control system Menu 6 Menu 7 Menu 8 Menu 9 Vehicle status message memory1 Settings Trip computer Telephone page 152 page 153 page 163 page 165 Commands submenus Calling up vehicle mal function warning and system status messag es stored in memory Resetting to factory set tings Fuel consumption sta tistics after start Loading phone book Instrument cluster submenu Fuel consumption sta tistics since the last re set Searching for name in phone book Time submenu Distance to empty Lighting submenu Vehicle submenu Convenience submenu 1 You will only see the message memory menu if there is a message i The headings used in the menus table are designed to facilitate navigation within the sys tem and are not necessarily identical to those shown in the control system displays The first function displayed in each menu will au tomatically show you which part of the system you are in 145 Controls in detail Control system Standard display menu 1 Main odometer 2 Outside temperature 3 Current gear selector lever position 4 Trip odometer
217. ed the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of in compatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 345 Practical hints What to do if Air bag off indicator lamp Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution 5 The front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated with the weight of a typical adult or some one larger than a small individual on the passenger seat The system is malfunctioning Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Also read and observe any messages in the multifunction display and follow cor rective steps page 356 Warning G If the 5 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated with the weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual on the passenger seat do not have any passenger use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired 346 Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution 5 The front passenger front air bag of
218. ed by the Mercedes Benz Limit ed Warranty 377 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution A Fuel cap open A loss of pressure has been detect ed in the fuel system The fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky Check the fuel cap page 271 If it is not closed properly Close the fuel cap If it is closed properly Have the fuel system checked by an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center K being lowered The retractable hardtop is not com pletely opened or closed The roof hydraulics will start to lose pres sure Make sure the retractable hardtop is com pletely opened or closed page 199 locked in driving mode You have attempted to open the re tractable hardtop while driving Stop the vehicle in a safe location and try to open the hardtop again O You are driving with the hood open Risk of accident Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so Close the hood page 275 378 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution I Remove key You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Replace key The SmartKey is no longer function al Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center F Change key batteries The batteries
219. ed is limited to 55 mph 90 km h Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so Apply the parking brake page 61 Do not drive any further Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking the wheels with wheel chocks or oth er sizable objects Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call for Roadside Assistance page 247 Warning G Driving while this message is displayed can result in an accident Have your brake sys tem checked immediately If the electro hydraulic brake system enters its emergency operation mode the driver must apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much fur ther than normal to obtain braking effect If necessary apply full pressure to the brake pedal Brakes are only applied to the front wheels Stopping distance is increased If there is a malfunction in the electro hydraulic brake system we recom mend that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or ap propriate wheel lift dolly equipment A tow bar must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the recommended towing methods and the vehicle requires towing with all four wheels on the ground Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is only permissible for distances up to 30 miles 50 km and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph 50 km h For more infor mation see Towing the vehicle page 421 368 Pract
220. ed vehicle Unsu pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury i If you hear a warning signal you have forgot ten to turn off the headlamps In addition the message Turn off lights ap pears in the multifunction display Switch off the headlamps i Vehicles with KEYLESS GO A warning sig nal and the message Don t forget your key remind you not to leave the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO in the vehicle i Opening a door causes the windows on that side of the car to open slightly They will return to the closed position when the door is closed 64 Getting started Parking and locking Locking with KEYLESS GO 1 Lock button Press lock button 1 on a door handle or the lock button on the trunk lid page 110 With the trunk and all doors closed the turn signal lamps flash three times The locking knobs on the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed For more information see Locking and unlocking page 102 65 Safety and Security Occupant safety Panic alarm Driving safety systems Anti theft systems 66 Safety and Security Occupant safety In this section you will learn the most im portant facts about the restraint systems of the vehicle The restraint systems are Seat belts page 77 Child restraints page 83 Additional protection potential provided by Supplemental Restraint System SRS with Air bags page 6
221. eed rating 6 page 302 are also referred to as service description Warning G Even when permitted by law never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and or personal injury and possible death for you and for others i Tire load rating 5 page 302 and tire speed rating 6 page 302 are also referred to as service description 305 Operation Tires and wheels Summer tires At the tire manufacturer s option any tire with a speed capability above 149 mph 240 km h can include a ZR in the size designation for exam ple 245 40 ZR18 To determine the maximum speed capability of the tire the service description for the tire must be referred to The service description is comprised of the tire load rating 5 page 302 and the tire speed rating 6 page 302 If your tire includes ZR in the size designation and no service description 5 and 6 page 302 is given the tire manufacturer must be consulted for the maximum speed ca pability If a service description 5 and 6 page 302 is given the speed capa bility is limited by the speed symbol in the service description Example 245 40 ZR18 97Y In this example 97Y is the service description The letter Y designates the spee
222. eering wheel gearshift control Warning G When working on the vehicle set the parking brake and move gear selector lever to position P Otherwise the vehicle could roll away 173 Controls in detail Automatic transmission The selected gear range appears in the right multifunction display page 169 If you press on the accelerator when the engine has reached its rpm limit the trans mission will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected Automatic shift program The program mode selector switch is located on the lower part of the center console 1 Program mode selector switch C Comfort For comfort driving S Sport For standard driving The current gear selector lever position and the selected program mode C S are indicated in the right multifunction display page 169 Effect The transmission shifts through sixth gear only applies to vehicles with 7 speed automatic transmission only The transmission shifts through fifth gear only applies to vehicles with 7 speed automatic transmission only The transmission shifts through fourth gear only Effect The transmission shifts through third gear only With this selection you can use the braking effect of the engine The transmission shifts through second gear only Allows the use of engine s braking power when driving on steep downgrades in mountainous regions under extreme operating conditions
223. eft display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution Front passenger airbag disabled See Oper Manual With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on the 5 indicator lamp between the center air vents should illuminate and remain illuminated indicating that the OCS page 72 has deactivated the air bag the message Front passenger airbag enabled See Oper Manual or the message Front passenger airbag disabled See Oper Manual should not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied Wait at last 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display If above conditions are met you can occupy the passenger seat again Depending on the passenger classification sensed by the OCS page 72 the 5 indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out If above conditions are not met the system is not working properly Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Warning G If the 5 indicator lamp remains illuminated with an adult occupant on the passenger seat even after performing the above corrective steps do not have any passenger use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired 360 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution P Gear selector lever to P You have tr
224. ehicle to a halt avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers If necessary change the wheel page 405 Warning G Do not drive with a flat tire A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You may lose control of the vehicle Contin ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces sive heat build up and possibly a fire 386 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution H Tire pressure Check tires The tire pressure in one or more tires is already below the mini mum value Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers Check and adjust tire pressure as required If necessary change the wheel Check tires Vehicles with Advanced TPMS The tire pressure in one or more tires is already below the mini mum value The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers Check and adjust tire pressure as required If necessary change the wheel Warning G Do not drive with a flat tire A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You may lose control of the vehicle Contin ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces sive heat build up and possibly a fire 387 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence
225. elected program mode C or S is switched on when the engine is restarted Allow engine to warm up under low load use Do not place full load on the engine until the op erating temperature has been reached Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P only when the vehicle is stopped Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Warning G On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control i To avoid overrevving the engine when the gear selector lever is moved to the D direction the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine s max speed would be exceeded 175 Controls in detail Automatic transmission Upshifting Briefly press the gear selector lever to the right in the D direction The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program This action simul taneously extends the gear range of the transmission Canceling gear range limit Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D direction until D reappears in the right multifunction display The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to
226. em is activated Glove box 1 Thumbwheel 2 Air vent Opening the air vent Make sure the air vent in the glove box is unobstructed Turn thumbwheel 1 upwards Closing the air vent Turn thumbwheel 1 downwards i You should keep air vent 2 closed when outside temperatures are low 196 Controls in detail Power windows Opening and closing the windows The windows are opened and closed elec trically The switches for all the windows are on the driver s door The switch for the passenger side windows is on the passen ger door 1 Left door and rear side windows 2 Right door and rear side windows Switch on the ignition page 39 Warning G When closing the windows make sure that there is no danger of anyone being injured by the closing procedure The closing of the door windows can be im mediately halted by releasing the switch or if the switch was pulled past the resistance point and released by either pressing or pulling the respective switch The closing of the rear side windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch If a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you pulled the switch past the resistance point and released it to close the door win dow the automatic reversal function will stop the door window and open it slightly If the door window encounters an obstruc tion that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing
227. em is not oper ating properly and may not activate in an accident In this case raise the roll bar man ually page 81 before continuing to drive 341 Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution lt The red seat belt telltale comes on and a warning chime sounds for approximately 6 seconds after starting the engine with all doors closed The seat belt telltale reminds you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts before driving off Fasten your seat belts The seat belt telltale goes out lt The red seat belt telltale remains illuminated after driving off The vehicle s speed does not exceed 15 mph 25 km h You and or your front passenger have forgotten to fasten your seat belts Fasten your seat belts There are items placed on the front passen ger seat and therefore the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them in a safe place lt The red seat belt telltale flashes and you additionally hear an in termittent warning chime with in creasing intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds from the time the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 25 km h You and or your front passenger have forgotten to fasten your seat belts Fasten your seat belts There are items placed on the front passen ger seat and therefore the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied
228. ems which effect emissions Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions values and may switch the engine to its limp home emergency operation mode Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center An on board diagnostic connector is used by the service station to link the vehicle to the shop diagnostics sys tem It allows the accurate identifica tion of system malfunctions through the readout of diagnostic trouble codes It is located in the front left area of the footwell next to the park ing brake pedal The fuel cap is not closed tightly Check the fuel cap page 271 If it is not closed properly Close the fuel cap If it is closed properly Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center 337 Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution USA only Canada only The yellow engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving Your fuel tank is empty After refueling start turn off and re start the engine three or four times in succession The limp home mode is canceled You do not need to have your vehicle checked D The red coolant warning lamp comes on when the engine is running There is insufficient coolant in the reservoir If this warning lamp comes on frequently there is a leak in the cooling system If the coolant level is correct the electric ra dia
229. en the center air vents 1 Hazard warning flasher switch 134 Controls in detail Lighting Switching on the hazard warning flasher Press hazard warning flasher switch 1 All turn signals are flashing Switching off the hazard warning flasher Press hazard warning flasher switch 1 again Interior lighting The interior lighting controls are located in the overhead control panel 1 Left reading lamp on off 2 Right reading lamp on off 3 Interior lighting on off 4 Slide switch for interior lighting control Deactivating automatic control Slide switch 4 to the right The interior lighting and the entry exit lamps remain switched off in darkness even when you unlock the vehicle remove the SmartKey from the starter switch open a door open the trunk i With the hazard warning flasher activated and the combination switch set for either left or right turn only the respective turn signals will operate when the ignition is switched on i If the hazard warning flasher was switched on automatically because of an air bag that has deployed press hazard warning flasher switch 1 once to switch it off An interior lamp switched on manually does not go out automatically Leaving the interior lighting switch in the ON po sition for extended periods of time with the en gine turned off could result in discharged batteries i The interior lighting is factory set to auto matic mode 135 Controls in det
230. ensibly save fuel 259 Drinking and driving 259 Pedals 259 Power assistance 260 Brakes 260 Driving off 262 Parking 263 Tires 263 Hydroplaning 264 Tire traction 265 Tire speed rating 265 Winter driving instructions 266 Standing water 267 Passenger compartment 268 Driving abroad 268 Control and operation of radio transmitters 268 Catalytic converter 269 Emission control 269 Coolant temperature 270 At the gas station 271 Refueling 271 Check regularly and before a long trip 272 Engine compartment 274 Hood 274 Engine oil 275 Transmission fluid level 279 Oil level in the ABC system 279 Coolant 280 Battery
231. ent and or injury to you or to others 362 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution Check tires Then restart Run Flat Indicator There was a warning message about a loss in the tire inflation pressure and the Run Flat Indica tor has not been reactivated yet Make sure that the correct tire inflation pressure is set for each tire Then reactivate the Run Flat Indicator Run Flat Indicator inoperative The Run Flat Indicator is malfunctioning Have the Run Flat Indicator checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center The Run Flat Indicator has been switched off due to an error Tire pressure Check tires The Run Flat Indicator indicates that the pressure is too low in one or more tires Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers Ob serve the traffic situation around you Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required page 292 If necessary change the wheel page 405 Reactivate the Run Flat Indicator after ad justing the tire inflation pressure values page 294 363 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution Tire pressure displayed after driving for a few minutes Vehicles with Advanced TPMS The tire inflation pressure is being checked Drive the vehicle for a few minutes Tire pressure mon
232. enter established then the Tele Aid system could not initiate a Roadside Assistance call e g the rele vant cellular phone network is not available The message Call failed appears in the multi function display Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated us ing the t button on the multifunction steer ing wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the COMAND headunit 248 Controls in detail Useful features Information button The Information button is located be low the center armrest cover 1 Information button Press and hold button 1 for longer than 2 seconds A call to the Customer Assistance Cen ter will be initiated The button will flash while the call is in progress The message Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted When the connection is established the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number model color and lo cation subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals A voice connection between the Customer Assistance Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle will be estab lished Information regarding the operation of your vehicle the nearest Mercedes Benz Center or Mercedes Benz USA products and services is available to you For more details concerning the Tele Aid system please visit www
233. epending on the design standards used the tire size molded into the sidewall may have no letter or a letter preceding the tire size designation No letter preceding the size designation as illustrated above Passenger car tire based on European design standards Letter P preceding the size designation Passenger car tire based on U S design standards Letter LT preceding the size designation Light Truck tire based on U S design standards Letter T preceding the size designation Temporary spare tires which are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tire width The tire width 1 page 302 indicates the nominal tire width in mm Aspect ratio The aspect ratio 2 page 302 is the dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width and is expressed in percentage The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing section height by section width Tire code The tire code 3 page 302 indicates the tire construction type The R stands for radial tire type Letter D means diag onal or bias ply construction letter B means belted bias ply construction At the tire manufacturer s option any tire with a speed capability above 149 mph 240 km h can include a ZR in the size designation for example 245 40 ZR 18 For additional information see Tire speed rating page 304 Rim diameter The rim diameter 4 page 302 is
234. er use fluids or solvents that are not de signed for cleaning your vehicle Always lock away cleaning products and keep them out of reach of children 323 Operation Vehicle care We have selected car care products and compiled recommendations which are specially matched to our vehicles and which always reflect the latest technology You can obtain Mercedes Benz approved car care products at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Scratches corrosive deposits corrosion or damage due to negligent or incorrect care cannot always be removed or repaired with the car care products recommended here In such cases it is best to seek aid at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of your vehicle and give important how to information as well as references to Mercedes Benz approved car care products Power washer Tar stains Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and become more difficult to remove A tar remover is recommended Paintwork painted body components Mercedes Benz approved Paint Care should be applied when water drops on the paint surface do not bead up This should normally be done every 3 to 5 months depending on climate and washing deter gent used Mercedes Benz approved Paint Cleaner should be applied if the paint surface shows signs of embedded dirt i e loss of gloss Do not apply any of these products or wax if your vehicle is parked
235. ess glove box lid release 1 Glove box lid 2 opens downward Closing glove box Push glove box lid 2 up to close Door storage compartments 1 Release button 2 Storage compartment lid Warning G To help avoid personal injury during a colli sion or sudden maneuver exercise care when storing objects in the vehicle Put lug gage or cargo in the trunk if possible Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs Do not place anything on shelf be hind roll bar Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy ob jects Keep compartment lids closed This will help to prevent stored objects from being thrown about and injuring vehicle occupants during an accident Warning G Keep the door storage compartments closed while vehicle is in motion Failure to do so may cause the seat belt to catch at the rear and prevent proper positioning of the seat belt 234 Controls in detail Useful features Opening Press release button 1 Storage compartment lid 2 lid opens upwards Armrest storage compartments The release buttons are located under the cushion of the armrest 1 Storage tray release 2 Storage compartment release Opening storage tray Press button 1 and lift the armrest Opening storage compartment Press button 2 and lift the armrest Seat storage compartments Storage compartments are located in the seat base of each seat and are intended for storing small light weight items Passe
236. essary corrosion protection and increase in the boil over protection Refer to Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval Coolant system design and coolant used stipulate the replacement interval The re placement interval published in the Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if MB 325 0 anticorrosion antifreeze solu tion or other Mercedes Benz approved products of equal specification see Factory Approved Service Products pam phlet are used to renew the coolant con centration or bring it back up to the proper level Add premixed coolant solution only Adding water and MB 325 0 Anticorrosion Antifreeze separately from each other could cause engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty 450 Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc To provide important corrosion protection the solution must be at least 45 anticor rosion antifreeze equivalent to freeze protection to approx 22 F 30 C If you use a solution that is more than 55 anticorrosion antifreeze freeze protec tion to approx 49 F 45 C the engine temperature will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution Therefore do not use more than this amount of anticorrosion antifreeze If the coolant level is low water and MB 325 0 Anticorrosion Antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper level have cooling system checked for signs of leakage Please make sure the mixture is in a
237. ety and the safety of others selecting features through the multifunction steering wheel should only be done by the driver when traffic and road conditions per mit it to be done safely Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second 140 Controls in detail Control system Multifunction steering wheel The displays in the multifunction display and the settings in the control system are controlled by the buttons on the multifunc tion steering wheel Depending on the selected menu pressing the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel will alter what appears in the multi function display The information available in the multifunc tion display is arranged in menus each containing a number of functions or sub menus 1 Left multifunction display in the speedometer 2 Right multifunction display in the tachometer Operating the control system 3 Selecting the submenu or setting the volume Press button down to decrease up to increase 4 Telephone Press button s to take a call t to end a call 5 Menu systems Press button for previous menu for next menu 6 Moving within a menu Press button j for next display k for previous display 141 Controls in detail Control system The individual functions are then found within the relevant menu radio or CD op erations
238. ever position 170 Outside temperature display 138 Program mode 169 7 Fuel gauge with A Fuel reserve warning lamp 339 30 At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Item Page 1 Left multifunction display in the speedometer 139 2 Right multifunction display in the tachometer 139 Operating the control sys tem 140 3 Selecting the submenu or setting the volume Press button down to decrease up to increase 4 Telephone Press button s to take a call t to end a call Item Page 5 Menu systems Press button for previous menu for next menu 6 Moving within a menu Press button j for next display k for previous display 31 At a glance Center console Center console Upper part Item Page 1 Central locking switch 119 2 Hazard warning flasher on off switch 133 3 Central unlocking switch 120 4 Center and side air vent adjustment 189 5 COMAND system see sepa rate operating instructions 6 Right cup holder 238 7 KEYLESS GO start stop button 40 8 Automatic climate control panel 184 9 Ashtray Cigarette lighter 239 239 a Left cup holder 238 32 At a glance Center console Lower part Item Page 1 Gear selector lever for automatic transmission 173 2 Parktronic system deactivation switch 228 3 Exterior rear view mirror adjustment 47 4 ABC suspension tuning button 225 5 Tow a
239. f indicator lamp does not illumi nate and or does not remain illu minated with the weight of a typical 12 month old child in a standard child restraint or less on the passenger seat The system is malfunctioning Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat and check installation of the child seat Make sure that no objects applying sup plemental weight onto the seat are present If the front passenger front air bag off in dicator lamp remains out have the sys tem checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not transport a child on the passenger seat until the system has been repaired Also read and observe any messages in the multifunction display and follow cor rective steps page 356 Warning G If the 5 indicator lamp does not il luminate or remains out with the weight of a typical 12 month old child in a standard child restraint or less on the front passenger seat do not transport a child on the passenger seat until the system has been repaired 347 Practical hints What to do if Vehicle status messages in the multi function display Warning and malfunction messages ap pear in the in the multifunction display lo cated in the instrument cluster Certain warning and malfunction messag es are accompanied by an audible signal Address these messages accordingly and follow the additional instructions given in this Operator s Manual Selec
240. first stop Center air vents 2 and 4 page 184 are open Opening the cockpit air vent and center air vents Turn thumbwheel 7 page 184 up ward all the way Cockpit air vent 3 and center air vents 2 and 4 page 184 are open Closing the cockpit air vent and center air vents Turn thumbwheel 7 page 184 downward Cockpit air vent 3 and center air vents 2 and 4 page 184 are closed Opening the side air vents Turn thumbwheel 6 and 8 page 184 upward The corresponding side air vent is open Closing the side air vents Turn thumbwheel 6 and 8 page 184 upward The corresponding side air vent is closed Symbol Function h Directs air through the cen ter and side air vents j Directs air to the windows V Directs air into the entire vehicle interior k Directs air to the footwells i You can also turn the air distribution control to a position between two symbols i The air vents are continuously variable 190 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Adjusting air volume Use air volume control 9 page 185 for both automatic page 187 and manual air volume adjustment Nine blower speeds are available Press control button 9 page 185 The control button sticks up slightly The U symbol on the control button goes out Automatic air volume control is switched off The air volume is ad justed corresponding to the set blower speed Maximum cooling MAXCOOL
241. for the TPMS illuminates continu ously Canada only Low tire pressure telltale for the Advanced TPMS illuminates continuously The TPMS USA only or Advanced TPMS Canada only detects a loss of pressure in at least one tire Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers Observe the traffic situation around you Read and observe messages in the mul tifunction display If the tire inflation pressure in the respec tive tire s has have been corrected the combination low tire pressure TPMS mal function telltale goes out after few minutes driving H USA only Combination low tire pressure TPMS malfunction telltale for the TPMS flashes for 60 seconds and then stays illu minated There is a malfunction in the TPMS Read and observe messages in the mul tifunction display Have the TPMS checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center After the malfunction has been remedied the combination low tire pressure TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after few minutes driving 344 Practical hints What to do if Warning G Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressur
242. fore changing lanes If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly pushed forward hit from the rear or forcibly pushed rearward hit from the front reposition it by applying firm pressure until it snaps into place The mirror housing is then properly posi tioned and you can adjust the mirror in the usual manner i At low ambient temperatures the exterior rear view mirrors will be heated automatically i The memory function page 126 lets you store the setting for the exterior rear view mir rors together with the settings for the steering wheel and the seat position 49 Getting started Driving Driving Fastening the seat belts Warning G Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob structing the pedal s range of movement Keep the driver s footwell clear of all obsta cles If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell make sure the pedals still have sufficient clearance During sudden driving or braking maneu vers the objects could get caught between the pedals You could then no longer brake or accelerate This could lead to accidents or injury Warning G Always fasten your seat belt before driving off Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained even pregnant women Failure to wear and properly fasten and po sition your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident You and your passenger should al ways wear seat belts
243. ful starting attempts have it checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated failed starting attempts may damage the catalytic converter and may present a fire risk Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any other metal part while the other end is still attached to a battery 420 Practical hints Jump starting The starter battery is located on the right side of the engine compartment Make sure the two vehicles do not touch Turn off all electrical consumers Apply the parking brake page 61 Make sure the gear selector lever is set to position P page 168 Open the hood page 274 Remove the red cover from positive ter minal on both vehicles page 414 1 Positive terminal of charged battery 2 Positive terminal of discharged battery 3 Negative terminal of discharged battery 4 Negative terminal of charged battery Connect positive terminals 1 and 2 of the batteries with the red jumper ca ble Clamp cable to charged battery 1 first Start the engine of the vehicle with the charged battery and run at idle speed Connect negative terminals 3 and 4 of the batteries with the black jumper cable Clamp cable to charged battery 3 first Start the engine of the disabled vehi cle You can now turn on the electrical con sumers Do not turn on the lights under any circumstan
244. g check then the SmartKey batter ies are discharged Replace the batteries page 395 You can obtain the required batteries at any authorized Mercedes Benz Center i If the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle pressing the or button will lock or unlock the vehicle according ly 106 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking If the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is valid your vehicle unlocks the doors the trunk lid the glove box the storage compartment under the armrest the storage compartment in the rear the fuel filler flap SmartKey with KEYLESS GO 1 Lock button 2 Opening button for trunk page 111 3 Mechanical key locking tab 4 Unlock button 5 Battery check lamp 6 Panic button page 86 For information on using the SmartKey buttons see SmartKey page 102 Warning G When leaving the vehicle always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehi cle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury To prevent possible malfunction avoid ex posing the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO to high levels of electromagnetic radiation i USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the fol lowing two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interfer ence a
245. g device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose Indicated temperatures just above the freez ing point do not guarantee that the road sur face is free of ice The road may still be icy especially in wooded areas or on bridges 139 Controls in detail Control system Control system The control system is activated as soon as the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 1 or as soon as the KEYLESS GO start stop button is in position 1 The control system enables you to call up information about your vehicle change vehicle settings For example you can use the control sys tem to find out when your vehicle is next due for service to set the language for messages in the instrument cluster dis play and much more The control system relays information to the multifunction display Multifunction display The multifunction display consists of the display fields in the speedometer and the tachometer In its default state the left multifunction display shows the main odometer and the outside temperature while the trip odometer appears in the right multifunction display This default setting is referred to as the standard display 1 Main odometer 2 Outside temperature 3 Current gear selector lever position 4 Trip odometer 5 Automatic transmission program mode Warning G A driver s attention to the road and traffic conditions must always be his her primary focus when driving For your saf
246. g pinging Misfire Power loss 449 Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc In areas where carbon deposits may be en countered due to lack of availability of gas olines which contain these additives Mercedes Benz recommends the use of additives approved by us for use on Mercedes Benz vehicles Refer to Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet for a listing of approved product s Follow di rections on product label Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel This only results in unnecessary cost and may be harmful to the engine operation Damage or malfunction resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending addition al fuel additives other than those tested and approved by us for use on Mercedes Benz vehicles listed in the Factory Approved Service Products pam phlet are not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Coolants The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion antifreeze which pro vides corrosion protection freeze protection boiling protection by increasing the boiling point The cooling system was filled at the factory with a coolant providing freeze protection to approximately 22 F 30 C and corro sion protection If the antifreeze mixture is effective to 22 F 30 C the boiling point of the cool ant in the pressurized cooling system is reached at approximately 266 F 130 C The coolant solution must be used year round to provide the nec
247. ge 218 when the message DISTRONIC available again appears 354 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution DISTRONIC Currently unavailable See Oper Manual Distronic is deactivated because the Distronic cover in the radiator grille is dirty the functionality is impaired by heavy precipitation or fog Clean the Distronic cover in the radiator grille page 325 Restart the vehicle Distronic becomes operational again with out the engine being restarted when dirt on the radiator grille has fallen off while driving e g slush or snow the system recognizes full sensor avail ability due to lessening rain or because the road is drying for example the message in the multifunction display disappears You can then operate Distronic as usual again available again Distronic had been deactivated and is available again Activate Distronic page 218 355 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution ESP ESP inoperative See Oper Manual The ESP has detected a malfunction and switched off The ABS may not be operational The electro hydraulic brake system is still functioning normally but without the ESP available Continue driving with added caution Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failur
248. ge cannot always be recognized on re treads The operating safety of the vehicle cannot be assured when such tires are used 284 Operation Tires and wheels Tire care and maintenance Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month For more informa tion on checking tire inflation pressure see Recommended tire inflation pres sure page 291 Tire inspection Every time you check your tire inflation pressure you should also inspect your tires for the following excessive treadwear page 285 cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber bumps bulges cuts cracks or splits in the tread or side of the tire Replace the tire if you find any of the above conditions Make sure you also inspect the spare tire periodically for condition and inflation Spare tires will age and become worn over time even if never used and thus should be inspected and replaced when necessary Life of tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to Driving style Tire inflation pressure Distance driven Warning G Regularly check the tires for damage Dam aged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss As a result you could lose control of your vehicle Worn old tires can cause accidents If the tire tread is badly worn or if the tires have sustained damage replace them Warning G Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
249. gear range D Shifting into optimal gear range Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D direction The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration This may involve shifting down one or more gears Steering wheel gearshift control one touch gearshifting Steering wheel gearshift control is avail able on vehicles with Sport Package on SL 55 AMG and on SL 65 AMG only The steering wheel gearshift control pro vides an alternative method for changing the gears manually and limiting or extend ing the gear range for automatic shifting with the gear selector lever in position D and driving in the automatic program mode C or S The gearshift paddles are located to the left and right of the steering wheel 1 Left shift paddle downshift 2 Right shift paddle upshift i For information on using the steering wheel gearshift control in program mode MANUAL SL 55 AMG and SL 65 AMG only see Manual shift program page 177 i To avoid overrevving the engine when down shifting with the steering wheel gearshift paddle the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine s max speed would be exceeded Allow engine to warm up under low load use Do not place full load on the engine until the op erating temperature has been reached Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P only when the vehicle is stopped Avoid spinning of a dr
250. ghting 160 Setting night security illumina tion 160 Setting interior lighting delayed switch off 161 i This function is not available in countries where the daytime running lamp mode is manda tory and therefore in a constant mode i For safety reasons resetting to factory set tings page 153 while driving will not deacti vate the daytime running lamp mode The following message appears in the multifunc tion display Cannot be fully reset to factory settings when driving 160 Controls in detail Control system Setting locator lighting With the locator lighting feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in position U the following lamps will switch on during darkness when the vehicle is un locked with the SmartKey Parking lamps Tail lamps License plate lamps Front fog lamps Side marker lamps The locator lighting switches off when the driver s door is opened If you do not open a door after unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey the lamps will switch off automatically after approxi mately 40 seconds Move the selection marker with button or to the Lighting sub menu Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Locator lighting appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Press button or to switch the locator lighting feature to On Turn the exterior lamp switch to posi tion U when exiting the vehicle The
251. h plate back to seat belt housing 1 Warning G Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re strained with a separate seat belt Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time Warning G Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous You could slide under the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the ab domen or neck That could cause serious or even fatal injuries The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body Warning G Read and observe the additional warning no tices in the Safety and Security section page 77 51 Getting started Driving Proper use of seat belts Do not twist the belt when fastening Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder it should not touch the neck Never pass the shoulder portion of the belt under your arm Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips over hip joint and not across the abdomen Place the seat backrest in a nearly up right position Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time Do not fasten a seat belt around a per son and another object at th
252. h speeds page 292 or for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle con dition page 292 If such information is pro vided it can be found on the inside of the fuel filler flap 301 Operation Tires and wheels Potential problems associated with underinflated and overinflated tires Underinflated tire inflation pressure Underinflated tires can cause excessive and uneven tire wear adversely affect fuel economy lead to tire failure from being overheated adversely affect handling characteristics Overinflated tire inflation pressure Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling characteristics cause uneven tire wear be more prone to damage from road hazards adversely affect ride comfort increase stopping distance MOExtended system The MOExtended system allows you to continue driving your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires You may only use the MOExtended system in conjunction with the Run Flat Indicator Canada vehicles page 293 or TPMS U S vehicles page 295 For information on driving in case of pres sure loss in one or more tires emergency mode see the Operation section page 413 Warning G Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being overheated
253. hat will result in potentially dangerous emergency braking which will not always result in an impact being avoid ed Tailgating increases the risk of an accident Warning G Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maxi mum deceleration of 6 5 ft s2 2 m s2 This corresponds to about 20 of the maxi mum deceleration ability of your vehicle Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to restore the preset distance or to maintain the set speed 217 Controls in detail Driving systems Distronic menu in the control system Use the Distronic menu to display the current settings for your Distronic system The information shown in the multifunction display depends on whether the Distronic system is activated page 218 or deac tivated page 220 Press button or repeatedly until you see one of the following dis plays in the multifunction display Distronic deactivated When Distronic is deactivated you will see the standard display in the left multifunc tion display 1 Preceding vehicle if detected 2 Actual distance to preceding vehicle 3 Preset distance threshold to preceding vehicle 4 Your vehicle 5 Symbol for activated distance warning function Distronic activated When Distronic is activated the DTR sym bol and the set speed appear in the left multifunction display 1 Symbol for activated Distronic 2 Set speed i For information on the distance warning function see Distance warning funct
254. he SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO automatically locks un locks the fuel filler flap 1 Fuel filler flap 2 Fuel filler cap 3 Holder Turn off the engine by turning the SmartKey to position 0 Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch by pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop button Open the driv er s door with the driver s door open starter switch is in position 0 same as SmartKey removed from starter switch Open fuel filler flap 1 by pushing at the point indicated by the arrow The fuel filler flap springs open Turn fuel cap 2 counterclockwise and hold on to it until possible pressure is released Take off fuel cap 2 and place it into holder 3 located on the inside of the fuel filler flap Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit cuts out do not top up or over fill Warning G Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous It burns violently and can cause serious injury Whenever you are around gasoline avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact extinguish all smoking materials Never allow sparks flame or smoking materials near gasoline Turn off the engine before refueling Warning G Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres sure in the system which could cause a gas discharge This could cause the gas to spray back out when removing the fuel pump noz zle which could cause personal injury 272 Operation At the gas station Insert fuel cap 2 into fuel fil
255. he bulb into socket 1 turn socket 1 counterclockwise and re move it Insert the new bulb in socket 1 push and turn bulb socket 1 clockwise Reinsert bulb socket 1 in lamp and turn bulb socket 1 clockwise High beam high beam flasher bulbs Press ends of headlamp cover tab to gether and remove high beam head lamp cover 2 Pull the electrical connector off Turn locking mechanism 5 counter clockwise and take out the bulb Insert the new bulb so that the base lo cates in the recess on the holder Turn locking mechanism 5 clockwise Plug the connector onto the bulb Align high beam headlamp cover 2 and click it into place Warning G Do not remove the cover for the Xenon or Bi Xenon headlamp Because of high volt age in Xenon and Bi Xenon lamps it is dan gerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician 401 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Parking and standing lamp bulbs Press ends of cover tab together and remove high beam headlamp cover 2 Pull out bulb socket 6 with the bulb Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 6 Insert a new bulb in bulb socket 6 Reinstall bulb socket 6 Align high beam headlamp cover 2 and click it into place Additional turn signal lamp bulbs The additional turn signal lamps in the exterior rear view mirrors have LEDs If a malfunction occurs or LEDs fail to func tion th
256. he plastic retaining strap i The flat tire may be transported in the trunk when the retractable hardtop is raised If avail able use a protective sheet on the spare wheel Vehicles with TPMS or Advanced TPMS Do not activate the tire inflation pressure moni tor until a full size wheel tire with functioning sensor has been placed back into service on the vehicle Warning G Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel The wheels could come loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 96 lb ft 130 Nm Warning G When turning the wheel wrench to tighten the wheel bolts make sure you position hands on the wrench in such a way that you avoid injury to yourself such as scraping your hands against the wheel Make sure turning the wheel wrench will not scratch or damage the wheel rim i For information on storing the spare wheel back into the trunk see Storing the spare wheel after use page 390 413 Practical hints Flat tire MOExtended system The MOExtended system allows you to continue driving your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires You may only use the MOExtended system in conjunction with the Run Flat Indicator Canada vehicles page 293 or TPMS U S vehicles page 295 The maximum distance in emergency mode depends on the vehicle s load It is 30 miles 50 km if the vehicle is partially loaded and 18 miles 30 km if the vehic
257. he trunk is locked If necessary lock the trunk with the mechanical key page 117 Except for the driver s door the vehicle should now be locked 1 Locking 2 Mechanical key Insert mechanical key 2 page 391 into the driver s door lock until it stops Turn mechanical key 2 clockwise to position 1 The driver s door is locked i Unlocking the glove box with the mechanical key will trigger the anti theft alarm system To cancel the alarm do one of the following Press button or on the SmartKey Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button page 40 Grasp an outside door handle vehicles with KEYLESS GO only i This procedure does not arm the anti theft alarm system nor does it lock the fuel filler flap and the storage compartments The storage compartments can be locked separately page 235 394 Practical hints Locking unlocking in an emergency Lowering the load assist manually If the load assist feature does not fully low er the retractable hardtop into the trunk compartment and you are unable to close the trunk lid follow the instructions below 1 Hex socket wrench 2 Locking screw Remove the trunk floor from the trunk Lift up the lid located at the lower left side of the trunk Have a second person lift and hold the retracted hardtop Using hex socket 1 wrench provided in the vehicle tool kit carefully turn the locking s
258. heels towards the road curb 62 Getting started Parking and locking Turning off the engine Place the gear selector lever in position P Apply the parking brake page 61 Turning off with the SmartKey Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 page 40 Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch The immobilizer is activated Turning off with KEYLESS GO Place the gear selector lever in position P Press the KEYLESS GO start stop but ton page 40 to turn off the engine With the driver s door closed the start er switch is now in position 1 With the driver s door opened the starter switch is set to position 0 same as SmartKey removed from starter switch page 40 Releasing seat belts Press the seat belt release button page 50 Allow the retractor to completely re wind the seat belt by guiding the latch plate i Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P On slopes turn the front wheels towards the road curb i The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P i With the SmartKey removed and the driver s door open a warning sounds if the vehicle s exterior lamps are not switched off i If you hear a warning signal you have tried to turn off the engine while the gear selector lever was not in P In addition the message Gear selector lever to P appears in the multifunction dis
259. herwise water may enter the trunk interior Warning G The hardtop is not fully closed and locked or not fully opened and locked if the message K in operation appears in the multifunction display a warning sounds for 10 seconds and the message K Lock retractable roof appears in the mul tifunction display when starting to drive 203 Controls in detail Retractable hardtop Unlocked status noticed when stopped Switch on the ignition page 39 To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully closed position press retractable hardtop switch forward page 200 or To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully opened position pull up on the re tractable hardtop switch page 200 Unlocked status noticed while driving Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so Leave the ignition switched on To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully closed position press retractable hardtop switch forward page 200 or To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully opened position pull up on the re tractable hardtop switch page 200 Problems when operating the retractable hardtop Several conditions may cause the retract able hardtop to not open close or lock properly The luggage cover in the trunk is not closed Close the luggage cover in the trunk The trunk lid is open Close the trunk lid The battery voltage is too low Start engine and let run while open
260. hints section page 388 and page 405 Warning G Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires are of the same dimension If your vehicle is equipped with mixed size tires different tire dimensions front vs rear tire rotation is not possible Warning G Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel Wheels could become loose if not tightened with a torque of 96 lb ft 130 Nm Only use genuine Mercedes Benz wheel bolts specified for your vehicle s rims 316 Operation Winter driving Before the onset of winter have your vehi cle winterized at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center This service in cludes Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze concentration Addition of cleaning concentrate to the water of the windshield and headlamp cleaning system Add MB Concentrate S to a pre mixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze which is formulated for temperatures below freezing point page 451 Battery test Battery capacity drops with decreasing ambient temperature A well charged battery helps to ensure that the engine can be started and the electro hydraulic brake system will be fully operational even at low ambient temperatures Tire change Winter tires Always use winter tires at temperatures below 45 F 7 C and whenever wintry road conditions prevail Not all M S rated tires provide special winter performance Make sure the tires you use show M S and the mountain
261. housing 2 Latch plate 3 Buckle 4 Release button Enhanced seat belt reminder system When the engine is started the seat belt telltale lt illuminates for a maximum of 6 seconds and a warning chime sounds to remind you and your passenger to fasten your seat belts If after these 6 seconds the driver s or the passenger s seat belt with the passenger seat occupied are not fastened with all doors closed and the vehicle speed does not exceed 15 mph 25 km h the seat belt telltale lt remains illuminated for as long as either the driver s or passenger s seat belt is not fastened and the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph 25 km h the seat belt telltale lt starts flashing and a warning chime sounds with increasing intensity until both the driver s and passenger s seat belt are fastened or for a maximum of 60 seconds from the time the vehicle speed exceeded 15 mph 25 km h if either the driver s or passenger s seat belt remains unfastened If the driver s or passenger s seat belt remains unfastened after 60 seconds the seat belt telltale lt stops flash ing and the warning chime stops sounding The seat belt telltale lt then continues to be illuminated for as long as either the driver s or passen ger s seat belt are not fastened The seat belt telltale lt will only go out if both the driver s and the passenger s seat belt with the front passenger seat oc cupied are fastened or the
262. iate child restraint on the passenger seat 75 Safety and Security Occupant safety A child in a rear facing child restraint on the passenger seat will be seriously in jured or even killed if the passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances even with the air bag technology in stalled in your vehicle If you install a rear facing child restraint on the passenger seat make sure that the 5 indicator lamp is illumi nated indicating that the passenger front air bag is deactivated Should the 5 indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed please check installation Periodically check the 5 indicator lamp while driving to make sure the 5 indicator lamp is illuminated If the 5 indicator lamp goes out or remains out do not transport a child on the passenger seat until the system has been repaired A child in a rear fac ing child restraint on the passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the passenger front air bag inflates If you place a child in a forward facing child restraint on the passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible use the proper child restraint recom mended for the age size and weight of the child and secure child restraint with the vehicle s seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions For children larger than the typical 12 month old child the passenger front air bag may or m
263. ical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution USA only Canada only 3 Reduced brake effect Visit workshop The electro hydraulic brake system is in emergency operation mode Considerably greater brake pedal force is required and the stopping distance is increased Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so Apply the parking brake page 61 Do not drive any further Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking the wheels with wheel chocks or oth er sizable objects Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call for Roadside Assistance page 247 Warning G Driving while this message is displayed can result in an accident Have your brake sys tem checked immediately If the electro hydraulic brake system enters its emergency operation mode the driver must apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much fur ther than normal to obtain braking effect If necessary apply full pressure to the brake pedal Brakes are only applied to the front wheels Stopping distance is increased If there is a malfunction in the electro hydraulic brake system we recom mend that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or ap propriate wheel lift dolly equipment A tow bar must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the recommended towing methods an
264. icitly instructed to do so by information on the label itself Re moval of any of these labels may cause you and others to be unaware of certain risks which may result in an accident and or per sonal injury 17 Introduction Problems with your vehicle Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation we urge you to immediately contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required If the matter is not handled to your satisfaction please discuss the problem with the Mercedes Benz Center management or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses In the USA Customer Assistance Center Mercedes Benz USA LLC One Mercedes Drive Montvale NJ 07645 0350 In Canada Customer Relations Department Mercedes Benz Canada Inc 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto Ontario M4G 4C9 18 Introduction Reporting safety defects For the USA only The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49 Code of U S Federal Regulations Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966 Reporting safety defects If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Mercedes Ben
265. icles with Sport Package only Insert a flat blade screwdriver in the opening of cover 2 and pry it out Remove cover 2 taking care not to damage the locking tabs 1 Jack arm 2 Jack support tube hole 3 Crank Insert jack arm 1 fully into tube hole 2 up to the stop Warning G Insert the jack arm fully into the jack sup port tube hole up to the stop Otherwise the vehicle may fall from the jack and cause per sonal injury or damage to the vehicle 409 Practical hints Flat tire Keeping jack in this position turn crank 3 clockwise until the jack base meets the ground Make sure the jack is vertical plumb line Continue to turn the crank until the tire is a maximum of 1 2 in 3 cm from the ground Removing the wheel 1 Alignment bolt Unscrew upper most wheel bolt and re move Replace this wheel bolt with alignment bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit Remove the remaining bolts Remove the wheel Mounting the new wheel Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub Guide the spare wheel onto the align ment bolt and push it on Insert wheel bolts and tighten them slightly Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt This could result in damage to the bolt and wheel hub threads Warning G Inflate spare wheel tire only after the wheel is properly mounted Inflate the spare wheel tire using the electric pump page 410 before lowering the ve hicle 410 Practical hints F
266. ied to start the engine with the KEYLESS GO start stop button with the gear selector lever not in posi tion P Place the gear selector lever in position P You have tried to turn off the engine with the KEYLESS GO start stop but ton with the gear selector lever not in position P Retractable roof open close completely The retractable hardtop is not locked properly Push or pull on the retractable hardtop switch until the indicator lamp in the switch goes out and the retractable hard top is completely open or closed page 199 361 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution SRS Restraint system malfunction Visit workshop There is a malfunction in the supple mental restraint systems The air bags or emergency tensioning devices ETDs could deploy unexpectedly or fail to activate in an accident Drive with added caution and have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately Warning G In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi cated as outlined above the SRS may not be operational For your safety we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately to have the system checked otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an acci dent which could result in serious or fatal injury or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could result in an acci d
267. il Be careful not to spill any oil when adding Avoid environmental damage caused by oil entering the ground or water Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck For more information on engine oil see the Technical data section page 444 and page 446 Transmission fluid level The transmission fluid level does not need to be checked If you notice transmission fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions have an authorized Mercedes Benz Center check the automatic transmission Oil level in the ABC system The oil level in the ABC system does not need to be checked If there is visible oil loss or if malfunction messages appear in the display have an authorized Mercedes Benz Center check the ABC system Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off It could cause damage to the engine and catalyt ic converter not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty 280 Operation Engine compartment Coolant The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion antifreeze To check the coolant level the vehicle must be parked on level ground and the engine must be cool The coolant expansion tank is located on the passenger side of the engine compart ment 1 Coolant expansion tank Using a rag slowly turn the cap approx imately one half turn counterclockwise to release any excess pressure Continue turning the cap counterclock wise and remove it The coolant level is correct if the level for
268. ile driving please use the hands free device and only use the tele phone when weather road and traffic con ditions permit Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a ve hicle Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximate ly 14 m every second Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built in or attached antenna i e with out being connected to an external antenna from inside the vehicle while the engine is running Doing so could lead to a malfunc tion of the vehicle s electronic system pos sibly resulting in an accident and or personal injury 166 Controls in detail Control system Which messages will appear in the right multifunction display depends on whether your telephone is switched on or off If the telephone is off the message in the multifunction display is TEL off If the telephone is on The telephone will then search for a network During this time the right mul tifunction display is empty As soon as the telephone has found a network READY is indicated in the right multifunction display This standby message indicates that your telephone is ready for use and you can operate it using the control sys tem Answering a call When your telephone is ready to receive calls you can answer a call at any time In the right multifunction display you wil
269. in flated There is no malfunction in the TPMS If the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and then stays illuminated the TPMS system it self is not operating properly 296 Operation Tires and wheels The TPMS only functions on wheels that are equipped with the proper electronic sensors It monitors the tire inflation pres sure as selected by the driver in all four tires A warning is issued to alert you to a decrease in pressure in one or more of the tires Warning G The TPMS does not indicate a warning for wrongly selected inflation pressures Always adjust tire inflation pressure according to the placard on the driver s door B pillar or if available the supplemental tire pressure in formation on the inside of the fuel filler flap The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure e g tire blowout caused by a foreign object In this case bring the vehicle to a halt by care fully applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers Warning G Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire infla tion pressure for those tires A
270. in the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO are discharged Replace the batteries page 395 379 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution F Key not detected The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is not recognized while the engine is running because The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is not in the vehi cle There is strong radio frequency interference Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so Search for the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally locked nor can the engine be started again af ter the engine is stopped Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO in the starter switch Key not detected The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is not recognized when attempting to start the engine with the KEYLESS GO start stop button on the gear selector lever because The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is not in the vehi cle The battery in the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is not insert ed properly or completely dis charged Change the position of the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO in the vehicle Make sure the batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO are properly inserted page 395 and are not discharged page 110 Start the engine with the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO in the starter switch if necessary 380 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible c
271. in the sun or if the hood is still hot Use the appropriate MB Touch Up Stick for quick and provisional repairs of minor paint damage i e chips from stones vehicle doors etc Follow the instructions provided by the pow er washer manufacturer on maintaining a dis tance between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire Always replace a damaged tire Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface Do not aim directly at electrical parts electrical connectors seals or other rubber parts i Vehicles with KEYLESS GO If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water and a SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is in close proximity i e within approximately 3 ft 1 m the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or un locked Affixing stickers magnets adhesive tape or similar materials to painted body components may damage the paintwork 324 Operation Vehicle care Engine cleaning Prior to cleaning the engine compartment make sure to protect electrical compo nents and connectors from contact with water and cleaning agents Corrosion protection such as MB Anticor rosion Wax should be applied to the en gine compartment after every engine cleaning Before applying all control link age bushings and joints should be lubricat ed The poly V belt and all pulleys should be protected from any wa
272. ing Press time February 07 2006 GSP TIP Printed in Germany Warning G To help avoid personal injury be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs Improper or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment which may in turn result in personal injury If you have any questions about carrying out any type of service turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes Benz Center
273. ing from the valves or from around the rim 293 Operation Tires and wheels Checking tire inflation pressure manually Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire inflation pressure Remove the cap from the valve on one tire Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve Read tire inflation pressure on tire gauge and check against the recom mended tire inflation pressure on the placard on the driver s door B pillar page 286 If necessary add air to achieve the recommended tire inflation pressure Install the valve cap Repeat this procedure for each tire Run Flat Indicator Canada only While the vehicle is being driven the Run Flat Indicator monitors the set tire inflation pressures by evaluating each wheel s rota tional speed This allows the system to de tect a significant loss of pressure in a tire If a wheel s rotational speed changes due to falling tire inflation pressure you will see a corresponding warning message in the multifunction display The Run Flat Indicator may function in a re stricted manner or with a delay if snow chains are mounted to the vehicle in presence of ice and snow if you are driving on a loose surface e g sand or gravel if you are driving in a very sporty man ner involving rapid acceleration or high speeds in curves Warning G Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and o
274. ings menu appears in the multifunction display i The vehicle status message memory will be cleared when you then turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 or when you press the KEYLESS GO start stop button once or twice without depressing the brake pedal You will then only see high priority messages in the multifunction display page 347 Function Page Resetting all settings 153 Submenus in the Settings menu 154 Instrument cluster submenu 156 Time submenu 157 Lighting submenu 159 Vehicle submenu 162 Convenience submenu 162 154 Controls in detail Control system Press the reset button in the instru ment cluster for approximately 3 seconds In the right multifunction display you will see the request to press the reset button again to confirm Press the reset button again The functions of all the submenus will reset to factory settings Submenus in the Settings menu Press button or repeatedly until the Settings menu appears in the multifunction display Press button j In the right multifunction display you see the collection of submenus There are more submenus than can be simul taneously displayed Press button The selection marker moves to the next submenu Scroll down with the button scroll up with the button With the selection marker on the de sired submenu use the j button to access the individual functions within that sub
275. intervals Always have the Maintenance Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to your au thorized Mercedes Benz Center for ser vice The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you Roadside Assistance The Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance Program provides factory trained technical help in the event of a breakdown Calls to the toll free Roadside Assistance number 1 800 FOR MERCedes in the USA 1 800 387 0100 in Canada will be answered by Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day 365 days a year For additional information refer to the Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure in your vehicle literature portfolio Change of address or ownership If you change your address be sure to send in the Change of Address Notice found in the Service and Warranty Informa tion Booklet or simply call the Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center in the USA at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Ser vice in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 It is in your own interest that we can contact you should the need arise If you sell your Mercedes please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it avail able to the next operator If you bought this vehicle used be sure to send in the Notice of Purchase of Used Car found in the Service and Warranty In formation Booklet or call the Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Cen ter in the USA at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or C
276. ion page 224 218 Controls in detail Driving systems Cruise control lever The Distronic system is operated by means of the cruise control lever The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever found on the left hand side of the steering column 1 Setting current or higher speed 2 Setting current or lower speed 3 Deactivate Distronic 4 Activating Distronic or resuming at last set speed Activating Distronic You can activate Distronic when the vehi cle speed is between 20 mph 30 km h and 110 mph 180 km h When Distronic is activated the left multi function display will show a message such as DTR 55 mph If Distronic is not activated after the cruise control lever is pulled the left multifunc tion display will show the message DTR mph In the following cases you cannot activate Distronic up to 2 minutes after starting the en gine when you brake when you have set the parking brake when the gear selector lever is set to position P R or N when the ESP is switched off 1 White Distronic indicator lamp E 2 Set speed i The vehicle speed displayed in the speedom eter can briefly vary from the speed setting for the Distronic 219 Controls in detail Driving systems Setting the current speed Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed Briefly lift the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 or depress in direction of arrow 2 page 218 Distronic is acti
277. ion tuning button with the indicator lamp is located in the lower sec tion of the center console 1 ABC suspension tuning button 2 Indicator lamp Start the engine page 52 i Pressing the button twice in quick succes sion will cause the vehicle to immediately raise or lower to the new vehicle level as selected i The selected setting is stored even if the en gine is turned off 228 Controls in detail Driving systems Suspension for sporty driving style The setting for sporty driving is selected when indicator lamp 2 is illuminated Press button 1 Indicator lamp 2 comes on Suspension for regular driving style The setting for regular driving is selected when the indicator lamp 2 is off Press button 1 Indicator lamp 2 goes out Parktronic system Parking assist The Parktronic system is an electronic aid with ultrasonic sensors It is designed to assist the driver during parking maneu vers It visually and audibly indicates the relative distance between the vehicle and an obstacle The Parktronic system is automatically ac tivated when you switch on the ignition re lease the parking brake or place the gear selector lever in position D R or N The Parktronic system deactivates at speeds exceeding approximately 11 mph 18 km h At lower vehicle speeds the Parktronic system turns on again Warning G Parktronic is a supplemental system It is not intended to nor does it replace the
278. ions Warning G When leaving the vehicle always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehi cle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury i To unlock the vehicle the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be outside the vehicle no further than approx 3 feet 1 meter away from the door i If the vehicle has been parked for more than 72 hours you must pull an outside door handle in order to activate the KEYLESS GO function i Opening a door causes the windows on that side of the car to open slightly They will return to the up position when the door is closed Warning G When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsu pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury 40 Getting started Unlocking SmartKey Starter switch 0 For removing SmartKey 1 Power supply for some electrical con sumers such as seat adjustment 2 Ignition power supply for all electrical consumers and driving position All lamps except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated in the instru ment cluster come on
279. ior rear view mirrors When moving the seats make sure there are no items in the footwell or behind the seats Otherwise you could damage the seats 44 Getting started Adjusting Seat height Press the switch up or down in direction of arrow 2 Seat cushion tilt Press the switch up or down in direction of arrow 3 until your upper legs are lightly supported Seat cushion depth Press the switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 4 until your legs are supported comfortably Seat backrest tilt Press the switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 6 until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel Head restraint height Press the switch up or down in direction of arrow 1 Head restraint tilt Manually adjust the angle of the head re straint Push or pull on the lower edge of the head restraint cushion For more information on seats see Seats page 121 Warning G For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints Adjust head restraint so that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints Head restraints are intend ed to help reduce injuries during an acci dent i When moving the seat
280. ir bag Occupants who are unbelted out of position or too close to the air bag can be seriously injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates with great force in the blink of an eye Sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with your back against the seat backrest Adjust the driver s seat as far as possi ble rearward still permitting proper op eration of vehicle controls The distance from the center of the driver s breast bone to the center of the air bag cover on the steering wheel must be at least 10 inches 25 cm or more You should be able to accomplish this by a combina tion of adjustments to the seat and steering wheel If you have any prob lems please see an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not lean your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dashboard Keep hands on the outside of steering wheel rim Placing hands and arms in side the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand arm injury when driver s front air bag inflates Adjust the passenger seat as far as pos sible rearward from the dashboard when the seat is occupied 69 Safety and Security Occupant safety Occupants especially children should never lean their heads in the area of the door where the head thorax air bag in flates This could result in serious inju ries or death should the air bag be triggered Always sit nearly upright properly use the seat belts and appropri ate size infant or child
281. ires affect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You might lose control over the vehicle 299 Operation Tires and wheels i With a spare wheel mounted the system may still indicate the tire inflation pressure of the removed road wheel for some minutes If this happens keep in mind that the indicated value where the spare wheel is mounted does not re flect the actual spare tire inflation pressure Warning G The TPMS does not indicate a warning for wrongly selected inflation pressures Always adjust tire inflation pressure according to the placard on the driver s door B pillar or if available the supplemental tire pressure in formation on the inside of the fuel filler flap The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure e g tire blowout caused by a foreign object In this case bring the vehicle to a halt by care fully applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers Warning G Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire infla tion pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped
282. itor inoperative The TPMS or Advanced TPMS is malfunctioning Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Tire pressure monitor inoperative No wheel sensors There are wheels without appropriate wheel sensors mounted e g winter tires Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Have appropriate wheel sensors in stalled by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Tire pressure monitor Wheel sensor missing One or more sensors defect e g emp ty sensor battery One or more wheels without appropri ate wheel sensors mounted e g spare wheel Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Have appropriate wheel sensors in stalled by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Vehicles with Advanced TPMS The tire pressure for the respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display 364 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution Tire pressure monitor currently unavailable The TPMS or Advanced TPMS is unable to monitor the tire pres sure due to a nearby radio interference source excessive wheel sensor tem peratures As soon as the causes for the malfunction are no longer present the TPMS or Advanced TPMS automatically becomes active again after a few minutes driving Warning G Do not drive with a flat tire A fla
283. ivated It will reactivate as soon as you reinsert the SmartKey in the starter switch Setting interior lighting delayed switch off Use this function to set whether you would like the interior lighting to remain on for 10 seconds during darkness after you have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch Move the selection marker with button or to the Lighting sub menu Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Int lighting delayed switch off appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting 162 Controls in detail Control system Press or to switch the inte rior lighting delayed switch off feature On or Off Vehicle submenu Access the Vehicle submenu via the Set tings menu Use the Vehicle submenu to make general vehicle settings The follow ing functions are available Setting automatic locking Use this function to activate or deactivate the automatic central locking With the automatic central locking system activated the vehicle is centrally locked at a vehicle speed of approximately 9 mph 15 km h Move the selection marker with the or button to the Vehicle submenu Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the left multifunction display Automatic door lock The selection marker is on the current setting Press or to switch Automatic door lock On or Off Convenience submenu Access the Convenien
284. ive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty 176 Controls in detail Automatic transmission The following instructions describe opera tion of the steering wheel gearshift control when driving in the automatic program mode C or S For instructions on operating the steering wheel gearshift control and gear selector lever in the program mode MANUAL see Manual shift program SL 55 AMG and SL 65 AMG only page 177 Downshifting Briefly pull left shift paddle 1 page 175 The transmission will shift to the next lower gear as permitted by the shift program This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the transmission page 172 Upshifting Briefly pull right shift paddle 2 page 175 The transmission will shift to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the transmission page 172 Canceling gear range limit Pull and hold right shift paddle 2 page 175 until D reappears in the right multifunction display The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to gear range D Shifting into optimal gear range Pull and hold left shift paddle 1 page 175 The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration This
285. ke operation i The vehicle speed displayed in the speedom eter can briefly vary from the speed setting for the cruise control system i On uphill grades the cruise control may not be able to maintain the set speed Once the grade eases the set speed will be resumed On downhill grades the cruise control maintains the set speed by braking with the vehicle s brake system In addition on longer downhill grades the automatic transmission will downshift auto matically 211 Controls in detail Driving systems Canceling the cruise control There are several ways to cancel the cruise control Step on the brake pedal The cruise control is canceled The last set speed is stored for later use or Briefly push the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 3 The cruise control is canceled The last set speed is stored for later use i The last stored speed is canceled when you turn off the engine i The cruise control switches off automatical ly when you step on the brake pedal you depress the parking brake pedal The cruise control also switches off automatical ly when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph 30 km h page 209 the ESP is in operation or switched off with the ESP switch page 91 you move the gear selector lever to position N while driving An acoustic warning sounds and the message CC Off appears in the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds Moving the gear se
286. king and driving and or taking drugs and driving are a very dangerous combina tion Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes perceptions and judgment The possibility of a serious or even fatal ac cident are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs Warning G Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob structing the pedal s range of movement Keep the driver s footwell clear of all obsta cles If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell make sure the pedals still have sufficient clearance This could lead to acci dents or injury 260 Operation Driving instructions Power assistance Brakes Warning G The brake system requires electrical energy for operation A malfunction in the vehicle s power supply or electrical system may impair brake sys tem operation and switch it into its emer gency operation mode In such a case the red brake warning lamp page 335 and warning messages page 347 in the in strument cluster come on while driving To brake the driver must then apply signifi cantly greater brake pedal pressure and de press the pedal much further to obtain the expected braking effect If necessary apply full pressure to the brake pedal Brakes are only applied to the front wheels Stopping distance is increased If there is a malfunc ti
287. king and unlocking Selective setting If you frequently travel alone you may wish to reprogram the SmartKey so that pressing only unlocks the driver s door interior lockable storage compart ments and the fuel filler flap Press and hold buttons and simultaneously for about 6 seconds until battery check lamp 5 flashes twice The SmartKey will then function as fol lows Unlocking driver s door and fuel filler flap Press button once All turn signals flash once The locking knob in the driver s door moves up The anti theft alarm system is disarmed Global unlocking Press button twice All turn signals flash once The locking knobs in the doors move up The anti theft alarm system is disarmed Global locking Press button All turn signals flash three times The lock ing knobs in the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed Restoring to factory setting Press and hold buttons and simultaneously for about 6 seconds until battery check lamp 5 page 102 flashes twice If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehi cle with the SmartKey then the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged the SmartKey is mal functioning or the vehicle battery is drained Check the batteries in the SmartKey page 105 and replace them if necessary page 395 Use the mechanical key to unlock the driv er s door page 391 and the trunk page 117 Have the vehicl
288. king in an emergency 392 Unlocking separately 111 Valet locking 117 Trunk lid Opening 112 Turn signal lamps Cleaning lenses 325 Replacing bulbs 398 401 Turn signals 25 56 Exterior rear view mirrors 398 401 Front bulbs 398 Indicator lamps 27 Rear bulbs 398 Turning off the engine 62 U Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 314 Units Setting speedometer units 156 Unlocking the vehicle 38 In an emergency 391 Upholstery Cleaning 329 Upshifting 175 469 Index V Vehicle Locking 31 Locking in an emergency 393 Minimum distance Parktronic 230 Towing 421 Unlocking 31 Unlocking in an emergency 391 Vehicle capacity weight 314 Vehicle care Leather upholstery 329 Ornamental moldings 325 Upholstery 329 Wood trims 329 Vehicle Identification Number see VIN Vehicle level Changing 227 Setting 227 Vehicle level control ABC 225 Vehicle level control switch 32 Vehicle lighting Checking 273 Vehicle loading terminology 312 Vehicle maximum load on the tire 314 Vehicle status messages 347 Vehicle tool kit 388 VIN 431 Voice control system 25 W Warning sounds Distance warning function 224 Distronic 216 Drivers seat belts 80 Parking brake 55 Warranty coverage 429 Washing the vehicle 324 Wear pattern tires 315 Wheel bolts Tightening torque 412 Wheel change 405 Tightening torque 412 Wheel wrench 389 Wheels Tires and wheels 283 Wind screen 204 Installing 204 Re
289. l system 444 Automatic transmission 279 444 Brake system 272 444 447 Capacities 444 Engine coolant 280 444 449 Engine oil 275 444 446 Power steering 444 Retractable hardtop Hydraulics 444 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system 444 Fog lamps 131 Messages in the multifunction display 380 382 Replacing bulbs 398 Front air bags 71 Front lamps see Headlamps Front passenger front air bag Messages in the multifunction display 356 359 Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 76 345 FSS Canada only 319 Fuel 271 Additives 448 Capacity Fuel tank 444 Consumption statistics 163 Filler flap 271 Fuel reserve warning lamp 29 339 Gasoline additives 448 Gauge 29 Premium unleaded gasoline 272 445 447 Refueling 271 Requirements 448 Fuel filler flap Opening 271 Fuels coolants lubricants etc Capacities 444 Functions control system 141 Fuse chart see Vehicle tool kit Fuses 424 G Garage door opener 251 Gasoline see Fuel GAWR 312 Gear range Automatic transmission 172 Canceling limit 175 Indicator 29 Limiting 172 Shifting into optimal 175 Gear selector lever 32 168 Cleaning 328 Lock 52 Position 168 170 Global locking unlocking see Key Glove box 233 Good visibility 180 Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW GVW 312 GVWR 313 459 Index H Hard plastic trim items cleaning 328 Hardto
290. l lever in direction of arrow 4 page 218 Distronic resumes the last stored speed or if no speed is stored it will set and store the current speed Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Deactivating Distronic There are several ways to deactivate the Distronic system Step on the brake pedal or Briefly push the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 3 page 218 Distronic will be deactivated The last set speed will be stored into memory The following message appears in the mul tifunction display for approximately 5 seconds DTR off Warning G The set speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions permit Possible acceleration or decelera tion differences arising from returning to the preset speed could caused an accident and or serious injury to you and others i The last stored set speed is deleted when the engine is turned off i Distronic deactivates automatically when you depress the parking brake pedal the vehicle speed is below 20 mph 30 km h page 218 the ESP is in operation or switched off with the ESP switch page 91 you move the gear selector lever into position N An acoustic warning sounds and the mes sage DTR off appears in the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds Warning G Distronic switches off and releases the brakes when the vehicle decelerates below the minimum speed of 20 mph 30 km h by operatio
291. l may also require the purchase of two or four wheel rims of the recommended size for use with these winter tires See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for more information 436 Technical data Rims and tires Same size tires 18 tires 19 tires SL 550 SL 600 SL 55 AMG Rims light alloy 8 5 J x 18 H2 8 5 J x 18 H2 8 5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset 1 38 in 35 mm 1 38 in 35 mm 1 18 in 30 mm Summer tires1 1 Radial ply tires Winter tires1 2 2 Not available as factory equipment 255 40 R18 95V M S 255 40 R18 95V M S 255 40 R18 95V M S SL 55 AMG Performance Package SL 65 AMG Rims light alloy 8 5 J x 19 EH2 Wheel offset 1 18 in 30 mm Summer tires Winter tires1 2 1 Radial ply tires 2 Not available as factory equipment 255 35 R19 96V XL Extra Load M S 437 Technical data Rims and tires Mixed size tires SL 550 SL 600 Front axle Rims light alloy 8 5 J x 18 H2 8 5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset 1 38 in 35 mm 1 38 in 35 mm Summer tires1 1 Radial ply tires 255 40 R18 95W 255 40 R18 95Y Rear axle Rims light alloy 9 5 J x 18 H2 9 5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset 1 57 in 40 mm 1 57 in 40 mm Summer tires1 2 2 Must not be used with snow chains 285 35 R18 97W 285 35 R18 97Y 438 Technical data Rims and tires SL 55 AMG SL 550 Sport Package SL 600 Sport Package SL 55 AMG SL 55 AMG Performance Package
292. l then see the message Press button s You have answered the call In the right multifunction display you see the dura tion of the call Ending a call Press button t You have ended the call In the right multifunction display you will again see the standby message Dialing a number from the phone book If your telephone is ready to receive calls you may select and dial a number from the phone book at any time Press button or repeatedly until you see the TEL menu in the left multifunction display In the right multifunction display you will see the standby message i If you do not wish to accept a call press button t 167 Controls in detail Control system Press button j or k The control system reads the phone book which is stored in the telephone This may take several minutes In the right multifunction display you will see the message Please wait When the message Please wait dis appears the phone book has been loaded Press button j or k repeatedly until the desired name appears in the right multifunction display The stored names are displayed in ascending or descending alphabetical order Press button s The system dials the selected phone number If the connection is successful and this feature is supported by your network provider the name of the party you are calling if stored in your phone book and the duration of the call will appear in the display If no c
293. lamp C 5 W d Turn signal lamp PY 21 W 399 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Notes on bulb replacement Only use 12 volt bulbs of the same type and with the specified watt rating Switch the lights off before changing a bulb to prevent short circuits Always use a clean lint free cloth when handling bulbs Your hands should be dry and free of oil and grease If the newly installed bulb does not come on visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following lamps replaced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center the additional turn signals in the exteri or rear view mirrors the high mounted brake lamp the brake lamps the parking lamps and the side marker lamps in the tail lamp unit the rear fog lamps the low beam Xenon or Bi Xenon lamps the front fog lamps the front side marker lamps Replacing bulbs for front lamps Before you start to replace a bulb for a front lamp do the following first Turn the exterior lamp switch to posi tion M page 128 Open the hood page 274 1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp 2 High beam headlamp cover 3 Low beam headlamp cover Xenon or Bi Xenon lamp Do not remove i Have the headlamp adjustment checked regularly 400 Practical hints Replacing bulbs 4 High beam bulbs 5 Locking mechanism 6 Parking and standing lamps Front turn signal bulb Turn bulb socket 1 counterclockwise and pull it out Push t
294. lat tire Unscrew the alignment bolt install last wheel bolt and tighten slightly Inflating the spare tire collapsible tire Take the electric air pump out of the trunk page 388 1 Flap 2 Air pump switch 3 Electrical plug 4 Air hose with pressure gauge and vent screw 5 Union nut Open flap 1 on air pump Pull out electrical plug 3 and air hose with the pressure gauge 4 Remove the valve cap from the tire valve Screw union nut 5 onto the tire valve Insert electrical plug 3 into vehicle ci gar lighter socket Warning G Always replace wheel bolts that are dam aged or rusted Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts Damaged wheel hub threads should be re paired immediately Do not continue to drive under these circumstances Contact an au thorized Mercedes Benz Center or call Roadside Assistance Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off This could cause an accident Be sure to use the correct wheel bolts Warning G Only use genuine equipment Mercedes Benz wheel bolts They are identi fied by the Mercedes star Other wheel bolts may come loose Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the ve hicle is raised Otherwise the vehicle could fall off the jack Do not lower the vehicle before inflating the spare wheel tire Otherwise the rim may be dam aged Warning G Observe instructions on air pump label 411 Practical hints
295. ld washer fluid every now and then even when it is raining If anything blocks the windshield wipers leaves snow etc switch them off immediate ly For safety reasons stop the vehicle in a safe location and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop button and open the driver s door with the driver s door open the starter switch is in posi tion 0 same as with the SmartKey re moved from the starter switch before attempting to remove any blockage Remove blockage Turn the windshield wipers on again If the windshield wipers fail to function at all in switch position I set the combination switch to the next high er wiper speed have the windshield wipers checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center 59 Getting started Driving Problems while driving The engine runs erratically and misfires An ignition cable may be damaged The engine electronics may not be op erating properly Unburned gasoline may have entered the catalytic converter and damaged it Give very little gas Have the problem repaired by an au thorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible The coolant temperature gauge is above 248 F 120 C The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling the engine Stop the vehicle as soon as possible in a safe location and turn off the engine Allow engine and coolant to cool Check the
296. le is fully loaded The point at which the maximum driving distance begins in emergency mode is when the warning message appears in the multifunction display indicating that there is a loss of tire inflation pressure Do not exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph 80 km h Warning G In emergency mode your vehicle s driving characteristics are diminished in such situa tions as driving around curves while braking while accelerating rapidly Therefore your driving style must be adapt ed accordingly Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers as well as driving over obstacles road curbs potholes or off road areas This is especially important if the ve hicle is heavily loaded The emergency driving distance that can be achieved greatly depends on the demands placed on the vehicle Depending on speed load driving maneuvers road conditions outside temperature etc the distance can be significantly shorter or if the vehicle is driven cautiously somewhat longer Do not continue driving in emergency mode if you notice knocking sounds the vehicle starts to shake smoke develops and you smell rubber ESP is intervening continuously you notice tears on the tire sidewalls After driving in emergency mode you must have the rims inspected by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center to check if they are suitable for further use The failed tire must be replaced in any case i When replacing individual or
297. lector lever to position N while driving cancels the cruise control Howev er the gear selector lever should not be moved to position N while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate the cruise control After brief acceler ation e g for passing the cruise control will re sume the last speed set 212 Controls in detail Driving systems Setting a higher speed Lift the cruise control in direction of arrow 1 page 210 and hold it there until the desired speed is reached Release the cruise control lever The new speed is set Setting a lower speed Depress the cruise control in direction of arrow 2 page 210 and hold it there until the desired speed is reached Release the cruise control lever The new speed is set Fine adjustment in 1 mph Canada 1 km h increments Faster Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 page 210 Slower Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 2 page 210 Setting to last stored speed Resume function Briefly pull the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 4 page 210 The cruise control resumes to the last set speed or if no speed is stored it will set and store the current speed Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The selected speed appears in the mul tifunction display i When you
298. ler neck and turn fuel cap clockwise until it au dibly engages Close fuel filler flap 1 You should hear the latch close shut Check regularly and before a long trip For information on quantities and require ments of operating agents see Fuels coolants lubricants etc page 444 Open the hood page 274 1 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system 2 Brake fluid 3 Coolant level Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system For information on refilling the reservoir see Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system page 282 Brake fluid For information on brake fluid see Fuels coolants lubricants etc page 444 i Only use premium unleaded gasoline with a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 average of 96 RON 86 MON Information on gasoline quality can normally be found on the fuel pump For more information on gasoline see Premium unleaded gasoline page 447 or the Factory Approved Service Pamphlet i Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can cause the engine malfunction indicator lamp USA only or the engine malfunction indicator lamp Canada only to illuminate For more information see the Practical hints section page 336 If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks immediately Notify an auth
299. letely i Vehicles with 19 spare wheel only Before storing the spare wheel in trunk fasten tension ing straps see Compressing the collapsible tire vehicles with 19 spare wheel only page 390 i The tensioning straps are shown in red for illustration purposes The tensioning straps on the spare wheel of your vehicle are black 391 Practical hints Locking unlocking in an emergency Locking unlocking in an emergency Unlocking the vehicle If you cannot unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey or KEYLESS GO unlock the driver s door and the trunk using the me chanical key 1 Mechanical key locking tab 2 Mechanical key Move locking tab 1 direction of arrow and slide the mechanical key 2 out of the housing Unlocking the driver s door 1 Unlocking 2 Mechanical key Insert mechanical key 2 into the lock until it stops Turn mechanical key 2 counterclock wise to position 1 The driver s door is unlocked You can now open the driver s door i Unlocking the vehicle with the mechanical key and opening the driver s door or the trunk will trigger the anti theft alarm system page 96 To cancel the alarm insert the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO in the starter switch 392 Practical hints Locking unlocking in an emergency Unlocking the trunk A minimum height clearance of 6 2 ft 1 89 m is required to open the trunk lid 1 Unlocking in an emergency 2 Handle Inser
300. ling up 152 Clearing 153 Manual operation Interior lighting control 135 Locking the vehicle 393 Lowering load assist 394 Unlocking storage compartments 392 Unlocking the driver s door 391 Unlocking the trunk 392 Manual shift program SL 55 AMG and SL 65 AMG 177 Massage function 122 Maximum cooling MAXCOOL 190 Maximum inflation pressure 313 Maximum load rating 313 Maximum loaded vehicle weight 313 Menus 141 AMG 146 AUDIO 149 Distronic 151 NAV 151 Standard display 145 TEL 165 Trip computer 163 Vehicle status message memory 152 Menus see Control system menus Miles kilometers in speedometer 156 462 Index Minimum distance Parktronic 230 Mirrors 47 180 Adjusting interior rear view mirror 48 Exterior rear view mirrors 48 Misfiring 59 MOE tires see MOExtended system MOExtended system 301 413 MOExtended tires 439 MON 272 Mph or km h in speedometer 156 Multifunction display 139 Displaying gear range 173 Left display field 27 Right display field 29 Selecting language 156 Standard display 139 Multifunction display messages ABC 349 ABS 351 352 Battery 366 Brake pads 366 Brake system 370 CHECK ENGINE 374 Coolant 371 Coolant level 373 Display malfunction 374 Doors 374 Easy entry exit feature 375 Electro hydraulic brake system 367 368 Front passenger front air bag 358 Hood 377 Luggage cover 387 Restraint systems 361 Roll bar 384 SmartKey 378 Smart
301. lock button on an out side door handle page 64 until the windows are closed Synchronizing power windows The power window must be synchronized each time after the battery has been disconnect ed if the power windows cannot be fully opened Express open or closed Express close Synchronizing the power windows Switch on the ignition page 39 Pull the power window switches until the side windows are closed Hold the switches for approximately 1 second The power windows are synchronized Warning G Driver s door only If within 5 seconds the switch is again pulled past the resistance point and re leased the automatic reversal will not operate Warning G When closing the windows make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure The windows will not automatically re open if blocked during convenience closing If potential danger exists proceed as fol lows Release the lock button Pull on the door handle and hold firmly The side windows open for as long as the door handle is held but the door not opened 199 Controls in detail Retractable hardtop Retractable hardtop Opening and closing the retractable hardtop For safety reasons the retractable hardtop can only be opened and closed when the vehicle is standing still Warning G To prevent possible accidents only drive the vehicle with the retractable hardtop either completely cl
302. ls coolants lubricants etc Brake fluid During vehicle operation the boiling point of the brake fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of moisture from the atmosphere Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes Benz is recommended Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will provide you with additional information Premium unleaded gasoline Warning G Under extremely strenuous operating condi tions this moisture content can lead to the formation of bubbles in the system thus reducing the system s efficiency Therefore the brake fluid must be replaced regularly Refer to your vehicle s Mainte nance Booklet for replacement interval Warning G Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous It burns violently and can cause serious injury Whenever you are around gasoline avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact extinguish all smoking materials Never allow sparks flame or smoking materials near gasoline To maintain the engine s durability and per formance premium unleaded gasoline must be used If premium unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used follow these precau tions have the fuel tank only partially filled with un leaded regular and fill up with premium un leaded as soon as possible avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceler ation do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two occupants and no luggage do not e
303. ly This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference re ceived including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment i You can also close the power windows page 196 and the retractable hardtop using the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO page 201 i When you unlock the vehicle the electro hydraulic brake system is activated 108 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking This does not apply if after starting the selector lever is still in position P and the SmartKey is then inserted in the starter switch The SmartKey will then have priority over the KEYLESS GO function and the vehicle s electrical system will operate according to the position of the SmartKey in the starter switch even stopping the engine If the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is positioned farther away from the vehi cle the system may no longer recog nize the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO The vehicle then cannot be locked or the engine started via the KEYLESS GO system If the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is re moved from the vehicle while the en gine is running e g if passenger exits the vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO the message Key not detected will appear in the m
304. matically again after approximately 40 seconds if no door was opened 98 Safety and Security Anti theft systems Tow away alarm Once the tow away alarm is armed a visual and audible alarm will be triggered when someone attempts to raise the vehicle Arming tow away alarm When you lock your vehicle the tow away alarm is automatically armed after about 30 seconds When you unlock your vehicle the tow away protection disarms automatical ly Disabling tow away alarm To prevent triggering the tow away alarm disable the tow away alarm feature before towing the vehicle or when parking on a surface subject to movement such as a ferry or auto train The button is located on the center con sole between the driver s seat and the pas senger seat 1 Tow away alarm off button 2 Indicator lamp Switch off the ignition and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch i If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds a call to the Response Center is ini tiated automatically by the Tele Aid system page 245 provided Tele Aid service was sub scribed to and properly activated and that nec essary cellular service and GPS coverage are available i You cannot disarm the tow away alarm when the ignition is switched on 99 Safety and Security Anti theft systems Press button 1 The indicator lamp 2 in the switch comes on briefly Exit and lock your vehicle with the SmartKey or vehicles with KEYLESS
305. mbient lighting conditions The corner illuminating front fog lamps function is not available at a vehicle speed above 25 mph 40 km h i The corner illuminating front fog lamps will come on automatically depending on the steering angle even if you did not switch on ei ther turn signal If the corner illuminating front fog lamps came on automatically they will also go out automati cally depending on the steering angle 133 Controls in detail Lighting Combination switch The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column Combination switch 1 High beam 2 High beam flasher High beam Turn the exterior lamp switch to B or to U page 128 Push the combination switch in direc tion of arrow 1 to switch on the high beam headlamps The high beam indicator lamp A in the instrument cluster comes on Pull the combination switch in direction of arrow 2 to its original position to switch off the high beam headlamps The high beam indicator lamp A in the instrument cluster goes out High beam flasher Pull the combination switch briefly in direction of arrow 2 Hazard warning flasher The hazard warning flasher can be switched on at all times even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch or with the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the vehicle The hazard warning flasher switches on automatically when an air bag deploys The switch is located on the dashboard be twe
306. mbusa com and use your ID and password sent to you sep arately to learn more USA only i The indicator lamp in the Information button remains illuminated in red for ap proximately 10 seconds during the system self check after switching on the ignition togeth er with the SOS button and the Roadside Assis tance button See system self check page 244 if the indi cator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds If the indicator lamp in the Information button is flashing continuously and no voice connection to the Response Center was established then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call e g the relevant cellular phone network is not available The message Call failed ap pears in the multifunction display Information calls can be terminated using the t button on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the COMAND headunit 249 Controls in detail Useful features Call priority If other service calls such as a Roadside Assistance call or Information call are ac tive an Emergency call is still possible In this case the Emergency call will take pri ority and override all other active calls If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after pressing one of the buttons or remain illu minated in red at any time the Tele Aid system has detected a malfunction or the service is cur rently
307. menu Once within the submenu use the j button to move to the next func tion or the k button to move to the previous function within that submenu Use buttons or to change the settings of the respective function i The settings you have changed will not be re set unless you confirm the action by pressing the reset button a second time 155 Controls in detail Control system The table below shows what settings can be changed within the various menus De tailed instructions on making individual settings can be found on the following pag es Instrument cluster page 156 Time page 157 Lighting page 159 Vehicle page 162 Convenience page 162 Selecting standard display Synchronizing time with head unit Setting daytime running lamp mode USA only Setting automatic locking Activating easy entry exit feature Selecting speedometer display mode Setting the time hours Setting locator lighting Selecting language Setting the time minutes Setting night security illumination Setting interior lighting delayed switch off 156 Controls in detail Control system Instrument cluster submenu Access the Inst cluster submenu via the Settings menu Use the Inst clus ter submenu to change the instrument cluster display settings The following functions are available Selecting speedometer display mode Move the selection marker with button or to the Inst
308. minutes driv ing if the malfunction has been corrected i Operating radio transmission equipment e g wireless headsets two way radios in or near the vehicle could cause the TPMS to mal function Warning G It is the driver s responsibility to calibrate the TPMS on the recommended cold infla tion pressure Underinflated tires affect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You might loose control over the vehicle i Reactivate the TPMS after adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the inflation pressure rec ommended for the vehicle operating condition Tire pressure should only be adjusted on cold tires Observe the recommended tire inflation pressure on the placard on the driver s door B pillar page 286 Some vehicles may have supplemental tire pressure information for driv ing at high speeds page 292 or for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle con dition page 292 If such information is pro vided it can be found on the inside of the fuel filler flap 298 Operation Tires and wheels Press the reset button page 27 The following message will appear in the multifunction display Restart tire pressure monitor Press the button The following message will appear in the multifunction display Tire pressure monitor restarted After driving a few minutes the system verifies that the current tire inflation pressures are within the system s specified range Afterwards the
309. moving 205 Windows see Side windows Windows cleaning 326 Windshield Cleaning wiper blades 326 Defogging 191 Refilling washer fluid 282 Washer fluid 58 282 Washer system 282 Windshield and headlamp washer system 452 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system 272 273 Windshield washer fluid 58 Filler neck 282 Messages in display 387 Mixing ratio 452 Refilling 282 Windshield wipers 25 57 Fast wiper speed 57 Intermittent wiping 57 Replacing wiper blades 403 Wiping with windshield washer fluid 58 Winter driving Snow chains 318 Tires 316 Winter driving instructions 266 Winter tires 316 Wood trims Cleaning 329 470 Service and Literature Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center has trained technicians and Genuine Mercedes Benz Parts to service your vehicle properly For expert advice and quality service contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle please contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle For further information you can find us on the Mercedes Benz web site www mbusa com or www mercedes benz ca We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator s Manual Reprinting translation and copying even of excerpts are not permitted without our prior authorization in writ
310. mp will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when the engine is started and then go out indicating that the passenger front air bag is activated If the 5 indicator lamp is illuminated the passenger front air bag is deactivated and will not be deployed If the 5 indicator lamp is not illuminated the passenger front air bag is activated and will be deployed in the event of certain frontal impacts if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold independently of the head thorax air bags If the passenger front air bag is deployed the rate of inflation will be influenced by the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as assessed by the air bag control unit passenger s weight category as identi fied by the Occupant Classification System OCS Warning G Children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropri ate infant or child restraint recommended for the size and weight of the child The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle s seat belt fully in accordance with the child seat manufactur er s instructions Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag Note the following important information Your vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to turn off the pas senger front air bag in your vehicle when the system senses the weight of a typi cal 12 month old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropr
311. n a reliable manner if you have set the correct tire inflation pressures for each tire If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was set the system will monitor the pressure ac cording to the incorrect value 295 Operation Tires and wheels Switch on the ignition page 39 Make sure the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display page 145 Press button k or j repeatedly until the following message appears in the multifunction display Run Flat Indicator active Menu R Button Press the reset button page 27 The following message will appear in the multifunction display Restart Run Flat Indicator If you wish to confirm activation Press button The following message will appear in the multifunction display Run Flat Indicator restarted After a certain learning phase the Run Flat Indicator checks the set pressure val ues for all four tires If you wish to cancel activation Press button Checking tire pressure electronically with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS USA only i The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS is equipped with a combination low tire pressure TPMS malfunction telltale in the in strument cluster page 29 Depending on how the telltale illuminates it indicates a low tire pressure condition or a malfunction in the TPMS system itself If the telltale illuminates continuously one or more of your tires is significantly under
312. n direction of arrow using handle 4 Hook luggage cover 1 into left and right side holders 3 Opening luggage cover Unhook luggage cover 1 from side holders 3 While holding on to handle 4 guide luggage cover 1 in the opposite direction of arrow Removing luggage cover Closed luggage cover 1 Luggage cover 2 Zipper 3 Side holder 4 Handle Fold back the entire length of the zip per s cloth cover Completely open zipper 2 while the luggage cover is closed Open luggage cover 1 see Opening luggage cover page 206 The tensioning clasps are on the left and right sides of the trunk Opened luggage cover 5 Tensioning clasp 6 Retainer spring 207 Controls in detail Retractable hardtop Open tensioning clasps 5 by pulling them downward Unhook retainer springs 6 from hold ers and flip retainer springs all the way up 7 Luggage cover 8 Cloth end 9 Cloth holder Carefully tilt luggage cover 7 in direc tion of arrow towards rear of trunk Roll up front end of cloth 8 in the trunk towards the front and fasten it in place in front of cloth holder 9 Completely remove luggage cover 7 from the trunk Installing luggage cover Carefully place luggage cover in trunk 1 Luggage cover 2 Hook 3 Guide rail Insert luggage cover 1 into guide rails 3 on both sides using hooks 2 Tilt luggage cover forward in direction of arrow Warning G Only open the tensioning clasps when the
313. n of the system At that time the driver must apply the brakes in order to reduce vehicle speed further or bring it to a stop 221 Controls in detail Driving systems Setting the following distance in Distronic You can set the specified following dis tance for Distronic by varying the time set ting between 1 0 and 2 0 seconds Using this time setting and the current speed of your vehicle Distronic calculates and sets the required following distance to the pre ceding vehicle The set distance will ap pear in the right multifunction display page 217 The distance setting thumbwheel for the time setting is located on the lower section of the center console 1 Thumbwheel for setting following distance Increasing distance Increasing the distance setting tells Distronic to maintain a greater following distance to the preceding vehicle Turn thumbwheel 1 towards Decreasing distance Decreasing the distance setting tells Distronic to maintain a shorter following distance to the preceding ahead Turn thumbwheel 1 towards Moving the gear selector lever to position N while driving cancels the Distronic However the gear selector lever should not be moved to position N while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate the Distronic After brief acceleration e g for passing the Distronic will resume th
314. n tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration 312 Operation Tires and wheels Tire and loading terminology Accessory weight The combined weight in excess of those standard items which may be replaced of automatic transmission power steering power brakes power windows power seats radio and heater to the extent that these items are available as factory installed equipment whether installed or not Air pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascal kPa or bars Aspect ratio Dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width expressed in percentage Bar Another metric unit for air pressure There are 14 5038 pounds per square inch psi to 1 bar there are 100 kilopascals kPa to 1 bar Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Cold tire inflation pressure Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has been sitting for at least 3 hours or driv en no more than 1 mile 1 6 km Curb weight The weight of a motor vehicle with stan dard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant and if so equipped air conditioning and additional optional equipment but without passen gers and cargo DOT Department of Transportation A tire bra
315. nd 2 this device must accept any interference re ceived including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment 107 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Important notes on using KEYLESS GO You can also use the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO like a normal SmartKey page 102 You can combine KEYLESS GO func tions with normal SmartKey functions e g unlocking with KEYLESS GO and locking with the button Always carry the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you Never store the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO together with Electronic items such as a cellular phone or another SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Metallic objects such as coins or metal foil Doing so could impair the function of the KEYLESS GO system To lock or unlock the vehicle the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be located outside the vehicle within ap proximately 3 ft 1 m of a door or the trunk In order to start the engine with the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be located in the vehicle All doors must be closed The brake pedal must be firmly de pressed Do not depress the accel erator If you have started the engine with the KEYLESS GO start stop button page 40 you can only turn it off again with this button even if you have put the SmartKey in the starter switch in the meantime i Canada on
316. nd or as otherwise required or permitted by law Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted via that system 20 21 At a glance Exterior view Cockpit Instrument cluster Multifunction steering wheel Center console Overhead control panel Storage compartments Door control panel 22 At a glance Exterior view 23 At a glance Exterior view Item Page 1 Trunk Opening the trunk 111 Closing the trunk 113 Spare wheel 388 Vehicle tool kit 388 2 Rear lamps 398 3 Rear window defroster 183 4 Fuel filler flap 271 Refueling 271 Gasoline 447 5 Doors Locking and unlocking 102 Opening and closing 111 Locking unlocking in an emergency 391 6 Exterior rear view mirrors Adjusting 48 Auto dimming rear view mirrors 180 Item Page 7 Towing 421 Installing towing eye bolt 423 8 Tires and wheels 283 Checking tire inflation pressure 292 Run Flat Indicator 293 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 295 Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System Advanced TPMS 298 General information 283 Flat tire 405 Vehicle tool kit 388 9 Hood Opening 274 Engine oil 275 Coolant 280 449 Item Page a Headlamp cleaning system 180 282 b Front lamps 398 c Windshield wipers 57 Wiper blades replacing 403 Wiper blades
317. nding symbol which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U S Department of Transportation GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle weight The gross vehicle weight on each axle must never exceed the GAWR for the front and rear axle indicated on the certification label located on the driver s door B pillar GVW Gross Vehicle Weight The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel tools spare wheel installed accessories passengers and cargo and if applicable trailer tongue load The GVW must never exceed the GVWR indicated on the certification label located on the driver s door B pillar 313 Operation Tires and wheels GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating This is the maximum permissible vehicle weight of the fully loaded vehicle weight of the vehicle including all options passen gers fuel and cargo and if applicable trailer tongue load It is indicated on certification label located on the driver s door B pillar Kilopascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure There are 6 9 kPa to 1 psi another metric unit for air pressure is bars There are 100 kilopascals kPa to 1 bar Maximum load rating The maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire Maximum loaded vehicle weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight and production options weight Maximum tire inflation pressure This number
318. ng brake set Release the parking brake page 54 USA only 3 Canada only The red brake warning lamp comes on when the engine is running and you hear a warn ing sound There is a malfunction in the electro hydraulic brake system There is insufficient brake fluid in the reser voir Read and observe messages in the display page 347 Risk of accident Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so and notify an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center Do not add brake fluid This will not solve the problem Warning G Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi nated can result in an accident Have your brake system checked immediately if the brake warning lamp stays on Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake sys tem Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can re sult in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire You can be seriously burned If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks 336 Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution USA only Canada only The yellow engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving There is a malfunction in The fuel injection system The ignition system The emission control system Syst
319. nger seat storage compartment 1 Handle 2 Storage compartment lid Pull handle 1 up Fold lid 2 down i The Roadside Assistance button page 247 and the Information button page 248 are located in the storage tray i The driver s seat storage compartment con tains the first aid kit page 388 235 Controls in detail Useful features Rear storage compartments The CD changer is located in the driver s side storage compartment For instructions on the CD changer see separate COMAND Operator s Manual Driver s side rear storage compartment 1 Release button 2 Storage compartment lid Press release button 1 Storage compartment lid 2 lid opens upwards Locking storage compartments The storage compartments are centrally locked when you lock the vehicle from the outside You can also lock the storage compart ments separately see Locking the stor age compartments separately page 235 Locking the storage compartments separately You can lock the storage compartments separately e g when the vehicle is in the shop for service 1 Separately unlocking storage compart ments 2 Separately locking storage compart ments Remove the mechanical key from the SmartKey page 391 236 Controls in detail Useful features Insert the mechanical key into the glove box lock Turn the mechanical key to position 2 The following storage compartments will be locked The
320. ngine can become very hot To prevent burns only touch owner serviceable components described in the Operator s Manual and comply with all relevant safety precautions Warning G To help prevent personal injury stay clear of moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running The radiator fan may continue to run for ap proximately 30 seconds or may even restart after the engine has been turned off Stay clear of fan blades Warning G The engine is equipped with a transistorized ignition system Because of the high voltage it is dangerous to touch any components ig nition coils spark plug sockets diagnostic socket of the ignition system with the engine running while starting the engine if ignition is on and the engine is turned manually 275 Operation Engine compartment Pull hood release 1 The hood is unlocked 2 Lever for opening the hood Push lever 2 on the hood upwards Pull up on the hood and then release it The hood will be automatically held open at shoulder height by gas filled struts Closing Let the hood drop from a height of ap proximately 11 2 ft 50 cm The hood will lock audibly Check to make sure the hood is fully closed If you can raise the hood at a point above the headlamps then it is not properly closed Open it again and let it drop with somewhat greater force Engine oil The amount of oil your engine needs will depend on a number of
321. nit To activate press the SOS button the Roadside Assistance button or the Information button depend ing on the type of response required Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid acquaintance call you will receive a user ID and password By visiting www mbusa com and selecting Tele Aid USA only you will have access to account information remote door unlock and more System self check Initially after switching on the ignition malfunctions are detected and indicated the indicator lamps in the SOS button the Roadside Assistance button and the Information button stay on longer The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing the sub scriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call using the button Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a system that is not activated If you have any questions regarding activation please call the Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada i The SOS button is located above the interior rear view mirror page 246 The Roadside Assistance button and the Information button are located below the center armrest cover page 234 The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular net work for communication and the GPS Global Po sitioning System satellites for vehicle location If either of these signals are unavailable the Tele Aid system may not function an
322. nk floor net Pull the trunk floor net from the trunk back wall towards the front over the luggage Hang the hooks of the net on the eyes on the trunk floor Luggage compartment in the rear 1 Strap 2 Holder 3 Latch 4 Release button Warning G Secure all pieces of luggage in the rear with the luggage straps Unsecured pieces of lug gage can otherwise cause injury during a braking maneuver and can increase the risk of injury in an accident Never allow anyone to ride in the rear The luggage straps can only secure light lug gage items Carry heavy pieces of luggage in the trunk The rear compartment area is not designed or intended to accommodate occupants Se vere personal injury or death may be the re sult in an accident 238 Controls in detail Useful features Pull strap 1 out of holder 2 Secure the luggage with the strap so that it cannot move Insert strap 1 into latch 3 Releasing strap Press release button 4 and guide strap 1 back to holder 2 Cup holders 1 Left cup holder 2 Right cup holder Opening Briefly press cup holder cover The cup holder opens automatically Warning G The shelf below the rear window should not be used to carry objects This will avoid such objects from being thrown about and injur ing vehicle occupants during an accident or sudden maneuver The trunk is the preferred place to carry ob jects Warning G In order to help prevent spilling
323. nly when the vehicle is stopped If you hear a warning signal and the mes sage Release parking brake appears in the multifunction display when driving off you have forgotten to release the parking brake Release the parking brake Do not run cold engine at high engine speed Running a cold engine at high engine speed may shorten the service life of the engine Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear i You can open a locked door from the inside Open door only when conditions are safe to do so You can deactivate the automatic locking using the control system page 162 56 Getting started Driving High beam The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column Combination switch 1 High beam 2 High beam flasher Push the combination switch in direc tion of arrow 1 The high beam headlamps come on The high beam headlamp indicator A in the instrument cluster comes on page 29 For more information see Lighting page 128 Turn signals The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column Combination switch 1 Turn signals right 2 Turn signals left Press the combination switch in direc tion of arrow 1 or 2 The corresponding turn signal indicator lamp K or L in the instrument cluster flashes page 27 The combination switch reset
324. notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with an SRS by alerting them to the applicable section in the Operator s Manual Front air bags 1 Driver air bag 2 Passenger air bag 3 Knee bag Driver and passenger air bags are de ployed in the event of certain frontal impacts if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold independently of the head thorax air bags The air bags will not deploy in impacts which do not exceed the system s deploy ment thresholds You will then be protect ed by the fastened seat belts In addition improper repair work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center For your protection and the protection of others when scrapping the air bag unit or emergency tensioning device our safety instructions must be fol lowed These instructions are available from your authorized Mercedes Benz Center Given the considerable deployment speed required inflation volume and the textile structure of the air bags there is the possibility of abrasions or other potentially more serious injuries resulting from air bag deployment i The front air bags in this vehicle have been designed to inflate in two stages This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the rate of relevant vehicle
325. ntegrated remote control While performing step 3 hold hand held remote control 5 at differ ent lengths and angles from the signal transmitter button 2 3 or 4 you are programming Attempt varying an gles at the distance of 2 to 5 inches 5 to 12 cm away or the same angle at varying distances i If you sell your vehicle erase the codes of all three channels 256 Controls in detail Useful features If another hand held remote control is available for the same device try the programming steps again using that other hand held remote control Make sure new batteries are in the hand held remote control before beginning the procedure Straighten the antenna wire from the garage door opener assembly This may help improve transmitting and or receiving signals i Certain types of garage door openers are in compatible with the integrated remote control If you should experience further difficulties with programming the integrated remote control contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center in the USA only at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 i USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference re ceived including interference that may cause undesired operation
326. nutes i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and switch off the head lamps the door handle lamps will remain lit for approximately 5 minutes 136 Controls in detail Instrument cluster For a full view illustration of the instrument cluster see Instrument cluster page 26 The instrument cluster is activated when you open a door switch on the ignition press the reset button page 26 switch on the exterior lamps Opening a door will activate the instrument cluster only for about 30 seconds You can change the instrument cluster set tings in the Instrument cluster submenu of the control system page 156 Adjusting instrument cluster illumination Use the reset button to adjust the illumina tion brightness for the instrument cluster and the switches on the center console 1 Reset button i The instrument cluster illumination is dimmed or brightened to suit ambient light con ditions Warning G No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative As a result you will not be able to see infor mation about your driving conditions such as speed or outside temperature warn ing indicator lamps malfunction warning messages or the failure of any systems Driving characteristics may be impaired If you must continue to drive do so with added caution Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as pos
327. nutes with the engine turned off Switch on the ignition page 39 The standard display page 139 should appear in the multifunction dis play Press button k or j on the steering wheel until the following message appears in the multifunction displays One of the following messages will subsequently appear in the right multi function display Engine oil level OK Add 1 0 qt to reach max oil level Canada 1 0 l Add 1 5 qts to reach max oil level Canada 1 5 l Add 2 0 qts to reach max oil level Canada 2 0 l i If you want to interrupt the checking proce dure press the k or j button on the multifunction steering wheel 277 Operation Engine compartment If necessary add engine oil For information on adding engine oil see page 278 For more information on engine oil see the Technical data section page 444 and page 446 Other display messages If the SmartKey or the KEYLESS GO start stop button is not in position 2 the following message will appear Turn ignition on to measure engine oil level Switch on the ignition page 39 If you see the message Observe waiting time If the engine is at operating tempera ture wait 5 minutes before repeating the check procedure If the engine is not at operating temper ature yet wait 30 minutes before re peating the check procedure If you see the message Engine oil level Not when engine on
328. o an occupant of the vehicle The Tele Aid system is available if it has been activated and is operational Activation requires a subscription for monitoring services connection and cellular air time the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals are available and pass the information on to the Response Center Warning G If the indicator lamps in the SOS button in the Roadside Assistance button and or in the Information button do not come on dur ing the system self check or if any of these indicators remain illuminated continuously in red and or the message TeleAid malfunction Visit workshop is dis played in the multifunction display after the system self check a malfunction in the sys tem has been detected If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above the system may not operate as ex pected Have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible i Location of the vehicle on a map is only pos sible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite network and pass the informa tion on to the Response Center 246 Controls in detail Useful features Initiating an emergency call manually 1 Cover 2 SOS button Briefly press on cover 1 The cover opens Press SOS button 2 briefly The indicator lamp in SOS button 2 will flash until the emergency call is concluded Wait for a voice connection to the Re sponse Center Close cover 1 after
329. o hydraulic brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS the ESP and the BAS avail able Drive a short distance with added caution at a vehicle speed of above 12 mph 20 km h When the message disappears the ABS the ESP and the BAS are available again If the message does not disappear Continue driving with added caution Wheels may lock during hard braking reducing steering capability Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident 352 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution ABS ABS ESP inoperative See Oper Manual The ABS and ESP have switched off due to a malfunction The BAS is also deactivated The electro hydraulic brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS the ESP and the BAS avail able Continue driving with added caution Wheels may lock during hard braking reducing steering capability Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident mph Cruise control You have attempted to set a speed be low 20 mph 30 km h Accelerate to a speed exceeding 20 mph 30 km h and set the speed page 210 The ESP is switched off Switch on the ESP
330. objects or slower moving ve hicles that you are closing in on too quickly ABC with vehicle level control systems with which you can change vehicle sus pension characteristics Parktronic which assists the driver during parking maneuvers For information on the BAS ABS ESP and the electro hydraulic brake system see Driving safety systems page 87 Cruise control The cruise control automatically maintains the speed you set for your vehicle The use of the cruise control is recom mended for driving at a constant speed for extended periods of time You can set or resume the cruise control at any speed above 20 mph 30 km h The cruise control function is operated by means of the cruise control lever The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left hand side of the steering column page 24 Warning G The cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation The driver is and must always remain responsible for the vehicle s speed and for safe brake operation Only use the cruise control if the road traffic and weather conditions make it ad visable to travel at a constant speed The use of the cruise control can be dan gerous on winding roads or in heavy traf fic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a constant speed The use of the cruise control can be dan gerous on slippery roads Rapid changes in tire traction can result
331. olume manu ally page 190 Setting the temperature Use temperature controls 6 and b page 185 to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small incre ments preferably starting at 72 F 22 C The automatic climate control will adjust to the set temperature as fast as possible Increasing Turn temperature control 6 and or b page 185 slightly clockwise The automatic climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature Decreasing Turn temperature control 6 and or b page 185 slightly counterclockwise 189 Controls in detail Automatic climate control The automatic climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature Adjusting air distribution Use air distribution controls 1 and 5 page 185 to separately adjust the air distribution on each side of the passenger compartment The following symbols are found on the controls Press control button 1 or 5 page 185 until the control button sticks up slightly and the U symbol on the control button is out Automatic air distribution for the re spective side of the passenger com partment is switched off Turn control button to the desired sym bol The air distribution is adjusted accord ing to the chosen setting Opening the center air vents Turn thumbwheel 7 page 184 up ward to the
332. on in the electro hydraulic brake system we recommend that the vehicle be trans ported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift dolly equip ment A tow bar must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the recommended towing methods and the vehicle requires towing with all four wheels on the ground Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is only permissible for distances up to 30 miles 50 km and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph 50 km h For more infor mation see Towing the vehicle page 421 With the engine not running there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve hicle Warning G After driving in heavy rain for some time without applying the brakes or through wa ter deep enough to wet brake components the first braking action may be somewhat reduced and increased pedal pressure may be necessary to obtain expected braking ef fect Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in front Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause excessive and premature wear of the brake pads It can also result in the brakes overheating thereby significantly reducing their effec tiveness It may not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci dent 261 Operation Driving instructions To hel
333. onic indicator lamp 27 Distronic 213 Resume function 220 Activating 218 Cleaning system sensor cover 325 Control system 151 217 Distance warning function 224 Driving hints 222 System sensor cover 325 Warning and indicator lamps 215 216 224 339 Door Control panel 36 Handle Inside 36 Locking unlocking KEYLESS GO 39 64 Locking unlocking Mechanical key 391 393 Locking unlocking SmartKey 38 63 Messages in the multifunction display 374 Opening from inside 111 Storage compartment 233 Door control panel 36 Door handle 36 DOT 312 Drinking and driving 259 Driving Abroad 268 Driving off 262 Electro hydraulic brake system 95 Hydroplaning 264 In winter 266 316 Instructions 54 259 Problems 59 Safety systems 87 Systems 209 Through standing water 267 With Distronic 222 Driving safety systems 87 ABS 87 BAS 87 89 Electro hydraulic brake system 87 92 Electronic traction system 91 ESP 87 89 457 Index Driving systems 209 ABC 225 Cruise control 209 Distronic 213 Parktronic 228 DTR see Distronic E Easy entry exit feature 46 162 Messages in the multifunction display 375 Electric air pump 389 410 Electrical outlet see Power outlet Electro hydraulic brake system 87 92 Activation 93 Deactivation 94 Driving hints 95 Messages in the multifunction display 367 368 Self check 94 Warning lamp 92 Electronic Stability Program see ESP Emergen
334. onnection is made the control system stores the dialed number in the redial memory Redialing The control system stores the most recent ly dialed phone numbers This eliminates the need to search through your entire phone book Press button or repeatedly until you see the TEL menu in the left multifunction display In the right multifunction display you will see the standby message Press button s In the right multifunction display you see the first number in the redial mem ory Press button j or k repeatedly until the desired name appears in the right multifunction display Press button s The control system dials the selected phone number i If you press and hold j or k for long er than one second the system scrolls rapidly through the list of names until you release the button again Cancel the quick search mode by pressing t 168 Controls in detail Automatic transmission For more information on driving with an automatic transmission see Automatic transmission page 52 Your vehicle s transmission adapts its gear shifting process to your individual driving style by continually adjusting the shift points up or down These shift point adjust ments are performed based on current operating and driving conditions If the operating conditions change the automatic transmission reacts by adjusting its shift program Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission The automatic
335. opped working Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Tail lamp left Auxiliary bulb on The left tail lamp is malfunctioning An auxiliary bulb has been brought into use Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Tail lamp right Auxiliary bulb on The right tail lamp is malfunction ing An auxiliary bulb has been brought into use Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Turn off lights You have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch and opened the driver s door or removed the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the vehicle and left the headlamps on Turn the exterior lamp switch to M or U Turn signal front left Auxiliary bulb on The left front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning An auxiliary bulb has been brought into use Replace the bulb as soon as possible page 397 Turn signal front right Auxiliary bulb on The right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning An auxiliary bulb has been brought into use Replace the bulb as soon as possible page 397 384 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution Turn signal rear left Auxiliary bulb on The left rear turn signal lamp is mal functioning An auxiliary bulb has been brought into use Replace the bulb as soon as possible page 397 Turn signal rear right Auxiliary bulb on
336. or the catalytic converter Have excess oil siphoned or drained off Ob serve all legal requirements with respect to its disposal 376 Practical hints What to do if When the message Add 1 qt engine oil at next refueling Canada 1 l appears while the engine is running and at operating temperature the engine oil level has dropped to approximately the minimum level When this occurs the warning will first come on intermittently and then stay on if the oil level drops further If no oil leaks are noted continue to drive to the nearest service station where the engine oil should be topped to the required level with an approved oil specified in the Factory Approved Service Products pam phlet Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution N Engine oil level Cannot measure engine oil level Vehicles with engine oil measuring system only The measuring system is malfunc tioning Have the measuring system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Engine oil level Check level Vehicles with oil dipstick only The engine oil has dropped to a crit ical level Check the engine oil level page 276 and add oil as required page 278 If you must add engine oil frequently have the engine checked for possible leaks The engine oil level warnings should not be ignored Extended driving with the symbol dis played could result in serious engine damage that is not cover
337. or the first time press and hold the two outer signal transmit ter buttons 2 and 4 and release them only when indicator lamp 1 be gins to flash after approximately 20 seconds do not hold the button for longer than 30 seconds This proce dure erases any previous settings for all three channels and initializes the memory If you later wish to program a second and or third hand held transmitter to the remaining two signal transmitter buttons do not repeat this step and be gin directly with step 3 Step 3 Hold the end of hand held remote control 5 of the device you wish to train approximately 2 to 5 in 5 to12 cm away from the signal trans mitter button 2 3 or 4 to be pro grammed while keeping indicator lamp 1 in view Step 4 Using both hands simultaneously press hand held remote control button 6 and the desired signal trans mitter button 2 3 or 4 Do not release the buttons until step 5 is com pleted Indicator lamp 1 will flash first slowly and then rapidly When programming a garage door opener park the vehicle outside the garage Do not run the engine while programming the integrated remote control Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide CO and inhaling it can cause un consciousness and possible death i Indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately the first time the signal transmitter button is pro grammed If this button has already been
338. orized Mercedes Benz Center immediately Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the problem For more information see the Practi cal hints section page 369 273 Operation At the gas station Coolant level For information on checking the coolant level see Coolant page 280 Engine oil level For more information on checking the en gine oil level see Engine oil page 275 Vehicle lighting Check function and cleanliness For more information see Replacing bulbs page 397 Exterior lamp switch see Switching on headlamps page 55 Tire inflation pressure For information on checking the tire infla tion pressure see Checking tire inflation pressure page 292 274 Operation Engine compartment Hood Opening 1 Hood release Warning G Do not pull the release lever while the vehi cle is in motion Otherwise the hood could be forced open by passing air flow This could cause the hood to come loose and injure you and or others Warning G If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine compartment or if the coolant tem perature gauge indicates that the engine is overheated do not open the hood Move away from the vehicle and do not open the hood until the engine has cooled If neces sary call the fire department Warning G You could be injured when the hood is open even when the engine is turned off Parts of the e
339. osed and locked or fully low ered into its storage compartment If the retractable hardtop does not com pletely open or close the roof hydraulics will lose pressure and the retractable hardtop is lowered after approximately 7 minutes when the ignition is switched on after approximately 15 seconds when the ignition is switched off Shortly before the retractable hardtop is lowered a warning will sound and in the left multifunction display you will see K in the right multifunction display you will see the message being lowered Lock the retractable hardtop again before driving any further page 202 Otherwise the unlocked hardtop could open while the vehicle is in motion and cause you to lose control of the vehicle You or others could be injured as a result Warning G Before operating the retractable hardtop switch make sure there is no danger of any one being injured by the moving parts re tractable roof roof frame and trunk lid due to inattention Hands must never be placed near the roof frame upper windshield area hardtop shelf behind roll bars or trunk lid while the re tractable hardtop is being raised or lowered Serious personal injury may occur If potential danger exists release the re tractable hardtop switch This immediately interrupts the raising or lowering procedure You then can operate the retractable hard top switch to raise or lower the retractable hardtop away from the danger zon
340. ost Please contact your local authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call our Customer Assistance Center in the USA at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 for details 70 Safety and Security Occupant safety Safety guidelines for the seat belt emergency tensioning device and air bag i Air bags are designed to activate only in cer tain frontal impacts front air bags driver side knee bag and side impacts head thorax air bags which exceed preset thresholds Only dur ing these events will they provide their supple mental protection The driver and passenger should always wear their seat belts Otherwise it is not possible for the air bags to provide their intended supple mental protection In case of other types of impacts and impacts be low air bag deployment thresholds air bags will not deploy The driver and passenger will then be protected to the extent possible by a properly fastened seat belt A properly fastened seat belt is also needed to provide the best possible pro tection in a rollover We caution you not to rely on the presence of the air bags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt It is important to your safety and that of your pas senger that you replace deployed air bags and repair any malfunctioning air bags to make sure that the vehicle will continue to provide supple mental crash protection for occupants Warning G Damaged seat belts or belts that wer
341. ou may scratch or damage the paint Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic touchless car wash which uses caustic spray Otherwise the caustic spray will damage the paint or ornamental moldings Make sure that the windshield wiper switch is set to 0 page 57 Otherwise the rain sen sor could activate and cause the wipers to move unintentionally This may lead to vehicle dam age Due to the width of the vehicle fold in exterior rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle through an automatic car wash to prevent dam age to the mirrors 325 Operation Vehicle care Ornamental moldings For regular cleaning and care of ornamen tal moldings use a use damp cloth Headlamps tail lamps side markers turn signal lenses Use a mild car wash detergent such as Mercedes Benz approved Car Sham poo with plenty of water Cleaning the Distronic system sensor cover 1 Distronic system sensor cover Switch off the ignition page 39 Use a mild car wash detergent such as Mercedes Benz approved Car Shampoo with plenty of water and a non scratching cloth to clean sensor cover 1 i After running the vehicle through an auto matic car wash wipe any wax off of the wind shield page 326 This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noise which can be caused by residual wax on the windshield When leaving the car wash make sure that the mirrors are folded out Otherwise they may vi brate Do not us
342. ould lose traction while braking or accelerating and the vehicle could skid the sensor is dirty or visibility is dimin ished due to snow rain or fog for exam ple The distance control system functional ity could be impaired Always pay attention to surrounding traffic conditions even while Distronic is switched on Otherwise you may not be able to recog nize dangerous situations until it is too late This could cause an accident in which you and or others could be injured Warning G Close attention to road and traffic condi tions is imperative at all times regardless of whether or not Distronic is activated Use of Distronic can be dangerous on wind ing roads or in heavy traffic because condi tions do not allow safe driving at a constant speed Distronic will not react to stationary objects on the roadway e g a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle Distronic will also not respond to oncoming vehicles 215 Controls in detail Driving systems Distronic displays in the speedometer dial 1 Red distance warning lamp E 2 Set speed When Distronic is activated distance warning lamp 1 and the set speed 2 ap pear in the speedometer dial Switch off Distronic when changing from the left to the right lane if vehicles are moving more slowly in the left lane when entering a turn lane or highway off ramp in complex driving situations such as in highway construction zones In the
343. oving the consumer battery Remove the screws securing the bat tery in the trunk Remove the battery support and bracket Pull out the battery ventilation hose from the battery Depending on battery arrangement in your vehicle model the ventilation tube is located either on the left or right side of the battery Take out the battery Removing the starter battery Remove the screws securing the start er battery in the engine compartment Pull battery ventilation 3 page 414 out of the battery Lift the retaining bracket Remove the battery Charging and reinstalling batteries Warning G Never charge a battery while still installed in the vehicle unless the accessory battery charge unit approved by Mercedes Benz is being used Gases may escape during charg ing and cause explosions that may result in paint damage corrosion or personal injury An accessory battery charge unit specially adapted for Mercedes Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes Benz is available permitting the charging of the bat tery in its installed position Contact an au thorized Mercedes Benz Center for information and availability Charge battery in accordance with the separate instruc tions for the accessory battery charger 418 Practical hints Batteries Charge batteries in accordance with the instructions of the battery charger manufacturer Reinstall the charged batteries Follow the previously described
344. owing this vehicle Safety and Security Here you will find descriptions of the safety and security features in your vehicle Controls in detail Here you will find detailed information about the equipment installed on your ve hicle This section expands on the Getting started section and also describes techni cal innovations If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle this section will be of particular interest to you Operation Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your vehi cle Practical hints This section provides fast assistance for dealing with problems you may encounter Technical data All important technical data for your vehi cle can be found in this section Indexes The table of contents and the index are de signed to help you find information quickly and easily The following publications are part of your vehicle documentation this Operator s Manual the Maintenance Booklet Separate operating instructions will be provided as required depending on the equipment options installed in your vehi cle 15 Introduction Symbols Symbols Trademarks ESP is a registered trademark of DaimlerChrysler HomeLink is a registered trademark of Prince a Johnson Controls Company The following symbols are found in this Operator s Manual Optional equipment is identified with an asterisk Since standard
345. own vanity mirror cover 2 Swing the sun visor up Warning G Do not use the driver s side vanity mirror while driving Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors closed while vehicle is in motion Reflected glare can endanger you and others i When the sun visor is disengaged from mounting 1 vanity mirror lamp 3 switches off To avoid damage to vanity mirror cover 2 make sure it is closed before pivoting the sun visor to the side 183 Controls in detail Good visibility Rear window defroster The rear window defroster uses a large amount of power To keep the battery drain to a minimum switch off the defrost er as soon as the rear window is clear The defroster is automatically deactivated af ter approximately 6 to 17 minutes of oper ation depending on the outside temperature Switch on the ignition page 39 Activating Press button F on the automatic cli mate control panel page 185 The indicator lamp on the button comes on Deactivating Press button F page 185 once more The indicator lamp on the button goes out Warning G Any accumulation of snow and ice should be removed from the rear window before driv ing Visibility could otherwise be impaired endangering you and others The rear window defroster cannot be switched on when the retractable hardtop is open The indicator lamp will start flashing if the hardtop is open Close the retractable hardtop The r
346. p prevent brake disk corrosion after driving on wet road surfaces particularly salted roads it is advisable to brake the vehicle with considerable force prior to parking The heat generated serves to dry the brakes If your brake system is normally only sub jected to moderate loads you should occa sionally test the effectiveness of the brakes by applying above normal braking pressure at higher speeds This will also enhance the grip of the brake pads Refer to the description of the Brake Assist System BAS page 89 If the parking brake is released and the brake warning lamp in the instrument clus ter stays on there is a malfunction in the electro hydraulic brake system page 92 or the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the reason for low brake fluid in the res ervoir Have the brake system inspected immedi ately All checks and service work on the brake system should be carried out by qualified technicians only Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Only install brake pads and brake fluid rec ommended by Mercedes Benz After hard braking it is advisable to drive on for some time rather than to park im mediately so the air stream will cool down the brakes faster Warning G Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking maneuvers Warning G If other than recommended brake pads are installed or o
347. p see Retractable hardtop Hazard warning flasher 133 Head restraints 44 Headlamp switch off delay see Delayed switch off exterior lamps Headlamps Automatic mode 129 Cleaning lenses 325 Cleaning system 180 Manual mode 129 Messages in the multifunction display 380 Replacing bulbs 397 Switch 55 128 Headliner cleaning 329 Head thorax air bag 72 Heated steering wheel 240 High beam flasher 56 133 High beam headlamps 56 128 398 Indicator lamp 29 Messages in the multifunction display 380 Replacing bulbs 397 400 Switching on 133 High mounted brake lamp 398 High performance brake system AMG vehicles only 262 Hood 274 Messages in display 377 Opening 274 Horn 25 HVAC see Automatic climate control Hydroplaning 264 I Identification labels 430 Identification number Vehicle VIN 431 Ignition 40 Immobilizer 96 Indicator lamps see Lamps indicator and warning Infant and child restraint systems 83 Infant and child restraint systems see Children in the vehicle Inflation pressure see Tires Inflation pressure Inside door handle 111 Instrument cluster 26 136 Illumination brightness 136 Lamps 332 Language 156 Messages in the multifunction display 26 347 Multifunction display 139 Instrument lighting see Instrument cluster Illumination brightness Instrument panel see Instrument cluster Instruments and controls see Cockpit Interior lighting 134 Delayed switch off 161 Interior rear vie
348. play Place the gear selector lever in position P Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that the seat belt and or latch plate cannot get caught or pinched in the door or in the seat mechanism This can damage the seat belt and impair the effectiveness of the seat belt and or cause damage to the door and or door trim panel Such damage is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Damaged seat belts must be replaced Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center 63 Getting started Parking and locking Locking Exit the vehicle and close the doors and the trunk Locking with the SmartKey Press the lock button on the SmartKey page 38 With the trunk and all doors closed all turn signal lamps flash three times The locking knobs on the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed For more information see Locking and unlocking page 102 Warning G To prevent possible personal injury always keep hands and fingers away from the door openings when closing the doors Be espe cially careful when small children are around Before closing doors make sure that there is no possibility of someone getting caught in a door during closing Warning G When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlock
349. ponding rear side window will open completely Closing the door windows Pull switch 1 or 2 to the resistance point The corresponding door window will move upwards until you release the switch Closing the rear side windows if the hardtop is closed Close the door window Pull and hold switch 1 or 2 The corresponding rear side window will move upwards until you release the switch Fully opening the door windows Express open Press switch 1 or 2 past the resis tance point and release The corresponding door window opens completely i If the hardtop is open the respective rear side window will also open automatically Warning G If you pull and hold the switch up when clos ing the door window and upward movement of the door window is blocked by some ob struction including but not limited to arms hands fingers etc the automatic reversal will not operate i If the hardtop is open the respective rear side window will also open automatically 198 Controls in detail Power windows Fully closing the door windows Express close Pull switch 1 or 2 past the resis tance point and release The corresponding door window closes completely If the upward movement of the door win dow is blocked during the closing proce dure the door window will stop and open slightly Stopping windows Press or pull the respective switch again Closing the windows with KEYLESS GO Press and hold
350. pre viously set speed Distronic regulates only the distance be tween your vehicle and those directly ahead of it but does not register stationary objects in the road e g a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam a disabled vehicle an oncoming vehicle The driver must always be alert observe all traffic and intercede as required by means of steering or braking the vehicle Warning G Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy road conditions i If the message Distronic available again appears in the multifunction display dur ing driving the dirt e g slush has dissolved Distronic is available again if you reactivate it page 218 223 Controls in detail Driving systems Turns and bends In turns or bends Distronic may not detect a moving vehicle in front or it may detect one too soon This may cause your vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly Offset driving A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset from your direct line of travel may not be detected by Distronic There will be insuffi cient distance to the vehicle ahead Lane changing Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes There will be insufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle 224 Controls in detail Driving systems Narrow vehicles Because of their narrow profile the vehi cles traveling near the outer edges of the lane have not yet been detected by Distronic There will be insufficient dis tance
351. r gency operation mode In such a case the red brake warning lamp page 335 comes on and warning messages page 366 appear in the multifunction display while driving To brake the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the expected braking ef fect If necessary apply full pressure to the brake pedal Brakes are only applied to the front wheels Stopping distance is in creased If there is a malfunction in the electro hydraulic brake system we recom mend that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or ap propriate wheel lift dolly equipment A tow bar must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the recommended towing methods and the vehicle requires towing with all four wheels on the ground Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is only permissible for distances up to 30 miles 50 km and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph 50 km h For more infor mation see Towing the vehicle page 421 94 Safety and Security Driving safety systems The electro hydraulic brake system switch es off automatically approximately 2 minutes after you turned the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 or removed the SmartKey approximately 2 minutes after you pressed the KEYLESS GO start stop button to turn off the engine or power supply and opened the driver s door with driver s door
352. r arm against your neck or off your shoul der In a crash your body would move too far forward That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries The belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen which could se verely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen Never wear belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing such as eyeglasses pens keys etc as these might cause injuries Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdo men If the belt is positioned across your abdomen it could cause serious injuries in a crash Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another per son or other objects Belts should not be worn twisted In a crash you would not have the full width of the belt to manage impact forces The twisted belt against your body could cause injuries Pregnant women should also use a lap shoulder belt The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pres sure on the abdomen Never place your feet on the instrument panel dashboard or on the seat Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat When using a seat belt to secure infant or toddler restraints or children in booster seats always follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions 80 Safety and Security Occupant safety 1 Seat belt
353. r or passenger door is opened when the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 1 or the KEYLESS GO start stop button is pressed once when the brake pedal is depressed or when the park ing brake is released Failure to deactivate the system prior to maintenance will cause brake pistons to extend and brake fluid to leak which may result in injuries contu sions and acid burns Extended brake pis tons may also cause injury 95 Safety and Security Driving safety systems Notes on driving with the electro hydraulic brake system Following extended periods of only mi nor loads to your brake system you should occasionally apply the brakes when traveling at high speeds This im proves the grip of the brake pads After driving on wet or snow covered roads you should apply your brakes firmly before parking your vehicle This produces heat which serves to dry the brake disks and help prevent corro sion On long and steep grades shift to a lower gear gear range 1 2 or 3 to prevent the brakes from overheating and to reduce brake wear After hard braking it is advisable to drive on for some time so that the air stream will cool down the brakes fast er Only Mercedes Benz approved compo nents e g brake pads should be in stalled on your vehicle Brake pads not approved by Mercedes Benz may im pair the safety of your vehicle Warning G Be very careful not to endanger other road users when yo
354. r unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being over heated Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort wear unevenly increase stopping distance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris potholes etc Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems or brake failure i If you have overfilled the tire release tire in flation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the valve with e g a tip of a pen Then recheck the tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge 294 Operation Tires and wheels Reactivating the Run Flat Indicator The tire inflation pressure monitor must be reactivated in the following situations if you have changed the tire inflation pressure if you have replaced the wheels or tires if you have installed new wheels or tires Using the tire placard on the driver s door B pillar or if available the inside of the fuel filler flap make sure the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is cor rect Warning G When the multifunction display shows the message Tire pressure Check tires
355. rature has been reached Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P only when the vehicle is stopped Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty i For information on automatic program modes C or S see Automatic shift program page 173 Gear selector lever one touch gearshifting page 174 and Steering wheel gearshift control one touch gearshifting page 175 178 Controls in detail Automatic transmission Activating manual shift program Press program mode selector switch 1 repeatedly until the M for MANUAL program mode appears in the right multifunction display The transmission switches to the MANUAL program mode Automatic shifting is switched off The gear range is not limited You can change the gears manually when the gear selector lever is in position D You can upshift or downshift through the gears in succession Upshifting Briefly press the gear selector lever to the right in the D direction or Briefly pull right shift paddle 2 page 175 The transmission shifts to the next higher gear If instead of the manual program mode symbol M the symbol p appears in the right multifunction display page 169 shift to the next higher gear The fuel supply will otherwise be interrupted to prevent the engine f
356. rcement i The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is avail able The SOS button will flash and the message Call connected will appear in the multifunction dis play to indicate receipt of the door unlock com mand Once the vehicle is unlocked a Response Center specialist will attempt to establish voice contact with the vehicle occupants If the trunk recessed handle was pulled for more than 20 seconds before door unlock authoriza tion was received by the Response Center you must wait 15 minutes before pulling the trunk re cessed handle again i If the anti theft alarm or the tow away alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available See anti theft alarm system page 96 and tow away alarm page 98 251 Controls in detail Useful features Garage door opener The integrated remote control is capable of operating up to three separately controlled devices It provides a convenient way to re place up to three hand held remote con trols used to operate devices such as garage door openers gate openers or oth er devices compatible with HomeLink or some other systems Before the integrated remote control can be used it must be programmed to the ga rage door opener
357. rd braking reducing steering capability and extending the brak ing distance Warning G The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency be yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent acci dents including those resulting from exces sive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can pre vent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 89 Safety and Security Driving safety systems BAS The Brake Assist System BAS operates in emergency situations If you apply the brakes very quickly the BAS automatically provides full brake boost thereby poten tially reducing the braking distance Apply continuous full braking pressure until the emergency braking situation is over The ABS will prevent the wheels from locking When you release the brake pedal the brakes function again as normal The BAS is then deactivated ESP The Electronic Stability Program ESP is operational as soon as the engine is run ning and monitors the vehicle s traction force of adhesive friction between the tires and the road surface and handling The ESP recognizes
358. re they are clean and free of lint i When replacing batteries always replace both batteries The required replacement batteries Lithium type CR 2025 or equivalent are available at any authorized Mercedes Benz Center 396 Practical hints Replacing SmartKey batteries 3 Batteries 4 Contact spring Pull out batteries 3 Using a lint free cloth insert new bat teries 3 under contact springs 4 with the positive terminal side facing up Return battery compartment 2 into housing until it locks into place Slide mechanical key 1 back into SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Check the operation of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO as well as the KEYLESS GO function 397 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Replacing bulbs Bulbs Safe vehicle operation depends on proper exterior lighting and signaling It is there fore essential that all bulbs and lamp as semblies are in good working order at all times Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important Have headlamps checked and readjusted at regular intervals and when a bulb has been replaced See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for headlamp ad justment Warning G Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot Al low the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb Keep bulbs out of reach of children Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas A bulb can explode if you touch or move it when hot drop the bulb scratch the bul
359. requently have the cooling system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunctioning Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the instrument cluster page 27 If the coolant temperature is under 120 C you may continue driving to the nearest spe cialist workshop Avoid placing heavy loads on the engine e g by driving uphill as well as stop and go traffic Have the fan replaced as soon as possible Warning G Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts You can be seriously burned Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning Extended driving with this message and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cool ing system The engine will overheat causing major engine damage 374 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution Check doors 2 You are attempting to drive with one or more doors open Close the doors Vehicles with KEYLESS GO You are pressing the lock button on the door handle and at least one door is open Visit workshop Certain electronic systems are un able to relay information to the con trol system The following systems may have faile
360. restraint is installed please check installation Periodically check the 5 indicator lamp while driving to make sure the 5 indicator lamp is illuminated If the 5 indicator lamp goes out or remains out do not transport a child on the passenger seat until the system has been repaired A child in a rear fac ing child restraint on the passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the passenger front air bag inflates If you place a child in a forward facing child restraint on the passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible use the proper child restraint recom mended for the age size and weight of the child and secure child restraint with the vehicle s seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions For children larger than the typical 12 month old child the passenger front air bag may or may not be activated page 74 Warning G Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant During an accident they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Warning G Children too big for a toddler restraint must ride in seats using regular seat belts Posi tion the shoulder belt across chest and shoulder not face or neck A booster seat may be
361. restraint system Failure to follow these instructions can re sult in severe injuries to you or other occu pants If you sell your vehicle it is important that you make the buyer aware of this safety in formation Be sure to give the buyer this Operator s Manual Warning G It should be noted however that there is a possibility for a head thorax air bag related injury if occupants especially children are not properly seated or restrained when next to a head thorax air bag which needs to de ploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job To help avoid the possibility of injury please follow these guidelines 1 Occupants especially children should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door where the head thorax air bag inflates This could result in serious injuries or death should the head thorax air bag be triggered 2 Always sit nearly upright properly use the seat belts and for children 12 years old and under use an appropriately sized infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child 3 Always wear seat belts properly If you believe that even with the use of these guidelines it would be safer for your passenger seat occupants to have the pas senger side head thorax air bag deactivated then deactivation can be accomplished upon your written election to do so at an au thorized Mercedes Benz Center at an addi tional c
362. rical energy and therefore has only limited opera tion Considerably greater brake pedal force is required and the stop ping distance is increased Stop the vehicle in a safe location Adjust driv ing to be consistent with reduced braking re sponsiveness Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Cen ter 2 Brake wear The brake pads have reached their wear limit Have the brake pads replaced as soon as pos sible USA only Canada only 3 Reduced brake effect Start engine The battery has insufficient voltage and cannot supply sufficient power to the electro hydraulic brake sys tem Start the engine The message disappears when sufficient voltage is available Brake pad thickness must be visually checked by a qualified technician at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet Warning G Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide CO and inhaling it can cause un consciousness and lead to death Do not run the engine in confined areas such as a garage which are not properly ventilated 367 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution T Reduced brake effect Depress brake pedal fully The electro hydraulic brake system is in emergency operation mode Considerably greater brake pedal force is required and the stopping distance is increased The maximum spe
363. rk tronic system sensors page 326 Center approx 40 in 100 cm Corners approx 24 in 60 cm Center approx 48 in 120 cm Corners approx 32 in 80 cm During parking maneuvers pay special at tention to objects located above or below the height of the sensors e g planters or trailer hitches The Parktronic system will not detect such objects at close range and damage to your vehicle or the object may result Ultrasonic signals from outside sources e g truck air brakes car wash or jackhammers may impair the operation of the Parktronic system 230 Controls in detail Driving systems Minimum distance If the system detects an obstacle in this range all the distance warning segments illuminate and you hear a warning signal If the obstacle is closer than the minimum distance the actual distance may no long er be indicated by the system Warning indicators Visual signals indicate to the driver the rel ative distance between the sensors and an obstacle The warning indicator for the front area is located above the center air vents in the dashboard The warning indicator for the rear area is integrated in the rear trim Front area warning indicator 1 Left side of the vehicle 2 Right side of the vehicle Each warning indicator is divided into six yellow and two red distance segments for either side of the vehicle The Parktronic system is ready when the border around the indicator is
364. rk this vehicle in areas where com bustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re sult of vehicle movement before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always Keep right foot on brake pedal Firmly depress parking brake pedal Move the gear selector lever to position P Slowly release brake pedal When parked on an incline turn front wheels towards the road curb Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or press the start stop button vehicles with KEYLESS GO Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO and lock vehicle when leaving Set the parking brake whenever parking or leaving the vehicle In addition move gear selec tor lever to position P When parking on hills turn front wheels towards the road curb Warning G If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance or you suspect that possi ble damage to your vehicle has occurred you should turn on the hazard warning flash ers carefully slow down and drive with cau tion to an area which is a safe distance from the road Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody for possible damage If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe have the vehicle towed to the nearest Mercedes Benz Center or tire dealer
365. rom overrevving i The MANUAL program mode will not be stored When the engine is turned off with the MANUAL program mode selected the transmis sion will go to the automatic program mode C or S when the engine is restarted In the MANUAL program mode the trans mission will not upshift even if the engine has reached its overrevving range Shift up to the next gear before the engine has reached its over revving range Make absolutely certain that the engine speed does not reach the red marking on the tachometer page 26 Otherwise the en gine could be damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty i If you have selected the AMG menu in the control system and the engine reaches the over speed range in the manual shift program the col or of the display will switch to red and UP appears after the gear indicator advising you to upshift 179 Controls in detail Automatic transmission Downshifting Briefly press the gear selector lever to the left in the D direction or Briefly pull left shift paddle 1 page 175 The transmission shifts to the next lower gear Kickdown Using the kickdown when driving in the MANUAL program mode is not possible Deactivating manual shift program Press the program mode selector switch page 177 repeatedly until C or S appears in the right multifunction display or Restart the engine The transmission will go to the automatic program mo
366. rom plac ard minus combined weight of all occupants 1 1500 lbs 1 Occupant 1 175 lbs 175 lbs 1500 lbs 175 lbs 1325 lbs 2 1500 lbs 2 Occupant 1 175 lbs Occupant 2 195 lbs 370 lbs 1500 lbs 370 lbs 1130 lbs 290 Operation Tires and wheels Certification label Even after careful determination of the combined weight of all occupants cargo and the trailer tongue load if applicable page 290 as to not exceed the permis sible load limit you must make sure that your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehi cle Weight Rating GVWR and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for either the front or rear axle You can obtain the GVWR and GAWR from the Certification la bel The Certification Label can be found on the driver s door B pillar see Technical data page 430 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The total weight of the vehicle all occupants all cargo and the trailer tongue load page 290 must never exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The to tal allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear To assure that your vehicle does not ex ceed the maximum permissible weight limits GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle have the loaded vehicle including driver passengers and all cargo and if ap plicable trailer fully loaded weighed on a suitable commercial scale Trailer tongue load The tongue load of any trailer is an impor tant weight to
367. runk and lock the vehicle simultaneously from the outside using the KEYLESS GO locking closing switch 1 KEYLESS GO locking closing switch Make sure you have the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you Press switch 1 briefly With the doors closed the locking knobs in the doors move down and the trunk starts to close automatically All turn signal lamps flash three times to confirm locking once the trunk has closed completely The anti theft alarm system is activated 117 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Valet locking The lock is located next to the handle above the rear license plate recess 1 Neutral position 2 Locked Close the trunk page 113 Pull the mechanical key out of the SmartKey page 391 Insert the mechanical key in the trunk lid lock Turn the mechanical key clockwise to position 2 and remove the mechani cal key in that position to lock the trunk The trunk remains locked even when the vehicle is centrally unlocked Insert the mechanical key in the trunk lid lock Turn the mechanical key counterclock wise to neutral position 1 and remove the mechanical key in that position to unlock the trunk You can now open the trunk page 111 Trunk lid emergency release With the emergency release button the trunk can be opened from inside the trunk The emergency release button is located on the left side of the trunk 1 Emergency release button Briefly press emergenc
368. rwise seriously damage the brake system The ESP will only function properly if you use wheels of the recommended tire size page 435 i The cruise control and the Distronic sys tem deactivate automatically when the ESP is in operation page 220 91 Safety and Security Driving safety systems Electronic traction system The electronic traction system is a compo nent of ESP The electronic traction system improves the vehicle s ability to utilize available trac tion especially under slippery road condi tions by applying the brakes to a spinning wheel When you switch off the ESP the elec tronic traction system is still enabled Switching off the ESP To improve the vehicle s traction switch off the ESP in driving situations where it would be advantageous to have the drive wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip such as when driving with snow chains in deep snow in sand or gravel When you switch off the ESP the ESP does not stabilize the vehicle the engine output is not limited which allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip the electronic traction system will still apply the brakes to a spinning wheel the ESP continues to operate when you are braking you cannot activate the cruise control or the Distronic system the cruise control or the Distronic sys tem switch off if currently activated Warning G If yo
369. s page 365 Warning G No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction dis play is inoperative Contact your nearest au thorized Mercedes Benz Center As a result you will not be able to see infor mation about your driving conditions such as speed or outside temperature warn ing indicator lamps malfunction warning messages or the failure of any systems Driving characteristics may be impaired If you must continue to drive do so with added caution Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible i Switching on the ignition causes all instru ment cluster lamps except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated as well as the multifunction dis play to come on Make sure the lamps and the multifunction display are in working order before starting your journey 349 Practical hints What to do if Text messages Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution ABC Malfunction Stop car You have started driving although the vehicle level is still too low The vehicle is being raised The ABC message goes out after a few seconds Stop your vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so Wait until the message disappears from the multifunction display You may then drive off The vehicle is losing oil The ABC message is continuously shown Stop your vehicle in a
370. s correct Press button or on the mul tifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display page 139 Press the j or k button repeat edly until you see the current inflation pressures for each tire appear in the display or the following message ap pears in the display Tire pressure displayed after driving for a few minutes Press the reset button page 27 The following message will appear in the multifunction display Restart tire pressure monitor Press the button The following message will appear in the multifunction display Tire pressure monitor restarted After a few minutes driving the current tire inflation pressure values are ac cepted as reference values and then monitored If you wish to cancel activation Press the button Warning G It is the driver s responsibility to calibrate the TPMS on the recommended cold infla tion pressure Underinflated tires affect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You might lose control over the vehicle i Reactivate the TPMS after adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the inflation pressure rec ommended for the vehicle operating condition Tire pressure should only be adjusted on cold tires Observe the recommended tire inflation pressure on the placard on the driver s door B pillar page 286 Some vehicles may have supplemental tire pressure information for driv ing at hig
371. s 1 5 and 9 page 185 The control buttons are engaged The U symbol on the control buttons come on Air distribution and air vol ume are adjusted automatically Air recirculation mode Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the outside This setting cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the passenger compartment i The cooling remains switched on i Keep this setting selected only until the windshield is clear again Warning G Fogged windows impair visibility endanger ing you and others If the windows begin to fog on the inside switching off the air recirculation mode immediately should clear interior window fogging If interior window fogging persists make sure the air conditioning page 193 is activated or press button P 192 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Activating Briefly press button page 185 The indicator lamp on the button comes on Deactivating Briefly press button page 185 The indicator lamp on the button goes out At outside temperatures above 79 F 26 C the system will not automatically switch back to outside air Air recirculation mode with conve nience closing or opening feature Activating Press and hold button The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air recirculation mode is activated The windows will close i The air recirculation mode is a
372. s a spe cial seat belt retractor for the secure fas tening of child restraints To fasten a child restraint follow child re straint instructions for mounting Then pull the shoulder belt out completely and let it retract During the seat belt retraction a ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate that the special seat belt retractor is acti vated The belt is now locked Push down on child restraint to take up any slack To deactivate release seat belt buckle and let seat belt retract completely The seat belt can again be used in the usual man ner Warning G Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle even if they are secured in a child restraint system The children could injure themselves on parts of the vehicle be seriously or fatally injured through excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight The child restraint system s metal parts for example could become very hot and the child could be burned on these parts If children open a door they could injure other persons get out of the car and injure themselves or be injured by following traffic Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the passenger compartment unless they are firmly secured in place For more information please refer to the Useful features section page 233 through page 238 Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo increases a child s risk of injury in the e
373. s an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitor ing system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated Accord ingly when the low tire pressure telltale illu minates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significant ly underinflated tire causes the tire to over heat and can lead to tire failure Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehi cle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driv er s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is com bined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the mal function indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended 297 Opera
374. s are covered by the Mercedes Benz Parts and Accessories warranties copies of which are available at any Mercedes Benz Cen ter Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet have an authorized Mercedes Benz Center arrange for a re placement It will be mailed to you 430 Technical data Identification labels 1 Certification label includes Paintwork code Example certification label U S vehicles 2 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 3 Paintwork code Example certification label Canada vehicles 2 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 3 Paintwork code The vehicle identification number VIN is also embossed under a trim below the pas senger side rear storage compartment lid i Data shown on certification labels are for il lustration purposes only These data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustration Refer to certification label on ve hicle for actual data specific to your vehicle 431 Technical data Identification labels 4 Storage compartment lid 5 Trim 6 Vehicle Identification Number VIN below right rear storage compart ment Open storage compartment lid 4 Remove storage compartment trim 5 The VIN 6 is located on the metal strap above the floor carpet 7 Engine number engraved on engine 8 VIN visible lower edge of windshield 9 Emission control information label includes bo
375. s automati cally after major steering wheel move ments i To signal minor directional changes such as changing lanes press combination switch only to point of resistance and release The corre sponding turn signals will flash three times 57 Getting started Driving Windshield wipers The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column Combination switch 1 Switching on windshield wipers 2 Single wipe Wiping with windshield washer fluid Switch on the ignition page 39 Switching on windshield wipers Turn the combination switch in direc tion of arrow 1 to the desired position depending on the intensity of the rain 0 Windshield wipers off I Intermittent wiping II Normal wiper speed III Fast wiper speed Intermittent wiping The intermittent wiping interval is depen dent on the wetness of the windshield Turn the combination switch in direc tion of arrow 1 to position I After the initial wipe pauses between wipes are controlled by the rain sensor Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry Dust that accumulates on a windshield might scratch the glass and or damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on a dry windshield If it is necessary to operate the windshield wipers in dry weather conditions al ways operate the windshield wipers with wind shield washer fluid page 58 Do not leave windshield wipers in intermit tent setting when the
376. s drained Check the batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO page 105 and replace them if necessary page 395 Use the mechanical key to unlock the driv er s door page 391 and the trunk page 117 Have the vehicle batteries and their connec tions checked page 414 Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors page 393 If the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is malfunc tioning contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center 110 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Global locking using the lock button on the trunk lid 1 Lock button Press lock button 1 on the trunk lid With the trunk and all doors closed all turn signals flash three times The lock ing knobs in the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed Checking the batteries Press button or Battery check lamp 5 page 106 comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in order Loss of SmartKey with KEYLESS GO If you lose your SmartKey with KEYLESS GO you should do the following Have the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO deactivated by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Report the loss of the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO or the mechanical key to your car insurance company immedi ately Have the mechanical lock replaced if necessary Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to supply you with a replace ment i Vehicles with KEYLESS GO To prevent a possible inadvertent lockou
377. s from plastic parts coming loose in the event of air bag deployment Do not use oil wax or scouring agents on these parts Never apply strong force and only use a soft non scratching cloth when cleaning the surface Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry cloth or sponge Otherwise you may scratch or damage the sur face Never apply strong force and only use a soft non scratching cloth when cleaning the surface Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry cloth or sponge Otherwise you may scratch or damage the sur face 329 Operation Vehicle care Carpets Use Mercedes Benz approved Carpet and Fabric Care for cleaning the car pets Headliner Use a soft bristle brush or a dry sham poo cleaner in case of excessive dirt Seat belts Only use clear lukewarm water and soap Upholstery Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing clothing that have the tendency to give off coloring e g when wet etc may cause the upholstery to become permanently dis colored By lining the seats with a proper intermediate cover contact discoloration will be prevented Leather upholstery Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes Benz approved Leather Care Exercise particular care when cleaning per forated leather as its underside should not become wet Wood trims Dampen cloth using water and use damp cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle Th
378. s in this Operator s Manual might differ from your vehicle Optional equipment is also described in this manual including operating instruc tions wherever necessary Since they are special order items the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your vehicle If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator s Manual your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures The Operator s Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle Service and warranty information The Service and Warranty Information Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your Mercedes Benz including New Car Limited Warranty Emission System Warranty Emission Performance Warranty California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont only State Warranty Enforcement Laws Lemon Laws 11 Introduction Operator s Manual Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes Benz automobiles Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price if Mercedes Benz USA LLC and or its au thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or m
379. s is not permissible with 285 35 R18 97W 285 35 R18 97Y 285 35 ZR18 97Y 285 30 ZR19 98Y XL Extra Load If snow chains are mounted to the front wheels they may scrape against the body or axle components The tires or the vehicle could be damaged as a result i When driving with snow chains you may wish to deactivate the ESP page 91 before setting the vehicle in motion This will improve the vehicle s traction 319 Operation Maintenance Maintenance We strongly recommend that you have your vehicle serviced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet at the times called for by the maintenance service indi cator Failure to have the vehicle maintained in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet and the maintenance service indicator at the designated times mileage may result in vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Maintenance service indicator message The maintenance service indicator mes sage will notify you when your next mainte nance service is due Starting approximately 1 month before your next maintenance service is due one of the following messages will appear in the right multifunction display while you are driving or when you switch on the igni tion example service A Service A in XXXXX miles km Service A in XXX days Service A Due now The type of maintenance service due is in dicated in the left multifunction
380. s of tires and rims of the same type and make Tires must be of the correct size for the rim Break in new tires for approximately 60 miles 100 km at moderate speeds Regularly check the tires and rims for damage Dented or bent rims can cause tire inflation pressure loss and damage to the tire beads If vehicle is heavily loaded check tire inflation pressure and correct as required Do not allow your tires to wear down too far Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths under 1 8 in 3 mm When replacing individual tires you should mount new tires on the front wheels first on vehicles with same sized wheels all around Warning G Replace rims or tires with the same designa tion manufacturer and type as shown on the original part See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for further informa tion If incorrectly sized rims and tires are mounted The wheel brakes or suspension components can be damaged The operating clearance of the wheels and the tires may no longer be correct Warning G Worn old tires can cause accidents If the tire tread is badly worn or if the tires have sustained damage replace them When replacing rims only use genuine Mercedes Benz wheel bolts specified for the particular rim type Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and possibly an accident Retreaded tires are not tested or recom mended by Mercedes Benz since previous dama
381. sage function PULSE Switch on the ignition page 39 Shoulder region support Press or on switch 2 The air cushion inflates or deflates Lumbar region support Press k or j on rocker switch 1 This selects the air cushion you wish to adjust Press or on rocker switch 1 The air cushion inflates or deflates Side bolsters adjustment Press switch 3 to the right or left The lateral support increases or de creases Massage function PULSE You can reduce muscle tension during long trips by periodically using the massage function Press button 4 The indicator lamp on button 4 comes on The air cushions in the lumbar re gion inflate and deflate rhythmically i The massage function switches off automat ically after approximately 8 minutes The indica tor lamp goes out 123 Controls in detail Seats Seat heating Vehicles without seat ventilation The red indicator lamps on the switch indi cate the selected heating level The switch is located on the door control panel 1 Normal heating 2 Rapid heating Switch on the ignition page 39 Switching on seat heating Press lower switch position 1 A red indicator lamp on the switch comes on Switching off seat heating Press lower switch position 1 once more Switching on rapid seat heating Press upper switch position 2 Both red indicator lamps on the switch come on Switching off rapid seat heating
382. se situations Distronic will continue to maintain the set speed unless deactivated Distronic is designed and intended only to maintain a set speed and keep a set dis tance from moving objects in front of your vehicle Warning G The Resume function should only be oper ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ ously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed i USA only This device has been approved by the FCC as a Vehicle Radar System The radar sensor is in tended for use in an automotive radar system only Removal tampering or altering of the de vice will void any warranties and is not permitted by the FCC Do not tamper with alter or use in any non approved way Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment i Canada only This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Removal tampering or altering of the device will void any warranties and is not permitted by the FCC Do not tamper with alter or use in any non approved way Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment i The vehicle speed displayed in the speedom
383. self out when the vehicle is pushed is on a test stand Warning G When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsu pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Warning G You can open a locked door from inside at any time Open door only when conditions are safe to do so 120 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Locking Press central locking switch 1 If all the doors are closed the vehicle locks Unlocking Press central unlocking switch 2 The vehicle unlocks i If the vehicle was previously centrally locked using the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO it will not unlock using the central locking switch If the vehicle was previously locked with the cen tral locking switch while in the global remote control mode the complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is opened from the inside while in the selective remote control mode only the door opened from the inside is un locked 121 Controls in detail Seats Seats For more information on seat adjustment see Seat adjustment page 43 Moving the seats forward and backward You can move the seats forward and back to facilitate loading and unloading The switch is locate
384. servoir is located in the engine compartment 1 Washer fluid reservoir Fluid for the windshield washer system and the headlamp cleaning system is supplied from the windshield washer reservoir It has a capacity of approx 7 4 US qt 7 l During all seasons add MB Windshield Washer Concentrate MB SummerFit to water Premix the windshield washer fluid in a suitable container Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate MB SummerFit and water or commercially available premixed windshield washer sol vent antifreeze depending on ambient temperatures Always use washer solvent antifreeze where temperatures may fall below freezing point Failure to do so could re sult in damage to the washer sys tem reservoir For more information see Windshield and headlamp washer system page 452 Warning G Washer solvent antifreeze is highly flamma ble Do not spill washer solvent antifreeze on hot engine parts because it may ignite and burn You could be seriously burned Only use washer fluid which is suitable for plastic lenses Improper washer fluid can dam age the plastic lenses of the headlamps 283 Operation Tires and wheels Tires and wheels See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and winter operation They can also offer advice concerning tire service and purchase Important guidelines Only use set
385. settings for the steering wheel together with the settings for the seat position and the exterior rear view mirrors 46 Getting started Adjusting Adjusting steering wheel in or out Move stalk forward or back in direction of arrow 1 until a comfortable steer ing wheel position is reached with your arms slightly bent at the elbow Adjusting steering wheel up or down Move stalk up or down in direction of arrow 2 For more information see Heated steer ing wheel page 240 Easy entry exit feature This feature allows for easier entry into and exit from the vehicle When entering and exiting the vehicle the steering wheel is in its uppermost position The easy entry exit feature can be activat ed or deactivated in the Convenience sub menu of the control system page 162 With the easy entry exit feature activated the steering wheel will return to its last set position when you close the driver s door with the ignition switched on or insert the SmartKey into the starter switch or press the KEYLESS GO start stop button page 40 once with the driver s door closed Warning G You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel when the easy entry exit feature is activated To stop steering wheel adjustment do one of the following Move steering wheel adjustment stalk page 45 Press one of the memory position but tons or the memory button M
386. sible 137 Controls in detail Instrument cluster To brighten illumination Turn reset button 1 in the instrument cluster clockwise The instrument cluster illumination will brighten To dim illumination Turn reset button 1 in the instrument cluster counterclockwise The instrument cluster illumination will dim Coolant temperature gauge Trip odometer Make sure you are viewing the trip odometer display page 139 If it is not displayed press the j or k button on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the trip odometer appears Press and hold reset button 1 page 136 until the trip odometer is reset Warning G Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire You could be seriously burned Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Turn off the engine get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down Excessive coolant temperature triggers the coolant temperature warning lamp page 337 and a warning in the multifunction display page 371 The engine should not be operated with the cool ant temperature above 248 F 120 C Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty i During
387. snowflake sym bol marking on the tire sidewall These tires meet specific snow traction performance requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association RMA and the Rubber Association of Canada RAC and have been designed specifically for use in snow conditions Use of winter tires is the only way to achieve the maximum effec tiveness of the ABS and ESP in winter op eration For safe handling make sure all winter tires mounted are of the same make and have the same tread design When scraping ice or snow from the rear window be careful not to damage the sealing strip or apertures along the side of the window 317 Operation Winter driving Always observe the speed rating of the winter tires installed on your vehicle If the maximum speed for which your tires are rated is below the speed rating of your ve hicle you must place a notice to this effect where it will be seen by the driver Such no tices are available at your tire dealer or any authorized Mercedes Benz Center Block heater Canada only The engine is equipped with a block heat er The electrical cable may be installed at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Warning G Winter tires with a tread depth of less than 1 6 in 4 mm must be replaced They are no longer suitable for winter operation Warning G If you use your spare tire when winter tires are fitted on the other wheels be aware that the difference in tire characteristics may
388. sories to the lighter socket for example extensive connecting and disconnecting or using plugs that do not fit prop erly can damage the lighter socket With the socket damaged the lighter may no longer be able to be placed in the heating pushed in posi tion or the lighter may pop out too early with the lighter not hot enough To help avoid damaging the cigarette lighter socket we recommend connecting 12V DC elec trical accessories designed for use with the stan dard cigarette lighter plug type to the 12V power outlet page 242 in your vehicle whenever possible 241 Controls in detail Useful features Switching on Switch on the ignition page 39 Turn the switch at the tip of the stalk in direction of arrow 1 The steering wheel is heated Indicator lamp 3 comes on Switching off Turn switch at the tip of the stalk in direction of arrow 2 The steering wheel heating is switched off Indicator lamp 3 goes out For more information on the steering wheel see Multifunction steering wheel page 140 Load assist in the trunk To facilitate trunk loading after opening the trunk lid use the load assist feature to raise the retracted hardtop from its stor age position in the trunk i The steering wheel heating is temporarily suspended while indicator lamp 3 remains on when the temperature of the vehicle interior is above 86 F 30 C the temperature of the steering wheel is abov
389. splay to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in progress 250 Controls in detail Useful features Remote door unlock In case you have locked your vehicle unin tentionally e g SmartKey inside vehicle and the reserve SmartKey is not handy Contact the Mercedes Benz Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada You will be asked to provide your pass word which you provided when you completed the subscriber agreement Then return to your vehicle and pull the trunk recessed handle for a minimum of 20 seconds until the SOS button is flashing The message Call connected appears in the multifunction display As an alternative you may unlock the vehi cle via Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly after the completion of your acquaintance call The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with the remote door unlocking feature Stolen Vehicle Recovery services In the event your vehicle was stolen Report the incident to the police The police will issue a numbered incident report Pass this number on to the Mercedes Benz Response Center along with your password issued to you when you subscribed to the service The Response Center will then attempt to covertly contact the vehicle s Tele Aid system Once the vehicle is locat ed the Response Center will contact the local law enforcement and you The vehicle s location will only be provided to law enfo
390. st pro vide the steering braking and other driving inputs necessary to remain in control of the vehicle Warning G Distronic is a convenience system Its speed adjustment reduction capability is intended to make cruise control more effective and usable when traffic speeds vary It is not however intended to nor does it replace the need for extreme care The responsibili ty for the vehicle s speed distance to the preceding vehicle and most importantly brake operation to assure a safe stopping distance always rests with the driver Warning G Distronic requires familiarity with its opera tional characteristics We strongly recom mend that you review the following information carefully before operating the system Warning G Distronic cannot take street and traffic con ditions into account Only use Distronic if the road weather and traffic conditions make it advisable to travel at a constant speed 214 Controls in detail Driving systems Warning G Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slip pery roads Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control Distronic does not act upon adverse sight distance conditions Do not use Distronic during conditions of fog heavy rain snow or sleet Warning G Distronic cannot take weather conditions into account Switch off Distronic or do not switch it on if roads are slippery or covered with snow or ice The wheels c
391. stant mode When the engine is running and you shift from a driving position to position N or P the low beam headlamps will switch off with a three minute delay When the engine is running and you turn the exterior lamp switch to posi tion C the parking lamps switch on additionally turn the exterior lamp switch to posi tion B the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode The corresponding exterior lamps switch on page 128 USA only By default the daytime running lamp mode is deactivated Activate the daytime run ning lamp mode using the control system see Setting daytime running lamp mode USA only page 159 When the engine is running and you turn the exterior lamp switch to position C or B the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode The corresponding exterior lamps switch on page 128 Locator lighting and night security illumination Locator lighting and night security illumi nation are described in the control system section see Setting locator lighting page 160 and Setting night security il lumination page 160 131 Controls in detail Lighting Fog lamps Front fog lamps Switch on the low beam headlamps page 55 Pull out the exterior lamp switch to first stop The front fog lamps are switched on The green indicator lamp in the exterior lamp switch comes on page 128 Push in the
392. steps Switch on the ignition page 39 Press and hold the desired signal transmitter button 2 3 or 4 Do not release the button Indicator lamp 1 will begin to flash af ter 20 seconds Without releasing the signal transmitter button proceed with programming starting with step 3 Operation of integrated remote control Switch on the ignition page 39 Select and press the appropriate inte grated signal transmitter button 2 3 or 4 to activate the remote con trolled device The integrated remote control trans mitter continues to send the signal as long as the button is pressed up to 20 seconds Erasing the integrated remote control memory Switch on the ignition page 39 Simultaneously press and hold outer signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4 for approximately 20 seconds until the indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds The codes of all three channels are erased Programming tips If you are having difficulty programming the integrated remote control here are some helpful tips Check the frequency of hand held re mote control 5 typically located on the reverse side of the remote The in tegrated remote control is compatible with radio frequency devices operating between 288 399 MHz Put a new battery in hand held remote control 5 This will increase the likeli hood of the hand held remote control sending a faster and more accurate sig nal to the i
393. stic and rubber parts Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution Wipe with a cloth moistened in a luke warm solution The surface may temporarily change color If this is the case wait for it to dry Hard plastic trim items Use Mercedes Benz approved Interior Care a soft lint free cloth and apply with light pressure Steering wheel and gear selector lever Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes Benz approved Leather Care Only use acid free cleaning materials Acid may cause corrosion or damage the clear coat The vehicle should not be parked for an ex tended period of time immediately after it has been cleaned especially not after the wheel rims have been cleaned with wheel rim cleaner Wheel rim cleaners can lead to increased corro sion of the brake disks and brake pads There fore the vehicle s brake system should always be warmed up before it is parked after cleaning To do so please drive your vehicle for several minutes to allow the brakes to dry When applying Mercedes Benz approved Tire Care and Mercedes Benz approved Wheel Care products take care not to spray them on the brake disks Warning G Do not use cleaners containg solvents or cockpit care sprays to clean the cockpit or the steering wheel boss Cleaners contain ing solvents will make the surface porous and vehicle occupants could suffer serious injurie
394. switch 2 Indicator lamp Switching off Press Parktronic switch 1 Indicator lamp 2 comes on Switching on Press Parktronic switch 1 once more Indicator lamp 2 goes out Parktronic system malfunction If only the red distance segments illumi nate and an acoustic warning sounds there is a malfunction in the Parktronic system The Parktronic system will auto matically switch off after 20 seconds and the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch comes on Have the Parktronic system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible i The Parktronic system switches on automat ically when you switch on the ignition page 39 232 Controls in detail Driving systems If only the red distance segments illumi nate and no acoustic warning sounds the Parktronic system sensors are dirty or there is an interference from other radio or ultrasonic signals The Parktronic system will automatically switch off after 20 seconds and the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch comes on Switch off the ignition page 39 Clean the Parktronic system sensors page 326 Switch on the ignition page 39 or Check the Parktronic system operation at another location to rule out interfer ence from outside radio or ultrasonic signals 233 Controls in detail Useful features Useful features Storage compartments Glove box 1 Glove box lid release 2 Glove box lid Opening glove box Pr
395. t the trunk lid will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is recognized inside the trunk When the hardtop is retracted it must be com pletely lowered in the trunk before the trunk lid can be closed page 242 i You can also lock the vehicle using the lock button on an outside door handle page 64 i If battery check lamp 5 page 106 does not come on briefly during check then the SmartKey batteries are discharged Replace the batteries page 395 You can obtain the required batteries at any authorized Mercedes Benz Center i If the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle pressing the or button will lock or unlock the vehicle according ly 111 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Opening the doors from the inside You can open a locked door from the in side Open door only when conditions are safe to do so 1 Locking knob 2 Inside door handle Pull on inside door handle 2 in direc tion of arrow If the door was locked locking knob 1 will move up Opening the trunk You can open the trunk if the vehicle is sta tionary and the retractable hardtop is fully opened or closed A minimum height clearance of 6 2 ft 1 88 m is required to open the trunk lid i If you open a door the side windows on that side of the vehicle will lower slightly The win dows close again when you close the door i If the vehicle has previously been locked with the Smart
396. t belt force limiters or air bags or their wiring as well as tampering with in terconnected electronic systems can lead to the restraint systems no longer function ing as intended Air bags or emergency tensioning devices for example could deploy inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents although the de celeration threshold for air bag deployment is exceeded Therefore never modify the re straint systems Do not tamper with elec tronic components or their software Warning G In the event that the 1 indicator lamp comes on during driving or does not come on at all the SRS self check has detected a malfunction For your safety we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately to have the system checked otherwise the SRS may not deploy when needed in an accident which could result in serious or fatal injury or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnec essarily which could also result in injury In addition improper repair work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inopera tive or causing unintended air bag deploy ment Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians Con tact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to accommodate a person with disabilities contact your local authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call our Customer Assistance Center at 1 800 FOR MERCedes 1 800 367 6372 for details 68
397. t side marker lamp is malfunctioning Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Parking lamp front left Auxiliary bulb on The front left parking or standing lamp is malfunctioning An auxiliary bulb has been brought into use Replace the bulb as soon as possible page 397 Parking lamp front right Auxiliary bulb on The front right parking or standing lamp is malfunctioning An auxiliary bulb has been brought into use Replace the bulb as soon as possible page 397 Rear foglamp left The left rear fog lamp is malfunc tioning Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Reverse lamp left The left backup lamp is malfunc tioning Replace the bulb as soon as possible page 397 Reverse lamp right The right backup lamp is malfunc tioning Replace the bulb as soon as possible page 397 Turn signal left mirror The turn signal in the driver s side exterior rear view mirror is malfunc tioning This message will only ap pear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible 383 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution Turn signal right mirror The turn signal in the passenger side exterior rear view mirror is mal functioning This message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have st
398. t the mechanical key into the trunk lid lock until it stops Turn the mechanical key counterclock wise to position 1 The trunk is unlocked Pull handle 2 and lift lid Turn the mechanical key back and re move it from the trunk lid lock Unlocking the glove box Lockable storage areas in the passenger compartment include the glove box the storage compartment under the armrest the rear storage compartments If these cannot be unlocked by means of the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO use the mechanical key to unlock the glove box 1 Separately unlocking the glove box Slide mechanical key out of SmartKey housing page 391 Insert the mechanical key into the glove box lock and turn it to position 1 You can now open the glove box i To unlock the remaining storage compart ments the cause for the malfunction of the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be determined and corrected see page 104 and page 109 393 Practical hints Locking unlocking in an emergency Locking the vehicle If you cannot lock the vehicle with the SmartKey lock it with the mechanical key as follows Close the passenger door and the trunk Press the central locking switch in the center console page 119 Check whether the locking knob on the passenger door has moved down If necessary push it down manually Remove the mechanical key from of the SmartKey page 391 Check whether t
399. t tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You may lose control of the vehicle Contin ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces sive heat build up and possibly a fire 365 Practical hints What to do if Symbol messages Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution The battery is no longer charging Possible causes alternator malfunctioning broken poly V belt Do not forget that the brake system requires electrical energy and may be operating with restricted capa bility Considerably greater brake pedal force is required and the stop ping distance is increased Stop the vehicle immediately in a safe loca tion and check the poly V belt If it is broken Do not continue to drive Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If it is in order Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking respon siveness There is a malfunction in the elec tronic system Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible 366 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution Battery Alternator Stop car The battery is malfunctioning The electro hydraulic brake system requires elect
400. tKey in the starter switch to position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or press the start stop button vehicles with KEYLESS GO Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO and lock vehicle when leaving 61 Getting started Parking and locking Parking brake 1 Release handle 2 Parking brake pedal Step firmly on parking brake pedal 2 When the engine is running the indica tor lamp USA only or 3 Canada only in the instrument cluster will be illuminated Switching off headlamps Turn the exterior lamp switch to posi tion M page 55 For more information see Exterior lamp switch page 128 Warning G When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could release the parking brake and or move the gear selector lever from position P either of which could result in an accident and or serious injury Warning G Getting out of your vehicle with the gear se lector lever not fully engaged in position P is dangerous Also when parked on an incline position P alone may not prevent your vehi cle from moving possibly hitting people or objects Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P page 170 When parked on an incline also turn front w
401. take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could move the gear selector lever from position P which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury 172 Controls in detail Automatic transmission Stopping When you stop briefly e g at traffic lights Leave the transmission in gear Hold the vehicle with the brake When you stop longer with the engine idling and or on a hill Set the parking brake Move the gear selector lever to position P Maneuvering When you maneuver in tight areas e g when pulling into a parking space Control the vehicle speed by gradually releasing the brakes Accelerate gently Never abruptly step on the accelerator Working on the vehicle Gear ranges With the gear selector lever in position D and driving in the automatic shift program C or S page 173 you can select a gear range for the automatic transmission to operate within Gear selector lever page 174 You can limit the gear range by pressing the gear selector lever to the left D and reverse the gear range limit by pressing the gear selector lever to the right D Steering wheel gearshift control page 175 You can limit the gear range by pulling the left gearshift paddle on the steering wheel gearshift control and reverse the gear range limit by pulling the right gearshift paddle on the st
402. tarter switch Vehicles with KEYLESS GO Turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS GO button on the gear selector lever once page 62 Open the driver s door this puts the starter switch in position 0 same as with the SmartKey re moved from the starter switch The driver s door then can be closed again Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the roadway Mounting the spare wheel i Open door only when conditions are safe to do so Warning G The dimensions of the spare wheel are dif ferent from those of the road wheels As a result the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a mounted spare wheel Adapt your driving style accordingly The spare wheel is for temporary use only When driving with spare wheel mounted en sure proper tire inflation pressure and do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph 80 km h Drive to the nearest Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible to have the spare wheel replaced with a regular road wheel Never operate the vehicle with more than one spare wheel mounted Do not switch off the ESP when a spare wheel is mounted 406 Practical hints Flat tire Preparing the vehicle Prepare the vehicle as described page 405 Turn spare wheel bracket counter clockwise to loosen Take the spare wheel out of the trunk page 389 Removing tensioning straps vehicles with 19 spare wheel only A 19 spare wheel has t
403. tch position 0 or 1 Otherwise the ESP will immediately be en gaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground the gear selector lever must be in position N and the SmartKey must be in starter switch position 2 When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground or the front axle raised the vehicle may be towed only for distances up to 30 miles 50 km and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph 50 km h To be certain to avoid a possibility of damage to the transmission however we recommend the drive shaft be disconnected at the rear axle drive flange for any towing beyond a short tow to a nearby garage Warning G If circumstances require towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground always tow with a tow bar if the engine will not run there is a malfunction in the electro hydraulic brake system there is a malfunction in the power sup ply or in the vehicle s electrical system as that will be necessary to adequately con trol the towed vehicle Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground make certain that the SmartKey is in starter switch position 2 If the SmartKey is left in starter switch position 0 for an extended period of time it can no longer be turned in the switch In this case the steering is locked To unlock re move SmartKey from starter switch and re insert 422 Practical hints Towing the vehicle Warning G
404. ter will reduce the air volume to the interior If the vehicle interior is hot ventilate the interior before driving off The automatic climate control will then adjust the interior temperature to the set value much faster Keep the air intake grille in front of the wind shield free of snow and debris When the retractable hardtop is closed do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the air flow through exhaust slots below the rear win dow 187 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Deactivating the automatic climate control system Deactivating Press button page 185 The indicator lamp on the button comes on Reactivating Press button page 185 The indicator lamp on the button goes out The previous settings are in effect again or Turn one of the temperature controls on the automatic climate control panel page 185 The indicator lamp on button goes out Operating the automatic climate control system in automatic mode Air distribution and air volume can be adjusted automatically by the automatic climate control system You can also ad just the settings for air distribution and air volume manually Warning G When the automatic climate control system is switched off the outside air supply and circulation are also switched off Only choose this setting for a short time when the retractable hardtop is closed Otherwise the windows could fog up impairing
405. test ing intervals As with any other battery disconnect the con sumer battery if you do not intend to operate your vehicle for an extended period of time to prevent battery discharge or connect an acces sory battery charge unit expressly approved by Mercedes Benz for your vehicle model to main tain the battery charge Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for further information 415 Practical hints Batteries The factory equipped VRLA battery is leak proofed Only use a battery as replacement that has the same security features and is of identical size voltage and capacity as the factory equipped battery The battery the battery ventilation and the later al plug must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation Warning G Failure to follow these instructions can re sult in severe injury or death Never lean over batteries while connecting you might get injured Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes skin or clothing In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary A battery will also produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep flames or sparks away from battery avoid improper connection of jumper cables smoking etc Never loosen or detach battery terminal clamps while the engine is running or the SmartKey is in the starter switch Otherwise the alternator
406. tested and approved by Mercedes Benz Please refer to the Factory Approved Ser vice Products pamphlet or inquire at your Mercedes Benz Center Warning G Comply with all valid regulations with re spect to handling storing and disposing of service fluids Otherwise you could endan ger persons or the environment Keep service fluids out of the reach of chil dren If a service fluid is swallowed contact a phy sician immediately Model Capacity Fuels coolants lubricants etc Engine with oil filter SL 550 SL 600 SL 55 AMG SL 65 AMG 9 0 US qt 8 5 l 8 5 US qt 8 0 l 9 0 US qt 8 5 l 8 5 US qt 8 0 l Approved engine oils Automatic transmission SL 550 SL 600 SL 55 AMG SL 65 AMG 9 5 US qt 9 0 l 8 0 US qt 7 5 l 9 1 US qt 8 6 l 8 0 US qt 7 5 l MB Automatic Transmission Fluid 445 Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Model Capacity Fuels coolants lubricants etc Rear axle SL 550 SL 600 SL 55 AMG SL 65 AMG 1 3 US qt 1 2 l 1 3 US qt 1 2 l 1 3 US qt 1 2 l 1 3 US qt 1 2 l Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90 Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90 Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90 Hypoid gear oil SAE 75 W 140 Hydraulic system for active body control ABC approx 4 0 US qt 3 8 l MB Hydraulic Fluid Power steering approx 1 1 US qt 1 0 l MB Power Steering Fluid Pentosin CHF 11S Front wheel hubs approx 3 0 oz 85 g each High temperature roller bearing grease
407. th federal and California certification exhaust emission stan dards a Vacuum line routing diagram label i When ordering parts please specify vehicle identification and engine number 432 Technical data Layout of poly V belt drive SL 550 1 Idler pulley 2 Idler pulley 3 Automatic belt tensioner 4 ABC tandem pump pump for power steering assistance and ABC chassis 5 Air conditioning compressor 6 Crankshaft 7 Coolant pump 8 Generator alternator SL 55 AMG The SL 55 AMG has two poly V belts belt one shown in purple belt two shown in black 1 Idler pulley 2 Automatic belt tensioner 3 ABC tandem pump pump for power steering assistance and ABC chassis 4 Air conditioning compressor 5 Crankshaft 6 Coolant pump 7 Generator alternator 8 Idler pulley 9 Automatic belt tensioner a Supercharger SL 600 SL 65 AMG 1 Automatic belt tensioner 2 ABC tandem pump pump for power steering assistance and ABC chassis 3 Air conditioning compressor 4 Crankshaft 5 Coolant pump 6 Generator alternator 7 Idler pulley 8 Idler pulley 9 Idler pulley 433 Technical data Engine Engine Model SL 550 230 471 1 1 The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment SL 600 230 477 1 Engine 273 275 Mode of operation 4 stroke engine gasoline injection 4 stroke engine gasoline injection No of
408. th the SmartKey see Turning off with the SmartKey page 62 Warning G Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide CO and inhaling it can cause un consciousness and possible death Do not run the engine in confined areas such as a garage which are not properly ventilated If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving have the cause determined and corrected immediately If you must drive under these conditions drive with at least one window fully open i You can also use the touch start function Turn the SmartKey to position 3 and release it again immediately The engine then starts auto matically 53 Getting started Driving Starting with KEYLESS GO You can start your vehicle without the SmartKey in the starter switch using the KEYLESS GO start stop button on the gear selector lever KEYLESS GO start stop button 1 USA only 2 Canada only Make sure the gear selector lever is set to P Depress the brake pedal during the starting procedure Do not depress ac celerator Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button once The engine starts if the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is in the vehicle For information on turning off the engine with KEYLESS GO see Turning off with KEYLESS GO page 62 Starting difficulties If the engine does not start as described carry out the following steps If you ar
409. the door window by pulling and holding the switch by pressing and holding button on the SmartKey by pressing and holding the lock button ve hicles with KEYLESS GO on an outside door handle by pressing and holding the re tractable hardtop switch or by pressing and holding button on the climate control panel the automatic reversal function will not operate When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsu pervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and or serious personal injury i Depending on the current position the win dows may also open or close when the air recir culation button on the control panel of the automatic climate control page 191 is pressed and held i After switching off the ignition page 39 or removing the SmartKey from the starter switch the windows can be operated until you open a door for at least 5 minutes if no door was opened 197 Controls in detail Power windows Opening the door windows Press switch 1 or 2 to the resistance point The corresponding door window will move downwards until you release the switch Opening the rear side windows when the hardtop is closed Open the door window Press switch 1 or 2 to the resistance point again The corres
410. the emergency call is concluded Warning G If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an emergency call e g the rele vant cellular phone network is not available The message Call failed appears in the multifunction display for approximately 10 seconds Should this occur assistance must be sum moned by other means Warning G If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the vehicle e g smoke or fire in the vehicle ve hicle in a dangerous road location please do not wait for voice contact after you have pressed the emergency button Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca tion The Response Center will automatically contact local emergency officials with the vehicle s approximate location if they re ceive an automatic SOS signal and cannot make voice contact with the vehicle occu pants 247 Controls in detail Useful features Roadside Assistance button The Roadside Assistance button is located below the center armrest cover 1 Roadside Assistance button Press and hold button 1 for longer than 2 seconds A call to a Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will be initiated The button will flash while the call is in progress The message Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted When
411. the passenger classification sensed by the OCS page 72 the 5 indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out If above conditions are not met the system is not working properly Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Warning G If the 5 indicator lamp remains out even after performing the above correc tive steps do not have any children 12 years old and under and other small individuals use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired 358 Practical hints What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution Front passenger airbag disabled See Oper Manual The passenger front air bag is deactivated while driving even though an adult or someone larger than a small individual is occupying the front passenger seat Forces acting on the seat may make the system sense a decrease in weight Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the front passenger seat for the following Switch off the ignition page 39 Have the passenger vacate the seat and exit the vehicle Keep the seat unoccupied close the passenger door and switch on the ignition page 39 Monitor the 5 indicator lamp between the center air vents page 76 and the multifunction display in the instru ment cluster page 139 for the following Continued on next page 359 Practical hints What to do if L
412. ther than recommended brake fluid is used the braking properties of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe braking is substantially impaired This could result in an accident Be certain to read and observe the warning notices on brake pad replacement page 94 When driving down long and steep grades relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use the engine s braking power This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear 262 Operation Driving instructions High performance brake system AMG vehicles only The high performance brake system is de signed to operate under the extremely high operating demands required to accommo date the performance capabilities of the vehicle The brakes may produce a squeak ing type noise depending on the vehicle speed brake force applied ambient conditions e g temperature and humidity As with any brake system the wear of indi vidual brake system components such as brake pads or disks strongly depends on your driving style and the conditions under which you operate the vehicle Thus a driv ing style calling for high demand braking will cause your vehicle s brakes to wear more quickly Driving off Apply the brakes to test them briefly after driving off Perform this procedure only when the road is clear of other traffic Warm up the engine smoothly Do not place full load on the engine until the oper a
413. til you see the AMG menu Press button j repeatedly until you see the vehicle supply voltage 1 Vehicle supply voltage 2 Gear indicator i This function is only available in AMG vehicles i The engine oil temperature symbol flashes if the engine oil temperature has not yet reached 80 C During this time avoid driving at full engine speed Function Page Vehicle supply voltage 146 RACETIMER 147 Overall analysis 148 Lap analysis 149 i If the engine reaches the overspeed range in the manual shift program the menu will be shown in red In addition you will see UP next to gear indicator 2 as a reminder to upshift 147 Controls in detail Control system RACETIMER The RACETIMER allows you to time and save driving stretches in hours minutes and seconds Press button or repeatedly until you see the AMG menu Press button j repeatedly until you see the RACETIMER 1 Lap 2 RACETIMER 3 Gear indicator Starting the RACETIMER Press button The timer starts Displaying intermediate time Press button while the timer is running The intermediate time is shown for 5 seconds Stopping the RACETIMER Press button The timer stops Saving lap time and starting a new lap Press button while the timer is running The intermediate time will be shown for 5 seconds i You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is running or the starter switch is in position 2 page 3
414. ting temperature has been reached When starting off on a slippery surface do not allow a drive wheel to spin for an ex tended period with the ESP switched off Doing so may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Warning G New vehicle brake pads and discs and replacement brake pads and discs may take several hundred miles of driving until they provide optimum braking efficiency Until that time you may need to use increased brake pedal pressure while braking Please be aware of this and adjust your driving and braking accordingly during this break in period Excessive high demand braking will cause correspondingly high brake wear Please be attentive to the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster and brake condition mes sages in the multifunction display Especial ly for high performance driving it is important to maintain and have the brake system checked regularly Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear 263 Operation Driving instructions Parking Tires Treadwear indicators TWI are required by law These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and be come visible at a tread depth of approxi mately 1 16 in 1 6 mm at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced Warning G Do not pa
415. ting the vehicle status message memory menu in the control system page 152 displays both cleared and uncleared messages High priority messages appear in the mul tifunction display in red color Certain messages of high priority cannot be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button page 26 or but ton j k or on the multifunction steering wheel Other messages of high priority and mes sages of less immediate priority can be cleared from the multifunction display us ing the reset button or button j k or on the multifunction steer ing wheel They are then stored in the vehi cle status message memory page 152 Remember that clearing a message will not correct the condition that caused the mes sage to appear Warning G All categories of messages contain impor tant information which should be taken note of and where a malfunction is indicated ad dressed as soon as possible at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center Failure to repair condition noted may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty or result in property dam age or personal injury 348 Practical hints What to do if On the pages that follow you will find a compilation of the most important warning and malfunction messages that may ap pear in the multifunction display For your convenience the messages are di vided into two sections Text messages page 349 Symbol message
416. tion Prior to operating the vehicle the driver should check and adjust the seat height seat position fore and aft and seat back rest angle if necessary to ensure adequate control reach and comfort The head re straint should also be adjusted for proper height See also the section on air bags page 68 for proper seat positioning In addition adjust the steering wheel to ensure adequate control reach operation and comfort Both the interior and exterior rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rear vision Fasten seat belts Infants and small chil dren should be seated in a properly se cured restraint system that complies with U S Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan dard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 With the memory switch you can store up to three different settings The following settings are stored when us ing the buttons on the driver s door Driver s seat and backrest position Steering wheel position Driver s side exterior rear view mirror position Passenger side exterior rear view mir ror position The following settings are stored when us ing the buttons on the passenger door Passenger seat and backrest position The memory switch is located on the door control panel M Memory button 1 2 3 Stored positions Switch on the ignition page 39 or Open the respective door Warning G Do not activate the memory function on the driver s sid
417. tion Tires and wheels Reactivating the TPMS The TPMS must be reactivated when you have adjusted the tire inflation pressure to a new level e g because of different load or driving conditions The TPMS is then recalibrated to the current tire inflation pressures Using the tire placard on the driver s door B pillar page 286 or if avail able the supplemental tire pressure information on the inside of the fuel fill er flap page 271 make sure the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is cor rect Press button or on the mul tifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display menu ap pears in the multifunction display page 145 Press the j or k button repeat edly until you see the following mes sage Tire pressure monitor active Menu R button TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of in compatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly i If a condition causing the TPMS to malfunc tion develops it may take up to 10 minutes for the system to signal a malfunction using the TPMS telltale flashing and illumination se quence The telltale extinguishes after a few
418. tivating With the SmartKey Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 0 or remove it from the starter switch Press button T page 185 The indicator lamp on the button comes on With KEYLESS GO Turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop button and open the driver s door with the driver s door open the starter switch is in posi tion 0 same as with the SmartKey re moved from the starter switch Press button T page 185 The indicator lamp on the button comes on If the 2 button on the automatic climate control panel starts to flash this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant The compressor has turned off The air conditioning cannot be turned on again Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center i How long the system will provide heating de pends on the coolant temperature and the se lected temperature The blower will run at low speed regardless of the air distribution control setting 195 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Deactivating Press button T page 185 The indicator lamp on the button goes out The residual heat is automatically turned off when the ignition is switched on after about 30 minutes if the battery voltage drops Ventilated glove box The glove box has its own air vents that al low for cooling ventilation when the auto matic climate control syst
419. tor fan may be broken Immediately add coolant to prevent engine from overheating page 280 Have the cooling system checked If the coolant temperature is below 248 F 120 C you can continue driving to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Avoid high engine loads e g driving uphill and stop and go driving D The red coolant warning lamp comes on while driving and you hear a warning sound The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 F 120 C Stop in a safe location as soon as pos sible and allow the engine and coolant to cool down 338 Practical hints What to do if During severe operating conditions e g stop and go traffic the coolant tempera ture may rise close to 248 F 120 C Warning G Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire You could be seriously burned Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the engine hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Turn off the engine get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248 F 120 C Do ing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty 339 Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible
420. transmission selects indi vidual gears automatically depending on the gear selector lever position D page 170 with gear ranges page 172 the selected program mode C S page 173 or MANUAL C S SL 55 AMG and SL 65 AMG only page 177 the position of the accelerator pedal page 171 the vehicle speed i During the brief warm up transmission up shifting is delayed This allows the catalytic con verter to heat up more quickly to operating temperature 169 Controls in detail Automatic transmission 1 Current gear range gear selector lever position 2 Current program mode The current gear range gear selector lever position and program mode C S or M C S appear in the right multifunction display When the gear selector lever is in position D you can influence transmission shifting by limiting the gear range changing gears manually Warning G It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Allow engine to warm up under low load use Do not place full load on the engine until the op erating temperature has been reached Shift into revers
421. tteries SmartKey 395 High beam bulbs 400 Low beam bulbs 400 Rear lamp bulbs 398 402 Wiper blades 403 Reset button 27 Resetting All functions control system 153 Fuel consumption statistics 164 Trip odometer 137 Restraint systems 66 Emergency Tensioning Device ETD 81 Messages in the multifunction display 361 Seat belts 66 77 Resume function Cruise control 212 Distronic 220 Retractable hardtop Closing SmartKey 201 Closing switch 200 Convenience feature 201 Locking after raising lowering 202 Opening SmartKey 201 Opening switch 200 Problems when operating 203 Summer opening feature 201 Rim 313 Roll bar 81 Lowering 82 Messages in display 384 Raising 82 Warning lamp 29 Roll bar buttons 32 RON 272 Rubber parts cleaning 328 Run Flat Indicator Canada only 293 S Satellite radio 150 Seat belt force limiter 81 Seat belts 49 66 77 Cleaning 329 Messages in the multifunction display 361 Warning lamp 341 Seat heating Switching on 123 Seat ventilation 125 Switching on 125 465 Index Seating capacity 287 Seats Adjusting height 43 Adjusting lumbar support 122 Adjusting shoulder support 122 Heating 123 Massage function 122 Moving 121 Self test OCS 76 Service Basic service Service A 319 Batteries 414 Extended service Service B 319 Types 319 Service life tires 284 Service System see Maintenance Settings Clock 157 Convenience functions
422. ttings menu Use the Time submenu to change the time and date settings The following functions are available Synchronizing time with head unit Move the selection marker with the or button to the Time submenu Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Time syncron with head unit appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Function Page Synchronizing time with head unit 157 Setting the time hours 158 Setting the time minutes 158 158 Controls in detail Control system Press or enable or disable this feature When you set this feature to On the time displayed in the multifunction display is automatically synchronized with the time of the COMAND system Setting the time hour This function is only available if the func tion Time syncron with head unit page 157 has been set to Off The time is then not set automatically by the COMAND and must be set manually if re quired Move the selection marker with the or button to the Time submenu Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Set time Hour appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the hour setting Press button or to set the hour Setting the time minutes This function is only available if the func tion Time sync with head unit page 157 has been set to Off The time is then not set automatically by the COMAND an
423. u apply the brakes 96 Safety and Security Anti theft systems Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents unauthorized persons from starting your vehicle Activating With the SmartKey Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch With KEYLESS GO Press the start stop button on the gear selector lever once The engine is turned off Open the driver s door Deactivating With the SmartKey Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 2 page 40 With KEYLESS GO Switch on the ignition page 41 Anti theft alarm system Once the alarm system has been armed a visual and audible alarm is triggered when someone opens a door the trunk lid the hood a storage compartment in the rear the glove box the storage compartment under the armrest The alarm will stay on even if the activat ing element a door for example is imme diately closed i Starting the engine will also deactivate the immobilizer In case the engine cannot be started yet the vehicle s battery is charged the system is not operational Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call 1 800 FOR MERCedes in the USA or 1 800 387 0100 in Canada 97 Safety and Security Anti theft systems The alarm system will also be triggered when someone attempts to raise the vehicle unlocking and opening the driver s door with the mechanical key someone opens a door from the inside someone opens th
424. u are driving too fast the electronic traction system cannot reduce the risk of an accident The electronic traction system cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle Warning G ESP should not be switched off during nor mal driving other than in the circumstances described below Disabling of the system will reduce vehicle stability in standard driv ing maneuvers Do not switch off the ESP when a spare wheel is mounted Switch on the ESP immediately if the aforementioned circumstances do not apply anymore i When the ESP is switched off and one or more drive wheels are spinning the ABS ESP warning lamp v in the speedometer flashes However the ESP will then not stabilize the vehicle 92 Safety and Security Driving safety systems The switch is located in the lower part of the center console 1 ESP switch Press ESP switch 1 until the ABS ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster comes on The ESP is deactivated Switching on the ESP Press ESP switch 1 The ABS ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster goes out You are now again in normal driving mode with the ESP switched on Electro hydraulic brake system The electro hydraulic brake system com bines a hydraulic brake circuit with elec tronically controlled brake servo assistance You have increased braking safety and improved braking comfort Warning G When the ABS ES
425. ue acc to SAE J 1349 530 lb ft 2600 4000 rpm 720 Nm 2600 4000 rpm 738 lb ft 2000 4000 rpm 1000 Nm 2000 4000 rpm Maximum engine speed 6500 rpm 5950 rpm Firing order 1 5 4 2 6 3 7 8 1 12 5 8 3 10 6 7 2 11 4 9 Poly V belt 2462 mm 1289 mm 2335 mm 435 Technical data Rims and tires Rims and tires Only use tires which have been tested and approved by Mercedes Benz Tires approved by Mercedes Benz are developed to provide best possible performance in conjunction with the driving safety systems on your vehicle such as ABS or ESP Tires specially developed for your vehicle and tested and approved by Mercedes Benz can be identified by finding the following on the tire s sidewall MO Mercedes Benz Original equipment tires AMG vehicles Does not apply to all approved tires on AMG vehicles For information on tested and ap proved tires for AMG vehicles contact an au thorized Mercedes Benz Center MOE Mercedes Benz Original Extended tires with limited run flat characteristics original equipment tires Using tires other than those approved by Mercedes Benz may result in damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty i For information on driving with MOExtended tires see MOExtended system page 301 Using tires other than those approved by Mercedes Benz can have detrimental effects such as poor handling characteristics increased noise increased fuel consumption
426. uel consumption statistics after start 164 Fuel consumption statistics since last reset 164 Distance to empty 165 i The last function called up will reappear the next time you enter the trip computer menu 164 Controls in detail Control system Fuel consumption statistics after start Press button or repeatedly until you see the first function of the trip computer menu Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the left multifunction display From start 1 Distance driven since start 2 Average speed since start 3 Time elapsed since start 4 Average fuel consumption since start Fuel consumption since last reset Press button or repeatedly until you see the first function of the trip computer menu Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the left multifunction display From reset 1 Distance driven since last reset 2 Average speed since last reset 3 Time elapsed since last reset 4 Average fuel consumption since last re set Resetting fuel consumption statistics Press button or repeatedly until you see the first function of the trip computer menu Press button j or k repeatedly until you see the reading that you want to reset in the left multifunction dis play Press and hold the reset button in the instrument cluster page 27 until the value is reset to 0 i All statistics stored since the last engine start will be reset approximatel
427. ufactur er s instructions Occupants especially children should nev er place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door where the head thorax air bag inflates This could result in serious injuries or death should the head thorax air bag be triggered Always sit nearly upright properly use the seat belt and use an appro priately sized infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag Note the following important information when you place a child in the passenger seat Your vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to turn off the front passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the OCS senses the weight of a typical 12 month old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front passenger seat 85 Safety and Security Occupant safety A child in a rear facing child restraint on the passenger seat will be seriously in jured or even killed if the passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances even with the air bag technology in stalled in your vehicle If you install a rear facing child restraint on the passenger seat make sure that the 5 indicator lamp is illumi nated indicating that the passenger front air bag is deactivated Should the 5 indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the
428. ulic brake system is activated Enter the vehicle and insert the SmartKey in the starter switch For more information see SmartKey page 102 Warning G When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury i Opening a door causes the windows on that side of the car to open slightly They will return to the up position when the door is closed 39 Getting started Unlocking Unlocking with KEYLESS GO With the KEYLESS GO function you can lock and unlock the vehicle without using the remote control buttons on the SmartKey and start the engine without in serting the SmartKey in the starter switch The function of the SmartKey overrules the KEYLESS GO function Grasp an outside door handle All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knobs on the doors move up The anti theft alarm system is dis armed The electro hydraulic brake system is activated If the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is inside the vehicle pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop button on the gear selector le ver corresponds to turning the SmartKey to the various starter switch positions page 40 For more information see SmartKey with KEYLESS GO page 105 Starter switch posit
429. ultifunc tion display while driving off Find the SmartKey or change its present location immediately e g place it on the front passenger seat or insert it in shirt pocket Remember that the engine can be started by anyone with a SmartKey with KEYLESS GO that is left inside the vehicle If you leave the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO behind when exiting and locking the vehicle the message Key recognized in vehicle will appear in the multifunction display Factory setting Global unlocking Grasp an outside door handle All turn signals flash once The locking knobs in the doors move up The anti theft alarm system is disarmed The vehicle will lock again automatically and reactivate the alarm system within ap proximately 40 seconds of unlocking if neither a door nor the trunk is opened Global locking Press lock button on an outside door handle page 64 or the trunk lid page 110 With the trunk and all doors closed all turn signals flash three times The lock ing knobs in the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed i If the vehicle has been parked for more than 72 hours you must pull an outside door handle in order to activate the KEYLESS GO function i The vehicle could inadvertently unlock if the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is within 3 ft 1 m of the vehicle and an outside door handle is splashed with water or you attempt to clean an outside door handle 109 Controls in detail
430. upper part of the wind screen should be folded back 205 Controls in detail Retractable hardtop 2 Buckle Guide the fastening straps around the top of the roll bar and close buckles 2 Tighten the fastening straps if neces sary Lower the roll bar page 81 Fold the upper section of the wind screen up towards the head restraints until it stops Removing Fold the upper section of the wind screen back Adjust the roll bar to a height page 81 that allows you to reach easily underneath it 1 Release button Undo the buckles on the upper section of the roll bar by pressing release button 1 Lower the roll bar page 81 Make sure the fastening straps do not get caught Pull the wind screen out towards the front of the vehicle Be careful not to damage interior trim with the guide tabs Store the wind screen in a safe place Luggage cover The luggage cover covers luggage cargo in the trunk To prevent damage to the retractable hard top or luggage cargo when lowering Load trunk only to the height of the luggage cover Do not permit luggage cargo to push up the closed luggage cover Do not load anything on top of or in front of the luggage cover Do not place anything on the shelf behind the roll bar 206 Controls in detail Retractable hardtop Closing luggage cover Closed luggage cover 1 Luggage cover 2 Zipper 3 Side holder 4 Handle Pull out luggage cover 1 i
431. ure Be sure to readjust the tire inflation pressure for normal driving speeds You should wait until the tires are cold before adjusting the tire inflation pressure Some vehicles may have supplemental tire pressure information for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condi tion If such information is provided it can be found on the placard located on the in side of the fuel filler flap Tire inflation pressure changes by approxi mately 1 5 psi 0 1 bar per 18 F 10 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire inflation pressure where the temperature is different from the outside temperature Checking tire inflation pressure Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km If you check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are warm the vehicle has been driven for several miles or sitting less than 3 hours the reading will be approximately 4 psi 0 3 bar higher than the cold reading This is normal Do not let air out to match the specified cold tire in flation pressure Otherwise the tire will be underinflated Warning G If the tire inflation pressure repeatedly drops Check the tires for punctures from foreign objects Check to see whether air is leak
432. urfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi cle control Your vehicle s ABS will not pre vent this type of control loss 267 Operation Driving instructions Road salts and chemicals can adversely af fect braking efficiency Increased pedal force may become necessary to produce the normal brake effect Depressing the brake pedal periodically when traveling at length on salt strewn roads can bring road salt impaired braking efficiency back to normal If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt treated roads the braking efficien cy should be tested as soon as possible af ter driving is resumed For more information see Winter driving page 316 Standing water Warning G Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking ma neuvers Warning G If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow make sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle with the engine running Otherwise deadly carbon monoxide CO gases may enter vehicle in terior resulting in unconsciousness and death To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation open a window slightly on the side of the ve hicle not facing the wind Warning G The outside temperature indicator is not de signed to serve as an Ice Warning Device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose Indicated temperatures just abov
433. us to shift the gear selector le ver out of P or N if the engine speed is high er than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accel erate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal 55 Getting started Driving Release the brake pedal Carefully depress the accelerator pedal Once the vehicle is in motion the automat ic central locking system engages and the locking knobs drop down After a cold start the transmission engag es at a higher revolution This allows the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature earlier Switching on headlamps Low beam headlamps The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel Exterior lamp switch 1 Off 2 Low beam headlamps on Turn the exterior lamp switch to position B The low beam headlamps come on Warning G On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi cle control Your vehicle s ABS will not pre vent this type of loss of control In order to avoid damage to the transmis sion Wait for the gear selection process to com plete before setting the vehicle in motion Place the gear selector lever in position D or R o
434. use the cruise control lever to de celerate the brake system will automatically brake the vehicle if the engine s braking power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently Warning G The set speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions permit Possible acceleration or decelera tion differences arising from returning to the preset speed could cause an accident and or serious injury to you and others 213 Controls in detail Driving systems Distronic When activated the Distronic adaptive cruise control system increases the driving convenience afforded by the cruise control while traveling on expressways and other major roadways If the Distronic distance sensor detects a slower moving vehicle directly ahead your vehicle s speed will be reduced so that you follow that vehicle at the pre set following distance If there is no vehicle directly ahead of you Distronic will function in the same way as standard cruise control page 209 Warning G Distronic adaptive cruise control is not a substitute for active driving involvement It does not react to pedestrians or stationary objects recognize or predict the lane curva ture nor the movement of preceding vehicles Distronic can only apply a maximum of 20 of the vehicle s braking power It is the driver s responsibility at all times to be attentive to the road weather and traffic conditions In addition the driver mu
435. ustomer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 13 Introduction Operator s Manual Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada If you plan to operate your vehicle in for eign countries please be aware that Service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat alytic converters may not be available the use of leaded fuels will damage the catalysts gasoline may have a considerably low er octane rating and improper fuel can cause engine damage Certain Mercedes Benz models are avail able for delivery in Europe under our Euro pean Delivery Program For details consult an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or write to In the USA Mercedes Benz USA LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Montvale NJ 07645 0350 In Canada Mercedes Benz Canada Inc European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto Ontario M4G 4C9 14 Introduction Where to find it This Operator s Manual is designed to pro vide comprehensive support information for you the vehicle operator Each section has its own reference color At a glance Here you will find an overview of all the controls that can be operated from the driver s seat Getting started Here you will find all the information you need for your first drive You should read this section first if this is your first Mercedes Benz vehicle or if you are rent ing or borr
436. ut in the same manner If you live in Canada or if you are having difficulties programming a gate operator regardless of where you live by using the programming procedures replace step 4 with the following Step 4 Press and hold the signal transmitter button 2 3 or 4 Do not release this button until it has been successful ly trained While still holding down the signal transmitter button 2 3 or 4 cycle your hand held remote control button 6 as follows Press and hold button 6 for 2 seconds then release it for 2 seconds and again press and hold it for 2 seconds Repeat this se quence on the hand held remote con trol until the frequency signal has been learned Upon successful training indi cator lamp 1 will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds Proceed with programming step 5 and step 6 to complete i Upon completion of programming the inte grated remote control make sure you retain the hand held remote control that came with the ga rage door opener gate operator or other device You may need it for use in other vehicles for fu ture programming of an integrated remote con trol or simply for continued use as a hand held remote control to operate the respective device in other situations 255 Controls in detail Useful features Reprogramming a single signal trans mitter button To program a device using a signal trans mitter button previously trained follow these
437. utomat ically Always make sure that there is sufficient overhead clearance Warning G Only drive with the trunk closed as among other dangers such as blocked visibility ex haust fumes may enter the vehicle interior i When the hardtop is retracted it must be completely lowered in the trunk before the trunk can be closed page 199 i Do not place the SmartKey in the open trunk You may lock yourself out i If the vehicle was previously centrally locked the trunk will lock automatically after closing it All turn signal lamps flash three times to confirm locking Vehicles with KEYLESS GO To prevent a possi ble inadvertent lockout the trunk will open auto matically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is recognized inside the vehicle or in the trunk The vehicle is only locked when the turn signals flash three times If you are carrying a second SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you you can still lock the vehicle 114 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Closing trunk from inside automatically In vehicles with trunk opening closing system you can close the trunk from the inside using the remote trunk opening closing switch 1 Remote trunk opening closing switch vehicles with trunk opening closing system 2 Indicator lamp Warning G To prevent possible personal injury always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk lid opening when closing the trunk Be espe cially careful when small chil
438. vated and the current speed is set Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Setting a higher speed Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 page 218 to increase the vehicle speed in incre ments of 5 mph Canada 10 km h The new speed is set Setting a lower speed Briefly tip the cruise control lever in di rection of arrow 2 page 218 to de crease the vehicle speed in increments of 5 mph Canada 10 km h The new speed is set Fine adjustment in 1 mph Canada 1 km h increments Faster Briefly pull the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 4 page 218 i If you do not take your foot off of the accel erator but continue to accelerate past the set speed the following message will appear in the multifunction display DTR override The distance to slower moving vehicles in front of you will not be set Your vehicle speed will then be determined only by the accelerator pedal position i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate Distronic After brief acceleration e g for passing the cruise control will resume the last speed set i When you use the cruise control lever to de celerate the brakes will be applied to support deceleration In addition the transmission will automatically downshift on long downhill grades 220 Controls in detail Driving systems Setting to last stored speed Resume function Briefly pull the cruise contro
439. ve ness of the ABS the BAS the ESP and the electro hydraulic brake system is only achieved with winter tires page 316 or snow chains as required Warning G Do not pump the brake pedal Use firm steady brake pedal pressure instead Pump ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS and significantly reduces braking effectiveness 88 Safety and Security Driving safety systems The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on when you switch on the ignition It goes out when the engine is run ning Braking If the ABS activates during braking the ABS ESP warning lamp v in the in strument cluster dial flashes Because of the electro hydraulic brake system you will not feel any pulsation in the brake ped al Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal Continuous steady brake pedal pressure yields the advantages provided by the ABS namely braking power and the ability to steer the vehicle The ABS ESP warning lamp v flashes whenever the ABS is activated which can be an indication of hazardous road condi tions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving Emergency brake maneuver Keep continuous full pressure on the brake pedal For more information see the Practical hints section page 332 Warning G When the ABS is malfunctioning the BAS and the ESP are also switched off When the ABS is malfunctioning the wheels may lock during ha
440. vehicle s operating safety by having all required maintenance and safety checks performed on the vehicle and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes Benz Center to address the malfunction and warning messages page 347 i After you have scrolled through all recorded status messages the first recorded message ap pears again 153 Controls in detail Control system Should the vehicle s system record any conditions while driving the number of messages will reappear in the multifunc tion display when the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 0 or re moved from the starter switch or when you turn off the engine by press ing the KEYLESS GO start stop but ton on the gear selector lever once and open the driver s door this puts the starter switch in position 0 same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch Settings menu In the Settings menu there are two func tions The function Reset with which you can reset most settings to those set at the factory A collection of submenus with which you can make individual settings for your vehicle The following settings and submenus are available Resetting all settings You can reset the functions of most of the submenus to the factory settings For safety the Light circuit Headlamp mode submenu in the Lighting menu can be reset with the vehicle at standstill only Press button or repeatedly until the Sett
441. vent of strong braking maneuvers sudden changes of direction an accident 84 Safety and Security Occupant safety The use of infant or child restraints is re quired by law in all 50 states the District of Columbia the U S territories and all Ca nadian provinces Infants and small children should be seat ed in an appropriate infant or child re straint system which is properly secured by a lap shoulder belt and that complies with U S Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 A statement by the child restraint manu facturer of compliance with this standard can be found on the instruction label on the restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint When using any infant or child restraint system be sure to carefully read and fol low all manufacturer s instructions for in stallation and use Please read and observe warning labels af fixed to inside of vehicle and to infant or child restraints Warning G Never release the seat belt buckle while the vehicle is in motion since the special seat belt retractor will be deactivated Warning G Children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropri ate infant or child restraint recommended for the size and weight of the child The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle s seat belt fully in accordance with the child seat man
442. w beam headlamps the tail and parking lamps the license plate lamps and the side marker lamps will switch on and off automatically Warning G If the exterior lamp switch is set to U the headlamps may switch off unexpect edly when the system senses bright am bient light for example light from oncoming traffic the headlamps will not be automatically switched on under foggy conditions To minimize risk to you and to others acti vate headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to B when driving or when traffic and or ambient lighting conditions require you to do so In low ambient lighting conditions only switch from position U to B with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location Switching from U to B will briefly switch off the headlamps Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driver The driver is responsible for the operation of the vehicle s lights at all times 130 Controls in detail Lighting Daytime running lamp mode Turn the exterior lamp switch to position M or U When the engine is running the low beam headlamps are switched on auto matically In low ambient light conditions the fol lowing lamps will switch on additional ly Tail lamps Side marker lamps Parking lamps License plate lamps Canada only The daytime running lamp mode is manda tory and therefore in a con
443. w mirror 48 Antiglare position 180 Auto dimming 180 J Jack 389 Jacking up the vehicle 406 Jump starting 419 460 Index K Key Mechanical 391 Valet locking 117 Key SmartKey Battery check lamp 102 Factory setting 103 Locking unlocking 38 63 102 Messages in the multifunction display 378 Opening retractable hardtop 201 Remote control 102 Replacing batteries 395 Selective setting 104 Starter switch positions 40 Turning off the engine 62 Unlocking Trunk lid 111 Key SmartKey with KEYLESS GO 105 Battery check lamp 106 Closing Trunk 116 Factory setting 108 Locking unlocking 39 63 105 Messages in the multifunction display 378 Opening retractable hardtop 201 Remote control 105 Replacing battery 395 Selective setting 109 Starter switch positions 40 Turning off the engine 62 Unlocking Trunk lid 111 KEYLESS GO Closing windows 198 Important notes 107 Locking unlocking 39 63 105 Messages in the multifunction display 378 Start stop button 31 40 53 Starter switch positions 40 Starting the engine 53 Turning off the engine 62 Unlocking Trunk lid 111 Kickdown 171 Kilopascal 313 Knee bag 72 L Labels identification 430 Lamp bulbs exterior 397 Lamps exterior Delayed switch off 160 Exterior lamp switch 25 55 Front 398 Light sensor 380 Replacing bulbs for rear 398 402 Switching off 128 Switching on 128 Lamps indicator and warning ABS 29 334 ABS ESP
444. ward and parking lamps Standing lamps right turn left one stop Standing lamps left turn left two stops C Indicator lamp for parking lamps Indicator lamp for front fog lamps Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp i If you drive in countries where vehicles drive on the other side of the road than the country in which the vehicle is registered you must have the headlamps modified for symmetrical low beams Relevant information can be obtained at any authorized Mercedes Benz Center i With the SmartKey removed from the starter switch or the engine turned off with KEYLESS GO and the driver s door open a warning sounds if the parking lamps or the low beam headlamps are switched on The message Turn off lamps appears in the multifunction display 129 Controls in detail Lighting Manual headlamp mode The low beam headlamps and parking lamps can be switched on or off with the exterior lamp switch page 55 Automatic headlamp mode The following lamps switch on and off au tomatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light Low beam headlamps Tail lamps Parking lamps License plate lamps Side marker lamps Turn the exterior lamp switch to posi tion U With the SmartKey in starter switch position 1 or the KEYLESS GO start stop button pressed once only the parking lamps and side marker lamps will switch on and off automati cally When the engine is running the lo
445. way alarm switch 98 6 Retractable hardtop open close switch with buttons for roll bar 199 81 Item Page 7 ABC vehicle level control button 225 8 ESP switch 91 9 Thumbwheel for setting fol lowing distance for Distronic 221 a Distance warning function on off switch 224 b Program mode selector switch for automatic trans mission 177 33 At a glance Overhead control panel Overhead control panel Item Page 1 Left reading lamp on off 134 2 Temperature sensor for automatic climate control 184 3 Right reading lamp on off 134 4 Interior lighting control 134 5 Interior rear view mirror 47 180 6 Reading lamp 134 7 Garage door opener 251 8 Tele Aid emergency call system button 244 34 At a glance Storage compartments 35 At a glance Storage compartments Item Page 1 Glove box 233 2 Passenger seat storage compartment 234 First aid kit 388 3 Door storage compart ment 233 4 Rear storage compart ment passenger side 235 CD changer 235 5 Side storage compartment in trunk parcel net 237 6 Trunk Vehicle tool kit jack spare wheel 388 Load assist 241 Luggage cover 205 Trunk load 443 Load limit 288 Item Page 7 Navigation computer re fer to separate Operator s Manual 8 Rear storage compart ment driver s side 235 9 Door storage compart ment 233 a Driver s seat storage
446. witch 1 Closing trunk from outside automatically In vehicles with trunk opening closing sys tem you can close the trunk separately from the outside using the trunk closing switch Warning G Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being in jured To prevent possible personal injury always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk lid opening when closing the trunk Be especially careful when small children are around To stop the closing procedure do one of the following Press button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Press the trunk opening closing switch on the driver s door Press trunk closing switch Press the KEYLESS GO locking closing switch Pull the trunk lid handle Even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch the trunk opening closing switch can be operated Therefore do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsu pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury 116 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Vehicles without KEYLESS GO 1 Trunk closing switch Vehicles with KEYLESS GO 1 Trunk closing switch Press trunk closing switch 1 briefly The trunk closes Closing trunk and locking vehicle from outside vehicles with KEYLESS GO In vehicles with trunk opening closing sys tem and KEYLESS GO you can close the t
447. wo tensioning straps on it that must both be removed be fore mounting the spare wheel 1 Buckle 2 Clip Press on both clips 2 simultaneously to release buckle 1 Lifting the vehicle Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking wheels with wheel chocks not included or other sizable objects When changing wheel on a level sur face Place one wheel chock or other sizable object in front of and anoth er wheel chock or sizable object be hind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on a level surface However should circumstances require you to do so on a hill place a wheel chock or oth er sizable object and the other wheel chock or sizeable object as follows Place wheel chocks or other sizable objects on the downhill side block ing both wheels of the axle not be ing worked on i The tensioning straps are shown in red for illustration purposes The tensioning straps on the spare wheel of your vehicle are black i Keep the tensioning straps in a safe place You will need them to store the spare wheel in the trunk after use page 390 407 Practical hints Flat tire Take the vehicle tool kit and the jack out of the storage compartment under the trunk floor page 388 On wheel to be changed loosen but do not yet remove the wheel bolts ap proximately one full turn with wrench The jack support tubes are located behind
448. x Vehicle washing In the winter thoroughly remove all traces of road salt as soon as possible When washing the underbody do not for get to clean the inner sides of the wheels Hand wash Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct sunlight Only use a mild car wash detergent such as Mercedes Benz approved Car Shampoo Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif fused jet of water Direct only a very weak spray towards the ventilation intake Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge and chamois frequently Rinse with clean water and thoroughly dry with a chamois Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the finish Automatic car wash You can have your car washed in an auto matic car wash from the start Automatic car washes without brushes are prefera ble To protect the filter system switch the automatic climate control to air recirculation mode page 191 If the vehicle is very dirty prewash it be fore running it through the automatic car wash i Vehicles with KEYLESS GO If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water and a SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is in close prox imity i e within approximately 3 ft 1 m the ve hicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked Do not use scouring agents on these parts Never apply strong force and only use a soft non scratching cloth when cleaning the vehicle Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry cloth or sponge Otherwise y
449. xceed 2 3 of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous terrain 448 Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Fuel requirements Only use premium unleaded fuel The octane number posted at the pump must be 91 min It is an average of both the Research R octane num ber and the Motor M octane number R M 2 This is also known as the ANTI KNOCK INDEX Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol IPA IBA and TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10 MTBE must not exceed 15 The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3 plus additional cosolvents Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not allowed Gasohol which contains 10 ethanol and 90 unleaded gasoline can be used These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements such as resistance to spark knock boiling range vapor pressure etc Gasoline additives A major concern among engine manufac turers is carbon build up caused by gaso line Mercedes Benz recommends only the use of quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the build up of carbon depos its After an extended period of using fuels without such additives carbon deposits can build up especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area leading to engine performance problems such as Warm up hesitation Unstable idle Knockin
450. ximately 30 minutes off No red indicator lamp on i If one or both of the lamps on the seat heat ing switch are flashing there is insufficient volt age available since too many electrical consumers are turned on The seat heating switches off automatically The seat heating will switch back on again auto matically as soon as sufficient voltage is avail able 125 Controls in detail Seats Seat ventilation The blue indicator lamps on the switch in dicate the selected ventilation level The switch is located on the door control panel 1 Seat ventilation switch Switch on the ignition page 39 Switching on seat ventilation Press switch 1 Three blue indicator lamps on the switch come on Continue pressing switch 1 until the desired seat ventilation level is reached Switching off seat ventilation Press switch 1 repeatedly until all in dicator lamps go out Level 3 Three blue indicator lamps on highest level 2 Two blue indicator lamps on 1 One blue indicator lamp on lowest level off No blue indicator lamp on i If one or all of the lamps on the seat ventila tion switch are flashing there is insufficient volt age available since too many electrical consumers are turned on The seat ventilation switches off automatically The seat ventilation will switch back on again au tomatically as soon as sufficient voltage is avail able 126 Controls in detail Memory func
451. y 4 hours after the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 0 or removed from the starter switch Resetting will not occur if you turn the SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this time period i The fuel consumption statistics reset auto matically to 0 when either of the following values is exceeded distance covered 100000 miles time elapsed 10000 hours 165 Controls in detail Control system Distance to empty Press button or repeatedly until you see the first function of the trip computer menu Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the left multifunction display Range In the right multifunction display you will see the calculated range based on the current fuel tank level TEL menu You can use the functions in the TEL menu to operate your telephone provided it is connected to a hands free system and switched on Switch on the telephone and COMAND Press button or on the steering wheel repeatedly until you see the TEL menu in the left multifunction display i If only very little fuel is left in the tank a ve hicle at the fuel pump is shown instead of the range Warning G A driver s attention to the road must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others we rec ommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a tele phone call If you choose to use the tele phone wh
452. y affect the safety performance or reliability of your vehicle Please do not use them Genuine Mercedes Benz parts as well as conversion parts and accessories ap proved by us are available at your autho rized Mercedes Benz Center where you will receive comprehensive information also on permissible technical modifications and where proper installation will be per formed 10 Introduction Operator s Manual This Operator s Manual contains a great deal of useful information We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle we urge you to follow the in structions and warnings contained in this manual Ignoring them could result in dam age to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others Vehicle damage caused by fail ure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manual Therefore you may find explanations for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment your au thorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper proce dures We continuously strive to improve our product and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment Therefore infor mation illustrations and description
453. y particular attention to the condition of the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to the freezing point Mercedes Benz recommends winter tires page 316 with a minimum tread depth of approximately 1 6 in 4 mm on all four wheels for the winter season to ensure normal balanced handling characteristics On packed snow they can reduce your stopping distance as compared with sum mer tires Stopping distance however is still considerably greater than when the road is not covered with snow or ice Exer cise appropriate caution Tire speed rating Regardless of the tire speed rating local speed limits should be obeyed Use pru dent driving speeds appropriate to prevail ing conditions Warning G If ice has formed on the road tire traction will be substantially reduced Under such weather conditions drive steer and brake with extreme caution Avoid spinning of a drive wheel This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited War ranty Warning G Even when permitted by law never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi mum speed rating of the tires Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire fail ure causing loss of vehicle control and pos sibly resulting in an accident and or personal injury and possible death for you and for others 266 Operation Driving instructions SL 550 Your vehicl
454. y release button 1 The trunk opens i To deny any unauthorized person access to the trunk e g when you valet park the vehicle lock it separately with the mechanical key Leave only the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO less its mechanical key with the vehicle i You can only cancel the separate trunk lock ing mode by means of the mechanical key 118 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Illumination of the emergency release but ton The button flashes for 30 minutes after opening the trunk The button flashes for 60 minutes after closing the trunk Power closing assist for trunk lid It is not necessary to slam the trunk lid closed A electrical power assisted mecha nism draws trunk lid closed quietly and au tomatically once trunk lid has been latched When the pneumatic power as sisted mechanism has stopped trunk can be re opened Power closing assist for trunk lid Press the trunk lid gently into its lock The trunk closes automatically i The emergency release button unlocks and opens the trunk while the vehicle is standing still or in motion i The emergency release button does not open the trunk lid if the vehicle battery is dis charged or disconnected Warning G To prevent possible personal injury always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk lid opening when closing the trunk Be espe cially careful when small children are around In case of danger pull the inside
455. y remain locked even when the vehicle is unlocked with the SmartKey or with the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Glove box Armrest storage compartments Rear storage compartments Unlocking the storage compartments separately Insert the mechanical key into the glove box lock Turn the mechanical key to position 1 You can now open the storage com partments Parcel net in passenger footwell A small convenience parcel net is located in the passenger footwell It is for small and light items such as road maps mail etc i The separate locking status of these storage compartments can only be canceled with the mechanical key The storage compartments in the doors cannot be locked i If the glove box cannot be unlocked using the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO see Unlocking the glove box page 392 Warning G The parcel net is intended for storing light weight items only Heavy objects objects with sharp edges or fragile objects may not be transported in the parcel net In an accident during hard brak ing or sudden maneuvers they could be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants The parcel net cannot protect transported goods in the event of an accident 237 Controls in detail Useful features Parcel nets in trunk There are three nets available in the trunk to secure loads a pocket net on each side of the right and left trunk side walls a tru
456. ystem 92 High performance brake system AMG vehicles only 262 Warning lamp 335 Break in period 258 Bulbs Messages in the multifunction display 380 Replacing 397 C California retail buyers and lessees important notice for 11 Call priority Tele Aid 249 Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 444 Cargo area see Trunk Carpets cleaning 329 Catalytic converter 269 CD changer 150 CD player 150 Operating 151 455 Index Center console Lower part 32 Upper part 31 Central locking Automatic 119 162 Central locking unlocking switch 31 119 Locking unlocking from inside 119 Certification label 430 Check engine see Lamps indicator and warning Checking tire pressure electronically with the Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System Advanced TPMS Canada only 298 Children in the vehicle Air bags 83 Front passenger front air bag off indica tor lamp 76 345 Infant and child restraint systems 83 Occupant Classification System OCS 72 Cigarette lighter 239 Clock 25 157 Cockpit 24 Cold tire inflation pressure 312 COMAND system 31 Driving instructions 268 Combination switch High beam 56 133 Turn signals 56 Windshield wipers 57 Consumer battery 281 Control and operation of radio transmitters 268 Control system 139 142 Control system menus AMG Menu 146 AUDIO 149 NAV 151 Settings 153 Standard display 145 TEL 165 Trip computer 163 Vehicle status message memory 152
457. z i If the battery supplying the vehicle s electri cal consumers is disconnected the days of dis connection will not be included in the count shown by the maintenance service indicator To arrive at the true maintenance service deadline you will need to subtract these days from the days shown in the maintenance service indicator message or maintenance service indicator dis play Do not confuse the maintenance service indica tor with the engine oil level indicator N If the maintenance service indicator was in advertently reset have an authorized Mercedes Benz Center correct it Only reset if the proper maintenance service has been performed Resetting the system without performing proper maintenance service as called for by the maintenance service indicator will result in engine damage and or other vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty 322 Operation Vehicle care Cleaning and care of the vehicle Regular and proper care will help to main tain the value of your vehicle The best way to protect your vehicle from harmful envi ronmental influences is to wash it and use protective treatments regularly While in operation even while parked your vehicle is subjected to varying external influences which if gone unchecked can attack the paintwork as well as the vehicle underbody and cause lasting damage Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions but
458. z USA LLC If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Mercedes Benz USA LLC To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov 19 Introduction Vehicle data recording Vehicle data recording Information regarding electronic recording devices Including notice pursuant to California Code 9951 Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and if equipped with the Tele Aid system may transmit some data in certain accidents This information helps for example to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler its affiliates or sales service organization a

AOC L22W861 Flat Panel Television User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents